Você está na página 1de 1109

RAN14.

Feature Activation Guide


Issue Date 05 2012-12-31

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

About This Document


Purpose
This document provides guidelines for enabling or disabling a feature after initial configuration. Based on the activation, verification, and deactivation of a feature in the feature list, the guidelines aim to ensure that the feature is available on the network. This document describes how to activate a license and configure a feature in RAN.
NOTE

The BSC6900 is used as an example to describe the network controller in this document.

Product Version
The solution version is RAN14.0 related to this document, for more details you can refer to the following table. Product Name BSC6900 NodeB NodeB Product Version V900R014C00 V100R014 V200R014

Intended Audience
This document is intended for: l l l l Technical support engineers Maintenance engineers Field engineers Network optimization engineers

Organization
1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This chapter describes the changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide. 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions RANFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not licensecontrolled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated. 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME This section provides an overview of the configuration on the CME. The CME is a configuration tool on GUIs assisting you to effectively configure the data about wireless NE features. You can reconfigure configuration parameters by using the configuration expresses provided by the CME to activate or deactivate specified features. 4 Activating the UMTS License In the case of certain UMTS features, a license control item is defined for each feature. The license control item of a feature must be activated before the configuration and use of the feature. The license control items related to the RNC can be activated on the M2000 or RNC LMT, whereas those related to the NodeB can be activated only on the M2000. 5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010510 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release. 6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010501 Conversational QoS Class. 7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS Class. 8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010503 Interactive QoS Class. 9 Configuring Background QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010504 Background QoS Class. 10 Configuring Emergency Call This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021104 Emergency Call. 11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010506 RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity. 13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010205 Cell Digital Combination and Split. 14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010202 UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH). 15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010301 Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1). 16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010302 Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2). 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021101 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 18 Configuring Integrity Protection This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011401 Integrity Protection. 19 Configuring Encryption This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011402 Encryption. 20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020501 Open Loop Power Control. 21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020502 Downlink Power Balance. 22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020503 Outer Loop Power Control. 23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020504 Inner Loop Power Control.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

24 Configuring Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020101 Admission Control. 25 Configuring Load Measurement This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020102 Load Measurement. 26 Configuring Load Reshuffling This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020106 Load Reshuffling. 27 Configuring Overload Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020107 Overload Control. 28 Configuring Code Resource Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020108 Code Resource Management. 29 Configuring Potential User Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020105 Potential User Control. 30 Configuring Cell Barring This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021102 Cell Barring. 31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021301 Shared Network Support in Connected Mode. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020201 Intra NodeB Softer Handover. 33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020202 Intra RNC Soft Handover. 34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020203 Inter RNC Soft Handover. 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020301 Intra Frequency Hard Handover. 36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010801 Intra RNC Cell Update. 37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010802 Inter RNC Cell Update. 38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010901 Intra RNC URA Update. 39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010902 Inter RNC URA Update. 40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021400 Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR). 41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-140102 CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. 42 Configuring NodeB Clock This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501 NodeB Clock. 43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030104 Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface. 44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030105 Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic. 45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030106 Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth. 46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-05030107 CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes". 47 Configuring F5 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030110 F5. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-050305 UBR+ ATM QoS Class".
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

49 Configuring Link Aggregation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation. 50 Configuring Flow Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040100 Flow Control. 51 Configuring BOOTP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031100 BOOTP. In ATM transport mode, the NodeB can automatically set up the OM channel with the BSC6900 by using the BOOTSTRAP Protocol (BOOTP) function. 52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031101 NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode. 53 Configuring License Control for Urgency This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031000 Intelligently Out of Service. 55 Configuring OCNS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031200 OCNS (Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031400 Power Off the Equipment Level by Level. 57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031500 Solar Power Device Management. 58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-060003 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+ This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010617 VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+. 62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061703 Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA. 63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010618 IMS Signaling over HSPA. 64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011501 PDCP Header Compression (RoHC). 65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+ This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010619 CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+. 66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010613 AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020701 AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control. 68 Configuring TFO/TrFO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011600 TFO/TrFO. 69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140201 AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA. 70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Service. 71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast. 72 Configuring Warning of Disaster
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020127 Warning of Disaster. 73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package. 74 Configuring MBMS Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061602 MBMS Admission Control. 75 Configuring MBMS Load Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061603 MBMS Load Control. 76 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061605 MBMS Transport Resource Management. 77 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061606 Streaming Service on MBMS. 78 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061608 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS. 79 Configuring MBMS Phase 2 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2. 80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode. 81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA. 82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancement. 83 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users. 84 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010627 FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

85 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010626 MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion). 86 Configuring MBMS over Iur This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010661 MBMS over Iur. 87 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010662 Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH. 88 Configuring MSCH Scheduling This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010663 MSCH Scheduling. 89 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010665 MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics. 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS. 91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020802 OTDOA Based LCS. 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020804 LCS Classified Zones. 94 Configuring LCS over Iur This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020805 LCS over Iur. 95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020807 Iupc Interface for LCS service. 96 Configuring Push to Talk This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020134 Push to Talk. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package. 98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061202 HSUPA Admission Control. 99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061203 HSUPA Power Control. 100 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061204 HSUPA Mobility Management. 101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC. 102 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061211 20 HSUPA Users per Cell. 103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061212 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion. 104 Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061401 HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH). 105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI. 106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover. 107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061405 HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User. 108 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010632 Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA. 109 Configuring HSUPA over Iur This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010635 HSUPA over Iur.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010690 TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage. 111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission. 112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management. 113 Configuring HSUPA FDE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE. 114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010712 Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA. 115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020136 Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA. 116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020137 Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation. 117 Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010634 60 HSUPA Users per Cell. 118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation. 119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA. 120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140202 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2). Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation is short for CCPIC. 121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061001 15 Codes per Cell. 123 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061018 Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex. 124 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061009 HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF). 125 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061005 HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation. 126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061004 HSDPA Power Control. 127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061003 HSDPA Admission Control. 128 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061020 Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service. 129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061010 HSDPA Flow Control. 130 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management. 131 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061002 HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28. 132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation. 133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010631 Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB. 134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package. 135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR. 136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition. 137 Configuring HSDPA DRD This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD. 138 Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061113 HS-DPCCH Preamble Support. 139 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010630 Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA. 140 Configuring HSDPA over Iur This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010651 HSDPA over Iur. 141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA. 142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-030010 CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target. 143 Configuring MIMO Prime This chapter describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-030011 MIMO Prime. 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-030004 Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate. 145 Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140221 HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location. 146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140222 Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiv

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010680 HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User. 148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010681 HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User. 149 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010685 Downlink Enhanced L2. 150 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010689 HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User. 151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010683 Downlink 64QAM. 152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010684 2x2 MIMO. Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) is a multi-antenna technology, which enables multiple antennas to receive and transmit data. This increases the data transmission rate. 153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010693 DL 64QAM+MIMO. 154 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010698 HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User. 155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010703 HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User. 156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA+MIMO. 157 Configuring UL 16QAM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010694 UL 16QAM. 158 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010695 UL Layer 2 Improvement. 159 Configuring DC-HSDPA
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010696 DC-HSDPA. 160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140203 HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User. 161 Configuring DC-HSUPA This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140204 DC-HSUPA. 162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010688 Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH. 163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010700 Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier. 164 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010686 CPC - DTX /DRX. 165 Configuring CPC - HS-SCCH less operation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010687 CPC - HS-SCCH less operation. 166 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010697 E-DPCCH Boosting. 167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010701 Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH. 168 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010653 96 HSDPA Users per Cell. 169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010639 96 HSUPA Users per Cell. 170 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010654 128 HSDPA Users per Cell. 171 Configuring 128 HSUPA Users per Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010670 128 HSUPA Users per Cell.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvi

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010704 Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection. 173 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010713 Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier. 174 Configuring Enhanced DRX This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010702 Enhanced DRX. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020500 Enhanced Fast Dormancy. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140205 Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs. 177 Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140206 Layered Paging in URA_PCH. 178 Configuring Web browsing acceleration This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020132 Web browsing acceleration. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 179 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020133 P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 180 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020116 Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers. 181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020117 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load. 182 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020118 Energy Efficiency Improved. 183 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020119 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

184 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020122 Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS. 185 Configuring Intelligent Power Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020121 Intelligent Power Management. 186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021304 RAN Sharing Introduction Package. 187 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130401 Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator. 188 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130402 Flexible Network Architecture. 189 Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD02130403 Mobility Control and Service Differentiation. 190 Configuring Independent License Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130404 Independent License Control. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 191 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021305 RAN Sharing Phase 2. 192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02130501 Dedicated Iub Transmission Control. 193 Configuring IMSI Based Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021303 IMSI Based Handover. 194 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021311 MOCN Introduction Package. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 195 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131101 Carrier Sharing by Operators. 196 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xviii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131102 Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators. 197 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131103 MOCN Mobility Management. 198 Configuring MOCN Load Balance This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131104 MOCN Load Balance. 199 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02131106 Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion. 200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140223 MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation. 201 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021200 HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure). 202 Configuring One Tunnel This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020111 One Tunnel. 203 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050405 Overbooking on ATM Transmission. 204 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050105 ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB. 205 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050106 AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB. 206 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050402 IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 207 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050403 Hybrid Iub IP Transmission. 208 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050404 ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xix

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

209 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050409 IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface. 210 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050410 IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface. 211 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050420 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission. 212 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050422 Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP. 213 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050408 Overbooking on IP Transmission. 214 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050107 IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB. 215 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011500 PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507). 216 Configuring RNC Offload This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-012001 RNC Offload. With this feature, the RNC can send some PS service data directly to Internet over the offload Gi interface. 217 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the feature WRFD-050412 UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission. 218 Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140207 Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC. 219 Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140208 Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC. 220 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050104 Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface. 221 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xx

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050108 Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface. 222 Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050501 Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB. 223 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050502 Synchronous Ethernet. 224 Configuring Ethernet OAM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050425 Ethernet OAM. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 225 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040202 RNC Node Redundancy. 226 Configuring RRU Redundancy This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-040203 RRU Redundancy. 227 Configuring Iu Flex This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021302 Iu Flex. 228 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021306 Iu Flex Load Distribution Management. 229 Configuring Transmit Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010203 Transmit Diversity. Transmit diversity enables the NodeB to provide twice the number of RF DL channels compared with no transmit diversity. 230 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010209 4-Antenna Receive Diversity. 231 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021308 Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km. 232 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020138 HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation. 233 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021001 Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxi

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

234 Configuring High Speed Access This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010206 High Speed Access. 235 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021350 Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell. 236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020302 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage. 237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020304 Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS. 238 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02060501 SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 239 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02060502 SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover. 240 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02060503 SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update. 241 Configuring Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB 2) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010615 Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB 2). 242 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061501 Combination of Two PS Services. 243 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061502 Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services. 244 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061503 Combination of Three PS Services. 245 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061504 Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services. 246 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061505 Combination of Four PS Services. 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020103 Inter Frequency Load Balance. 248 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020114 Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC). 249 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020160 Enhanced Multiband Management. 250 Configuring DRD Introduction Package This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package. 251 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040001 Intra System Direct Retry. 252 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040002 Inter System Direct Retry. 253 Configuring Inter-System Redirect This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040003 Inter System Redirect. 254 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02040004 Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup. 255 Configuring Measurement Based Direct Retry This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020402 Measurement Based Direct Retry. 256 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020120 Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup. 257 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020124 Uplink Flow Control of User Plane. 258 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020104 Intra Frequency Load Balance.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

259 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140211 Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment. 260 Configuring CE Overbooking This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140212 CE Overbooking. 261 Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140213 Intelligent Access Class Control. 262 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140215 Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period. 263 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140216 Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration. 264 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140217 Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold. 265 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070004 Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g. 266 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070005 NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g. 267 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070006 GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g. 268 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-070007 GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g. 269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020303 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage. 270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020309 Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS. 271 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxiv

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020307 Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO. 272 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020308 Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2. 273 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02030801 NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change). 274 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-02030802 PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS. 275 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020305 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service. 276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020306 Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load. 277 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance This section describes how to activate and verify the optional feature WRFD-020401 Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance. 278 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020310 3G/2G Common Load Management. 279 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1 This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020126 Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 280 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020129 Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE. 281 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140218 Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE. 282 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-140224 fast CS fallback based on RIM. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. 283 Configuring Queuing and Preemption
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxv

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010505 Queuing and Preemption. 284 Configuring Access Class Restriction This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021103 Access Class Restriction. 285 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-050424 Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources. 286 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020806 Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight. 287 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020131 Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness. 288 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011502 Active Queue Management (AQM). 289 Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020128 Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service. 290 Configuring TCP Accelerator This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020123 TCP Accelerator. 291 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010507 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control. 292 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020130 Videophone Service Restriction. 293 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020135 Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management. 294 Configuring Micro NodeB Self-Planning This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140219 Micro NodeB Self-Planning. 295 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140209 NodeB Integrated IPSec.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvi

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

296 Configuring NodeB PKI Support This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140210 NodeB PKI Support. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 297 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140220 Intelligent Battery Management. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 298 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221801 Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS). 299 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221802 GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS). This feature enables the spectrum resources to be dynamically shared between the GSM and UMTS networks based on their traffic load, improving frequency utilization. 300 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221501 IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side. For details about data configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) > Common Transmission in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section Common Transmission in the WCDMA RAN Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0. 301 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221504 TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. ) 302 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221601 Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB). For details about data configurations, see section Configuration Reference > MBTS Configuration Reference (V100R007C00) > Common Clock in the 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide, or see section Common Clock in the WCDMA RAN Feature Documentation. The latest 3900 Series Base Station Initial Configuration Guide can be obtained from the following path: HUAWEI Technical Support (support.huawei.com), Support > Documentation > SingleRAN > MBTS > SingleRAN7.0. 303 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-221602 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS). 304 Configuring 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS)
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxvii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature MRFD-221703 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS). 305 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-221803 Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing(UMTS). 306 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interface Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (UMTS) This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the multi-mode feature MRFD-221804 GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (UMTS).

Conventions
Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.
xxviii

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxix

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

About This Document

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxx

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide......................................................................1 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions...............................................................10 3 Overview of Configurations on the CME...............................................................................54
3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods............................................................................................................56 3.2 Configuring Device Data..................................................................................................................................57 3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Parameters.......................................................58 3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iub Interfaces...........................................................................59 3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-CS Interfaces......................................................................60 3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PS Interfaces.......................................................................61 3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iur Interfaces...........................................................................62 3.8 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-BC Interfaces......................................................................63 3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PC Interfaces......................................................................64 3.10 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (U)Iur-g Interface............................................................65 3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gi Interfaces..........................................................................66 3.12 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Radio Parameters..........................................67 3.13 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Cells..........................................................................68 3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring UMTS Cells.....................................................69 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches.........................................................................................................70 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches.........................................................................................70 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches........................................................................................71 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches...............................................................................................71 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches...................................................................................72 3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches........................................................................................73 3.21 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration............................................................................................74

4 Activating the UMTS License...................................................................................................76


4.1 Activating the BSC6900 License.....................................................................................................................77 4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators.......................................................................................................78 4.3 Allocating a License to NodeBs.......................................................................................................................78

5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release...........................................................................................................80
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxi

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class .................................................................................83 7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class...........................................................................................86 8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class..........................................................................................89 9 Configuring Background QoS Class.......................................................................................91 10 Configuring Emergency Call...................................................................................................93 11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface...........................94 12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity..................................................................97 13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split...............................................................99 14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH).................................................................................................................................102 15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)......................105 16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2)...........................109 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control..................................................111 18 Configuring Integrity Protection..........................................................................................120 19 Configuring Encryption.........................................................................................................122 20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control.............................................................................124 21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance...............................................................................127 22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control.............................................................................129 23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control .............................................................................132 24 Configuring Admission Control..........................................................................................134 25 Configuring Load Measurement..........................................................................................138 26 Configuring Load Reshuffling.............................................................................................140 27 Configuring Overload Control.............................................................................................144 28 Configuring Code Resource Management.........................................................................147 29 Configuring Potential User Control.....................................................................................149 30 Configuring Cell Barring.......................................................................................................151 31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode..........................................156 32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover........................................................................159 33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover...............................................................................161 34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover...............................................................................163 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover...................................................................165
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update....................................................................................168 37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update....................................................................................171 38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update..................................................................................173 39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update..................................................................................176 40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) ........................179 41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls.....................................182 42 Configuring NodeB Clock.....................................................................................................184 43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface...........................188 44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic........................190 45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth...........................192 46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes........................................194 47 Configuring F5.........................................................................................................................196 48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class....................................................................................198 49 Configuring Link Aggregation.............................................................................................200 50 Configuring Flow Control.....................................................................................................204 51 Configuring BOOTP...............................................................................................................209 52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode..................................................211 53 Configuring License Control for Urgency..........................................................................215 54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service...........................................................................217 55 Configuring OCNS.................................................................................................................219 56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level...................................................221 57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management.................................................................224 58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)................................226 59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt......................................................................................229 60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)...........................................232 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+................................................................................235 62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA..............................................241 63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA.............................................................................243 64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)............................................................246 65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+........................................................................249
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxiii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band).............................................254 67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control........................................................257 68 Configuring TFO/TrFO..........................................................................................................262 69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA.................................264 70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service.....................................................................................266 71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast..............................................................................276 72 Configuring Warning of Disaster.........................................................................................279 73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package........................................................................281 74 Configuring MBMS Admission Control............................................................................285 75 Configuring MBMS Load Control.......................................................................................287 76 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management...................................................289 77 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS........................................................................291 78 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS.................................................293 79 Configuring MBMS Phase 2..................................................................................................295 80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode...............................................................297 81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA................................................................................299 82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement.................................................................301 83 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users ..........................................................................................................................................................303 84 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS....................................................304 85 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion) ....................................................................................................................................306 86 Configuring MBMS over Iur.................................................................................................309 87 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH.......................................................311 88 Configuring MSCH Scheduling...........................................................................................313 89 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics...............................................315 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS.............................................................317 91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS.........................................................................................325 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS............................................................................................328 93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones......................................................................................336 94 Configuring LCS over Iur......................................................................................................339
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxiv

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service.......................................................................346 96 Configuring Push to Talk......................................................................................................349 97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package.......................................................................351 98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control...........................................................................354 99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control ..................................................................................358 100 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management...................................................................361 101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC................................................................................................363 102 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell.............................................................................366 103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion............................368 104 Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)...........370 105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI.............................................................................................372 106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover.............................................................375 107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User..........................................................................377 108 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA...........................................................380 109 Configuring HSUPA over Iur.............................................................................................382 110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.......................................384 111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.................................................................388 112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management..........................................................391 113 Configuring HSUPA FDE....................................................................................................393 114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA ..........................................................................................................................................................395 115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA................................................403 116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation ..........................................................................................................................................................407 117 Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell.............................................................................411 118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation.......................................................413 119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA...........................................................................................416 120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2).............418 121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package.....................................................................423 122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell............................................................................................426 123 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex....................................................429
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxv

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

124 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF).........................430 125 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation.......................................................................................................................................432 126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control ................................................................................434 127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control.........................................................................437 128 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service......................440 129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control....................................................................................442 130 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management...................................................................445 131 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28........................................................................447 132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation...............................................................................448 133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB.............................................450 134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package..........................................................................454 135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR...........................................................456 136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition...............................................................................458 137 Configuring HSDPA DRD..................................................................................................460 138 Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support...................................................................462 139 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA...........................................................465 140 Configuring HSDPA over Iur.............................................................................................467 141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA...........................................................................................469 142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target.................................473 143 Configuring MIMO Prime...................................................................................................475 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate......................................478 145 Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location..............................................480 146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions ..........................................................................................................................................................482 147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User..........................................................485 148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User..........................................................487 149 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2................................................................................489 150 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User..........................................................492 151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM.........................................................................................495 152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO........................................................................................................499
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxvi

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM+MIMO..........................................................................509 154 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User...........................................................513 155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User.......................................................517 156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO......................................................................................519 157 Configuring UL 16QAM......................................................................................................524 158 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement..............................................................................527 159 Configuring DC-HSDPA.....................................................................................................531 160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User.............................................................537 161 Configuring DC-HSUPA.....................................................................................................540 162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH.............................................................545 163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Co-carrier.............547 164 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX............................................................................................552 165 Configuring CPC - HS-SCCH less operation...................................................................555 166 Configuring E-DPCCH Boosting........................................................................................558 167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH...................................................................565 168 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell.............................................................................567 169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell.............................................................................569 170 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell...........................................................................571 171 Configuring 128 HSUPA Users per Cell...........................................................................573 172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection......................................................575 173 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multi-carrier..............................................................................................................................579 174 Configuring Enhanced DRX................................................................................................581 175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy.............................................................................584 176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs ..........................................................................................................................................................593 177 Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH......................................................................601 178 Configuring Web browsing acceleration..........................................................................604 179 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour................................607 180 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of Multi-Carriers...............................................610 181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load......................................612
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxvii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

182 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved........................................................................616 183 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup..................................618 184 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS....................................................622 185 Configuring Intelligent Power Management...................................................................626 186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package...........................................................628 187 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator.........................................................632 188 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture....................................................................635 189 Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation.........................................637 190 Configuring Independent License Control......................................................................639 191 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2....................................................................................641 192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control........................................................642 193 Configuring IMSI Based Handover...................................................................................647 194 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package......................................................................649 195 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators......................................................................654 196 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators.........................................................657 197 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management....................................................................660 198 Configuring MOCN Load Balance.....................................................................................662 199 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion.........................................................664 200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation...........................................................667 201 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)..............................................................673 202 Configuring One Tunnel.....................................................................................................676 203 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission.........................................................681 204 Configuring ATM Switching-Based Hub NodeB...........................................................685 205 Configuring AAL2 Switching-Based Hub NodeB..........................................................687 206 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface.......................................689 207 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission........................................................................696 208 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB..........................................................................699 209 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface..........................................703 210 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface........................................705 211 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission.......................................................................707
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxviii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

212 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP.....................................................709 213 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission..............................................................711 214 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB....................................................................715 215 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507).....................................................717 216 Configuring RNC Offload...................................................................................................719 217 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission............................................................723 218 Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC.............................................725 219 Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC.................................................728 220 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface....................................................732 221 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface.......................................................734 222 Configuring Clock Synchronization on Ethernet in NodeB.........................................736 223 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet...................................................................................739 224 Configuring Ethernet OAM................................................................................................741 225 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy...............................................................................744 226 Configuring RRU Redundancy..........................................................................................752 227 Configuring Iu Flex...............................................................................................................754 228 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management....................................................757 229 Configuring Transmit Diversity.........................................................................................762 230 Configuring 4-Antenna Receive Diversity.......................................................................764 231 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km........................................................766 232 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation.....................769 233 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier.....................................772 234 Configuring High Speed Access.........................................................................................774 235 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell ..........................................................................................................................................................777 236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage.............................787 237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS................................791 238 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved).........................................................794 239 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover.....................................................799 240 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update.................................................803 241 Configuring Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB 2)........................................................806
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xxxix

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

242 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services...............................................................808 243 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services..........................810 244 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services.............................................................812 245 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services....................... 814 246 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services...............................................................816 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance.....................................................................818 248 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC).................................................825 249 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management............................................................828 250 Configuring DRD Introduction Package..........................................................................833 251 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry.............................................................................837 252 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry.............................................................................840 253 Configuring Inter-System Redirect....................................................................................843 254 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup..........................845 255 Configuring Measurement Based Direct Retry...............................................................848 256 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup............851 257 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane............................................................854 258 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance.....................................................................857 259 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment............................................................. 860 260 Configuring CE Overbooking.............................................................................................863 261 Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control.................................................................865 262 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period...................870 263 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration.....................................875 264 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold ..........................................................................................................................................................878 265 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g ..........................................................................................................................................................884 266 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g........................................................................................................................................... 888 267 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g....................................891 268 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g...................................896 269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage..................................................899 270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS....................................................903
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xl

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

271 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO.........906 272 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2.......................................................................908 273 Configuring NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change)....................................................910 274 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS..................................................912 275 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service.....................................................915 276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load..........................................................918 277 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance................................................921 278 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management...........................................................924 279 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1..............................................926 280 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE...................930 281 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE.....................................934 282 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM..................................................................938 283 Configuring Queuing and Preemption.............................................................................941 284 Configuring Access Class Restriction ..............................................................................943 285 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources........................947 286 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight............................................949 287 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness...................................955 288 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM)...........................................................959 289 Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service.........................................961 290 Configuring TCP Accelerator..............................................................................................964 291 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control....................................................966 292 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction.................................................................970 293 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management.................................972 294 Configuring Micro NodeB Self-Planning.........................................................................977 295 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec................................................................................983 296 Configuring NodeB PKI Support.....................................................................................1004 297 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management...............................................................1015 298 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS)......................................1018 299 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS).......................1021 300 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode Co-Transmission on Base Station Side (NodeB) ........................................................................................................................................................1026
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xli

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

Contents

301 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode Co-Transmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB).........................................................................................................................................1027 302 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB)............................1033 303 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS).........................................................................1034 304 Configuring 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS)...............................................................................................................................1054 305 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)...............1058 306 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interface Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (UMTS)................................................................................................................................1061

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xlii

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide


This chapter describes the changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide.

05 (2012-12-31)
This is the fifth commercial release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue does not include any topics. Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content 284 Configuring Access Class Restriction 248 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC) 107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User 153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM +MIMO 217 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission 290 Configuring TCP Accelerator Description The verification procedure is changed. The verification procedure is changed. The activation procedure is changed. The prerequisite is changed. The prerequisite is changed. The prerequisite is changed.

Compared with issue 04 (2012-11-07), this issue does not exclude any topics.

04 (2012-11-07)
This is the fourth commercial release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue 03 (2012-08-30), this issue does not include any topics. Compared with issue 03 (2012-08-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Content 249 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management 262 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period 186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package 167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH 68 Configuring TFO/TrFO 269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage

Description The verification procedure is changed. The activation procedure is changed. The activation procedure is changed. The prerequisite is changed. The context is changed. The activation procedure is changed.

Compared with issue 03 (2012-08-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

03 (2012-08-30)
This is the third commercial release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-30), this issue includes the following topics: l 138 Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support

Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-30), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content 43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface 156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO 155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User 148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User 147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User 141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA 106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover 110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage Description The task example is changed. The task example is changed. The task example is changed. The task example is changed. The task example is changed. The task example is changed. The task example is changed. The procedure is changed.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Content 220 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface 167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH 237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS 270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS 236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage 268 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS 67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control 112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management 175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy 137 Configuring HSDPA DRD 157 Configuring UL 16QAM 49 Configuring Link Aggregation 58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate 146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions 176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs 200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation 202 Configuring One Tunnel 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance

Description The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The task example and the procedure are changed. The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The procedure is changed. The data preparation is added. The data preparation is added. The procedure is changed, and the data preparation is added. The data preparation is added. The data preparation is added. The data preparation is added.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Content 249 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management 262 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period 263 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration 264 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold 281 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE 282 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM

Description The data preparation is added. The data preparation is added. The data preparation is added. The data preparation is added.

The data preparation is added. The data preparation is added.

Compared with issue 02 (2012-06-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2012-06-30)
This is the second commercial release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue does not include any topics. Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue incorporates the following changes: Content 167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH 175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy 68 Configuring TFO/TrFO 281 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE 286 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight 159 Configuring DC-HSDPA 264 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold 200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Description The activation procedure is changed. The activation procedure is optimized. The context is changed. The activation procedure is optimized. The activation procedure is optimized. The activation procedure is optimized. The activation procedure is optimized.

The activation procedure is optimized.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Content 260 Configuring CE Overbooking 115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA 151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM

Description The activation procedure is optimized. The activation procedure is optimized. The activation procedure is optimized.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-04-26), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2012-04-26)
This is the first commercial release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue includes the following new topics: l l l l l l l 200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation 282 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM 155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User 69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA 160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User 260 Configuring CE Overbooking 294 Configuring Micro NodeB Self-Planning

Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue incorporates the following changes: content 156 Configuring DC-HSDPA+MIMO 215 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507) 262 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period 176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs 269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage 250 Configuring DRD Introduction Package 192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control Description The activation procedure is optimized. The step of activating the license is deleted. The dependencies on other features is changed. The verification procedure is optimized. The verification procedure is optimized. The configuration procedure of activating the RRC Inter-frequency Redirection Based on Distance is added. The configuration procedure of activating Dedicated Iub Transmission Control in IP mode is added.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

content 105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI

Description The step of enabling the single-user peak-rate improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI is added. The configuration procedure is optimized. The configuration of NodeB deployment on the M2000 is modified. The verification steps are modified. The description of the HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User feature is incorporated into 160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User. The task example is optimized. The task example is optimized. The cell configuration is added.

175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy 52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode 120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2) 161 Configuring DC-HSUPA

295 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec 296 Configuring NodeB PKI Support 143 Configuring MIMO Prime

Compared with issue Draft B (2012-03-26), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft B (2012-03-26)
This is the Draft B release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not include any new topics. Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

content 150 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User 287 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness 174 Configuring Enhanced DRX 172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection 169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell 164 Configuring CPC - DTX /DRX 162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH 119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA 148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User 152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO 147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User 142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target 141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA 115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA 107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User 106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover 259 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment 105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI 159 Configuring DC-HSDPA 151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate 172 Configuring Flexible HSPA+ Technology Selection

Description The dependecy of BBU3806C is deleted from prerequisites.

The dependencies on hardware are added to prerequisites. The limit that WRFD-010704 Flexible HSPA + Technology Selection cannot be used together with WRFD-010699 DC-HSDPA +MIMO is deleted from prerequisites, and the configuration of DC-HSDPA and MIMO is added.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-02-15), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2012-02-15)
This is the Draft A release of RAN14.0. Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05) of RAN13.0, this issue includes the following new topics: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate 145 Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location 146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissions 161 Configuring DC-HSUPA 176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs 177 Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH 218 Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC 219 Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC 259 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment 261 Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control 262 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period 263 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration 264 Configuring Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold 281 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE 295 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec 296 Configuring NodeB PKI Support 297 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management 303 Multi-mode BS Common IPSec(UMTS) 305 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS) 306 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interface Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (UMTS)

Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05) of RAN13.0, this issue incorporates the following changes: content 202 Configuring One Tunnel 235 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance 249 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management Description The configuration of S12 interface is added. The configuration of new function is added.

The configuration of new function is added. The configuration of new function is added.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

1 Changes in the RAN Feature Activation Guide

Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05) of RAN13.0, this issue does not exclude any topics.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

RANFeatures are classified into basic and optional features. Basic features are not licensecontrolled and therefore do not require license activation before use. Some optional features are license-controlled and therefore require license activation before use. If the Configuration Method column for a basic feature in the RAN basic feature list is None, enabling this feature does not involve any configurations. If the Configuration Method column for an optional feature in the RAN optional feature list is None, this feature is enabled once it is activated. Table 2-1 lists the RAN basic features. Table 2-2 lists the RAN optional features. Table 2-1 RAN Basic Feature List Feature ID WRFD-000001 WRFD-000002 WRFD-000003 WRFD-000004 WRFD-000005 WRFD-000006 WRFD-000007 WRFD-000008 WRFD-010101
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Feature Name System Improvement for RAN5.1 System Improvement for RAN6.0 System Improvement for RAN6.1 System Improvement for RAN10.0 System Improvement for RAN11.0 System Improvement for RAN11.1 System Improvement for RAN12.0 System Improvement for RAN13.0 3GPP R9 Specifications

Configuration Method None None None None None None None None None
10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID WRFD-010102 WRFD-010201 WRFD-010510

Feature Name Operating Multi-band FDD Mode 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release Conversational QoS Class Streaming QoS Class Interactive QoS Class Background QoS Class Multiple RAB Introduction Package (PS RAB < 2) Combination of Two CS Services (Except for Two AMR Speech Services) Combination of One CS Service and One PS Service Combination of Two CS Services and One PS Service (Except for Two AMR Speech Services) Emergency Call RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity Cell Digital Combination and Split Fast Power Congestion Control (FCC)

Configuration Method None None 5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release 6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class 7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class 8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class 9 Configuring Background QoS Class None None

WRFD-010501 WRFD-010502 WRFD-010503 WRFD-010504 WRFD-010609 WRFD-01060901

WRFD-01060902 WRFD-01060903

None None

WRFD-021104 WRFD-010506

10 Configuring Emergency Call 11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface 12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity 13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split None

MRFD-210604 WRFD-010205 WRFD-010208

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID WRFD-010211 WRFD-010202

Feature Name Active TX Chain Gain Calibration UE State in Connected Mode (CELL-DCH, CELL-PCH, URA-PCH, CELL-FACH)

Configuration Method None 14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH) None 15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1) 16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2) None None None 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control 18 Configuring Integrity Protection 19 Configuring Encryption 20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control 21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance 22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control 23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control 24 Configuring Admission Control 25 Configuring Load Measurement

WRFD-010401 WRFD-010301

System Information Broadcasting Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1) Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2) Logical Channel Management Transport Channel Management Physical Channel Management Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC) Integrity Protection Encryption Open Loop Power Control Downlink Power Balance Outer Loop Power Control Inner Loop Power Control Admission Control Load Measurement

WRFD-010302

WRFD-020900 WRFD-021000 WRFD-022000 WRFD-021101

WRFD-011401 WRFD-011402 WRFD-020501 WRFD-020502 WRFD-020503 WRFD-020504 WRFD-020101 WRFD-020102

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID WRFD-020106 WRFD-020107 WRFD-020108 WRFD-020105 WRFD-021102 WRFD-021301

Feature Name Load Reshuffling Overload Control Code Resource Management Potential User Control Cell Barring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode BSC/RNC Resource Sharing Intra NodeB Softer Handover Intra RNC Soft Handover Inter RNC Soft Handover Intra Frequency Hard Handover Intra RNC Cell Update Inter RNC Cell Update Intra RNC URA Update Inter RNC URA Update Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls Star Topology Chain Topology

Configuration Method 26 Configuring Load Reshuffling 27 Configuring Overload Control 28 Configuring Code Resource Management 29 Configuring Potential User Control 30 Configuring Cell Barring 31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode None 32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover 33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover 34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover 36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update 37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update 38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update 39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update 40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Reestablishment (DSCR) 41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls None None

MRFD-210104 WRFD-020201 WRFD-020202 WRFD-020203 WRFD-020301 WRFD-010801 WRFD-010802 WRFD-010901 WRFD-010902 WRFD-021400

WRFD-140102

MRFD-210204 MRFD-210205

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID MRFD-210206 MRFD-210501 MRFD-210502 WRFD-050301 WRFD-05030101 WRFD-05030102

Feature Name Tree Topology NodeB Clock RNC Clock ATM Transmission Introduction Package ATM over E1T1 on Iub Interface ATM over Channelized STM-1/OC-3 on Iub Interface ATM over Non-channelized STM-1/OC-3c on Iub/Iu/Iur Interface Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes F5 IMA for E1T1 or Channelized STM-1/OC-3 on Iub Interface UBR+ ATM QoS Class Link aggregation Flow Control DPU Board Replaced without Service Interrupt in RNC

Configuration Method None 42 Configuring NodeB Clock None None None None

WRFD-05030103

None

WRFD-05030104

43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/ IuCS/Iur Interface 44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic 45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth 46 Configuring CBR, rtVBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes 47 Configuring F5 None

WRFD-05030105

WRFD-05030106

WRFD-05030107

WRFD-05030110 WRFD-050304

WRFD-050305 MRFD-210103 WRFD-040100 WRFD-040101

48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class 49 Configuring Link Aggregation 50 Configuring Flow Control None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID MRFD-210101 MRFD-210102 MRFD-210302 MRFD-210304 MRFD-210303 MRFD-210301 MRFD-210305 MRFD-210801 MRFD-210802 MRFD-210401 MRFD-210402 MRFD-210310 WRFD-031100 WRFD-031101

Feature Name System Redundancy Operate System Security Management Performance Management Fault Management Inventory Management Configuration Management Security Management Interface Tracing Call Tracing RNC Software Management NodeB Software Management NodeB Software USB Download BOOTP NodeB Self-discovery Based on IP Mode NodeB Remote Selfconfiguration NodeB Self-test License Management License Control for Urgency DBS Topology Maintenance Intelligently Out of Service OCNS Power off the equipment level by level Solar Power Device Management

Configuration Method None None None None None None None None None None None None 51 Configuring BOOTP 52 Configuring NodeB SelfDiscovery Based on IP Mode None None None 53 Configuring License Control for Urgency None 54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service 55 Configuring OCNS 56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level 57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management

WRFD-031102 WRFD-031103 MRFD-210403 WRFD-040300 MRFD-210309 WRFD-031000 WRFD-031200 WRFD-031400

WRFD-031500

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID WRFD-021404 WRFD-020406 WRFD-010212 MRFD-210701 MRFD-210601

Feature Name Single IP Address for NodeB Intelligent Power Measurement Improved CE Mapping for EDCH Documentation Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) Remote Electrical Tilt Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900Mhz) Multi-mode BS Common CPRI Interface(NodeB) Multi-mode BS RRU/RFU star-connection with separate CPRI interface(NodeB)

Configuration Method None None None None 58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier) 59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt 60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz) None None

MRFD-210602 WRFD-060003

MRFD-220001 MRFD-220002

Table 2-2 RAN Optional Feature List Feature ID Feature Name License Control Item VoIP over HSPA Introduction Pakage VoIP over HSPA Introduction Pakage VoIP over HSPA Introduction Pakage License Configured on... BSC6900 Configuration Method 61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+ None

WRFD-010617

VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

WRFD-010617 01

RAB Mapping

BSC6900

WRFD-010617 03

Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA

BSC6900

62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item IMS Signaling over HSPA PDCP ROHC Function

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA 64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) 65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+ 66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band) 67 Configuring AMR/WBAMR Speech Rates Control 68 Configuring TFO/TrFO 69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA 70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service 71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast 72 Configuring Warning of Disaster 73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package

WRFD-010618

IMS Signaling over HSPA PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) CS voice over HSPA/HSPA+ AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band) AMR/WBAMR Speech Rates Control TFO/TrFO AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA

WRFD-011501

BSC6900

WRFD-010619

CS voice over HSPA Wide Band AMR

BSC6900

WRFD-010613

BSC6900

WRFD-020701

AMR voice coding rate control TFO/TrFO AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA

BSC6900

WRFD-011600 WRFD-140201

BSC6900 NodeB

WRFD-011000

Cell Broadcast Service Simplified Cell Broadcast Warning of Disaster MBMS Introduction Package

Cell broadcast service Simplified Cell Broadcast Warning of Disaster MBMS Function

BSC6900

WRFD-011001

BSC6900

WRFD-020127

BSC6900

WRFD-010616

BSC6900&Nod eB

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item MBMS Function MBMS Function

License Configured on... BSC6900&Nod eB BSC6900&Nod eB

Configuration Method None 74 Configuring MBMS Admission Control 75 Configuring MBMS Load Control None

WRFD-010616 01 WRFD-010616 02

MBMS Broadcast Mode MBMS Admission Control MBMS Load Control MBMS Soft/ Selective Combining MBMS Transport Resource Management Streaming Service on MBMS MBMS 2 Channels per Cell 16/32/64/128K bps Channel Rate on MBMS MBMS Phase 2 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode

WRFD-010616 03 WRFD-010616 04 WRFD-010616 05

MBMS Function MBMS Function MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB BSC6900&Nod eB BSC6900&Nod eB

76 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management 77 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS None

WRFD-010616 06

MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB

WRFD-010616 07 WRFD-010616 08

MBMS Function MBMS Function

BSC6900&Nod eB BSC6900&Nod eB

78 Configuring 16/32/64/128K bps Channel Rate on MBMS 79 Configuring MBMS Phase 2 80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode 81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA

WRFD-010660 WRFD-010660 01

None MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode

BSC6900 BSC6900

WRFD-010660 02

MBMS P2P over HSDPA

MBMS P2P over HSDPA

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item MBMS Admission Enhancement None

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement 83 Configuring InterFrequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users 84 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS 85 Configuring MBMS FLC (Frequency Layer Convergence)/ FLD (Frequency Layer Dispersion) None

WRFD-010660 03

MBMS Admission Enhancement Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users

WRFD-010660 04

None

WRFD-010627

FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS MBMS FLC (Frequency Layer Convergence)/ FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)

None

None

WRFD-010626

MBMS FLC (Frequency Layer Convergence)/ FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)

BSC6900

WRFD-010624

MBMS 8 Channels per Cell 256Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS MBMS 16 Channels per Cell MBMS over Iur

MBMS 8 Channels per Cell 256Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS MBMS 16 Channels per Cell MBMS over Iur

BSC6900

WRFD-010625

BSC6900

None

WRFD-010628

BSC6900

None

WRFD-010661

BSC6900

86 Configuring MBMS over Iur 87 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH

WRFD-010662

Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH

Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item MSCH Scheduling MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 88 Configuring MSCH Scheduling 89 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS 91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS 93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones 94 Configuring LCS over Iur 95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service 96 Configuring Push to Talk 97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package

WRFD-010663

MSCH Scheduling MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics

WRFD-010665

BSC6900

WRFD-020801

Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS OTDOA Based LCS A-GPS Based LCS LCS Classified Zones LCS over Iur Iupc Interface for LCS service

Cell ID LCS

BSC6900

WRFD-020802

OTDOA LCS

BSC6900

WRFD-020803

AGPS LCS

BSC6900

WRFD-020804

LCS Classified Zones LCS over Iur Iu-PC Interface for LCS service

BSC6900

WRFD-020805 WRFD-020807

BSC6900 BSC6900

WRFD-020134

Push to Talk

Push To Talk (per PTT Active User) RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

BSC6900

WRFD-010612

HSUPA Introduction Package

BSC6900&Nod eB

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

License Configured on... BSC6900&Nod eB

Configuration Method None

WRFD-010612 01

HSUPA UE Category Support

WRFD-010612 09

HSUPA HARQ and Fast UL Scheduling in Node B

RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

BSC6900&Nod eB

None

WRFD-010612 02

HSUPA Admission Control

BSC6900&Nod eB

98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control

WRFD-010612 03

HSUPA Power Control

RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

BSC6900&Nod eB

99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

License Configured on... BSC6900&Nod eB

Configuration Method 100 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management

WRFD-010612 04

HSUPA Mobility Management

WRFD-010612 08

HSUPA DCCC

RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

BSC6900&Nod eB

101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC

WRFD-010612 07

HSUPA Transport Resource Management

RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

BSC6900&Nod eB

None

WRFD-010612 06

Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSUPA

BSC6900&Nod eB

None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

License Configured on... BSC6900&Nod eB

Configuration Method None

WRFD-010612 10

HSUPA 1.44Mbps per User

WRFD-010612 11

20 HSUPA Users per Cell

RNC:High Speed Uplink Packet Access NodeB:the number of NodeBs with HSUPA function enabled

BSC6900&Nod eB

102 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell

WRFD-010612 12

HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion

None

None

103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion None

WRFD-010614

HSUPA Phase 2

HSUPA 2ms/ 10ms TTI handover the number of NodeBs with HSUPA 2ms TTI function enabled

BSC6900

WRFD-010614 01

HSUPA EAGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HSSCCH)

HSUPA 2ms/ 10ms TTI handover

BSC6900

104 Configuring HSUPA EAGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HSSCCH) None

WRFD-010614 02

Enhanced Fast UL Scheduling

HSUPA 2ms/ 10ms TTI handover

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item the number of NodeBs with HSUPA 2ms TTI function enabled HSUPA 2ms/ 10ms TTI handover

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI 106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/ 10 ms TTI Handover 107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User 108 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA 109 Configuring HSUPA over Iur None

WRFD-010614 03

HSUPA 2ms TTI

WRFD-010614 04

HSUPA 2ms/ 10ms TTI Handover

BSC6900

WRFD-010614 05

HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User

HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User

BSC6900

WRFD-010632

Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA

Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA

BSC6900

WRFD-010635

HSUPA over Iur

HSUPA over Iur

BSC6900

WRFD-010640

Uplink Macro Diversity Intelligent Receiving TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

Uplink Macro Diversity Intelligent Receiving TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

BSC6900

WRFD-010690

BSC6900

110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage 111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission

WRFD-010641

HSUPA Adaptive Transmission

HSUPA Adaptive Retransmission

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item the number of NodeBs with dynamic CE function enabled The number of Cells with FDE function enabled Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management 113 Configuring HSUPA FDE 114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA 115 Configuring AntiInterference Scheduling for HSUPA 116 Configuring DualThreshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation 117 Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell None

WRFD-010638

Dynamic CE Resource Management

WRFD-010692

HSUPA FDE

NodeB

WRFD-010712

Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

BSC6900

WRFD-020136

AntiInterference Scheduling for HSUPA

the number of cells with antiinterference scheduling for HSUPA function enabled the number of NodeBs with dual-threshold scheduling with HSUPA interference cancellation function enabled 60 HSUPA Users per Cell

NodeB

WRFD-020137

Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

NodeB

WRFD-010634

60 HSUPA Users per Cell

BSC6900

WRFD-010210

Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (CCPIC)

the number of NodeBs with CCPIC function enabled

NodeB

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item The number of Cells with UL IC function enabled SRB over HSUPA

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation 119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA 120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2) 121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package None

WRFD-010691

HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

WRFD-010636

SRB over HSUPA

BSC6900

WRFD-140202

Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)

The number of NodeBs with flexible frequency separation function enabled High Speed Downlink Packet Access

NodeB

WRFD-010610

HSDPA Introduction Package

BSC6900

WRFD-010610 17

QPSK Modulation

NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

NodeB

WRFD-010610 01

15 Codes per Cell

NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

NodeB

122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell

WRFD-010610 18

Time and HSPDSCH Codes Multiplex

NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

NodeB

123 Configuring Time and HSPDSCH Codes Multiplex 124 Configuring HSDPA HARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)

WRFD-010610 09

HSDPA HARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR and PF)

NodeB

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 125 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNCControlled Dynamic Code Allocation 126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control 127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control None

WRFD-010610 05

HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNCControlled Dynamic Code Allocation

WRFD-010610 04

HSDPA Power Control

NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

NodeB

WRFD-010610 03

HSDPA Admission Control

NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

NodeB

WRFD-010610 19

HSDPA Dynamic Power Allocation

NodeB

WRFD-010610 20

Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service

NodeB

128 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service 129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control 130 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management None

WRFD-010610 10

HSDPA Flow Control

NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

NodeB

WRFD-010610 06

HSDPA Mobility Management

NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

NodeB

WRFD-010610 14

HSDPA Transport Resource Management

NodeB

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method None

WRFD-010610 08

Interactive and Background Traffic Class on HSDPA HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28

WRFD-010610 02

NodeB

131 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28 None

WRFD-010610 15

HSDPA 1.8Mbps per User

NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

NodeB

WRFD-010610 16

16 HSDPA Users per Cell

NodeB

None

WRFD-010620

HSDPA 3.6Mbps per User DL 16QAM Modulation

High Speed Downlink Packet Access Function 3.6M NodeB:HSDPA RRM package 1 NodeB:HSDPA function

BSC6900

None

WRFD-010629

NodeB

132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation 133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB None

WRFD-010631

Dynamic Code Allocation Based on Node B

HSDPA RRM package 1

NodeB

WRFD-010621

HSDPA 7.2Mbps per User 32 HSDPA Users per Cell

High Speed Downlink Packet Access Function 7.2M 32 HSDPA Users per Cell

BSC6900

WRFD-010622

BSC6900

None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item None

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package 135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR 136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition 137 Configuring HSDPA DRD 138 Configuring HS-DPCCH Preamble Support 139 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA None

WRFD-010611

HSDPA Enhanced Package

WRFD-010611 03

Scheduling based on EPF and GBR

None

None

WRFD-010611 11

HSDPA State Transition

HSDPA State Transition

BSC6900

WRFD-010611 12 WRFD-010611 13

HSDPA DRD

HSDPA DRD

BSC6900

HS-DPCCH Preamble Support

HS-DPCCH Preamble support

BSC6900

WRFD-010630

Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA

Streaming Traffic Class on HSDPA

BSC6900

WRFD-010650

HSDPA 13.976Mbps per User HSDPA over Iur

HSDPA 13.976Mbps per User HSDPA over Iur

BSC6900

WRFD-010651

BSC6900

140 Configuring HSDPA over Iur 141 Configuring SRB over HSDPA None

WRFD-010652

SRB over HSDPA

SRB over HSDPA

BSC6900

WRFD-010623

64 HSDPA Users per Cell

64 HSDPA Users per Cell

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

29

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target(per Cell)

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 142 Configuring CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target 143 Configuring MIMO Prime 144 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate 145 Configuring HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location 146 Configuring Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmissio ns 147 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User 148 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User

WRFD-030010

CQI Adjustment Based on Dynamic BLER Target

WRFD-030011

MIMO Prime

MIMO Prime (per Cell) Self-adaption of HSPA Typical Throughput

NodeB

WRFD-030004

Adaptive Configuration of Typical HSPA Rate

BSC6900

WRFD-140221

HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location

HSDPA Scheduling Based on UE Location(Per Cell) None

NodeB

WRFD-140222

Adaptive Adjustment of HSUPA Small Target Retransmission s

None

WRFD-010680

HSPA+ Downlink 28Mbps per User

HSPA + Downlink 28 Mbit/s Per User

BSC6900

WRFD-010681

HSPA+ Downlink 21Mbps per User

HSPA + Downlink 21 Mbit/s Per User

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Downlink Enhanced L2

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 149 Configuring Downlink Enhanced L2 150 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User 151 Configuring Downlink 64QAM 152 Configuring 2x2 MIMO 153 Configuring Downlink 64QAM +MIMO 154 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User 155 Configuring HSPA+ Downlink 84 Mbit/s per User 156 Configuring DC-HSDPA +MIMO

WRFD-010685

Downlink Enhanced L2

WRFD-010689

HSPA+ Downlink 42Mbps per User

HSPA+ Downlink 42 Mbit/s per User

BSC6900

WRFD-010683

Downlink 64QAM

the number of cells with 64QAM function enabled the number of cells with MIMO function enabled the number of Cells with DL 64QAM +MIMO function enabled HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User

NodeB

WRFD-010684

2x2 MIMO

NodeB

WRFD-010693

DL 64QAM +MIMO

NodeB

WRFD-010698

HSPA+ Uplink 11.5Mbit/s per User

BSC6900

WRFD-010703

HSPA+ Downlink 84Mbit/s per User DC-HSDPA +MIMO

HSPA+ Downlink 84Mbit/s per User the number of cells with DCHSDPA +MIMO function enabled

BSC6900

WRFD-010699

NodeB

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

31

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item The number of Cells with UL 16QAM function enabled The number of Cells with UL L2 Improvement function enabled The number of Cells with DL DC function enabled HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 157 Configuring UL 16QAM

WRFD-010694

UL 16QAM

WRFD-010695

UL Layer 2 Improvement

NodeB

158 Configuring UL Layer 2 Improvement

WRFD-010696

DC-HSDPA

NodeB

159 Configuring DC-HSDPA 160 Configuring HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User 161 Configuring DC-HSUPA 162 Configuring Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH 163 Configuring Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Cocarrier 164 Configuring CPC - DTX / DRX

WRFD-140203

HSPA+ Uplink 23 Mbit/s per User

BSC6900

WRFD-140204

DC-HSUPA

DC-HSUPA (Per Cell) Enhanced CELL_FACH

NodeB

WRFD-010688

Downlink Enhanced CELL_FACH

BSC6900

WRFD-010700

Performance Improvement of MIMO and HSDPA Cocarrier

the number of cells with performace improvement of MIMO and HSDPA cocarrier function enabled CPC-DTX / DRX

NodeB

WRFD-010686

CPC - DTX / DRX

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item CPC-HS-SCCH Less Operation

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 165 Configuring CPC - HSSCCH less operation 166 Configuring EDPCCH Boosting

WRFD-010687

CPC - HSSCCH less operation

WRFD-010697

E-DPCCH Boosting

the number of cells with EDPCCH boosting function enabled Enhanced Uplink for CELL_FACH

NodeB

WRFD-010701

Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH

BSC6900

167 Configuring Uplink Enhanced CELL_FACH 168 Configuring 96 HSDPA Users per Cell 169 Configuring 96 HSUPA Users per Cell 170 Configuring 128 HSDPA Users per Cell 171 Configuring 128 HSUPA Users per Cell 172 Configuring Flexible HSPA + Technology Selection

WRFD-010653

96 HSDPA Users per Cell

96 HSDPA Users per Cell

BSC6900

WRFD-010639

96 HSUPA Users per Cell

96 HSUPA Users per Cell

BSC6900

WRFD-010654

128 HSDPA Users per Cell

128 HSDPA Users per Cell

BSC6900

WRFD-010670

128 HSUPA Users per Cell

128 HSUPA Users per Cell

BSC6900

WRFD-010704

Flexible HSPA + Technology Selection

Flexible HSPA + Technology Selection

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item the number of cells with traffic-based activation and deactivation of the slave carrier function enabled Enhanced DRX

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 173 Configuring Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementar y Carrier In Multi-carrier 174 Configuring Enhanced DRX 175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy 176 Configuring Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception UEs 177 Configuring Layered Paging in URA_PCH 178 Configuring Web browsing acceleration 179 Configuring P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour

WRFD-010713

Traffic-Based Activation and Deactivation of the Supplementary Carrier In Multicarrier

WRFD-010702

Enhanced DRX

BSC6900

WRFD-020500

Enhanced Fast Dormancy

Fast Dormancy Enhancement (per PS Active User) Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception Ues

BSC6900

WRFD-140205

Voice Service Experience Improvement for Weak Reception Ues

BSC6900

WRFD-140206

Layered Paging in URA_PCH

Layered Paging in URA_PCH

BSC6900

WRFD-020132

Web browsing acceleration

Web Browsing Acceleration

BSC6900

WRFD-020133

P2P Downloading Rate Control during Busy Hour

P2P Rate Control

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item the number of NodeBs with PA-SHARING function enabled Multi-carrier switch off based on traffic load

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 180 Configuring Dynamic Power Sharing of MultiCarriers 181 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load 182 Configuring Energy Efficiency Improved

WRFD-020116

Dynamic Power Sharing in Multi-Carriers

WRFD-020117

Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Traffic Load

BSC6900

WRFD-020118

Energy Efficiency Improved

the number of NodeBs with energy efficiency improved function enabled the number of NodeBs with multi-carrier switch off based on power backup function enabled the number of cells with multicarrier switch off based on QoS function enabled the number of NodeBs with PSU Intelligent Shutdown function enabled RAN Sharing Function

NodeB

WRFD-020119

Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup

NodeB

183 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on Power Backup 184 Configuring Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS 185 Configuring Intelligent Power Management 186 Configuring RAN Sharing Introduction Package

WRFD-020122

Multi-Carrier Switch off Based on QoS

NodeB

WRFD-020121

Intelligent Power Management

NodeB

WRFD-021304

RAN Sharing Introduction Package

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item RAN Sharing Function

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 187 Configuring Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator 188 Configuring Flexible Network Architecture 189 Configuring Mobility Control and Service Differentiation 190 Configuring Independent License Control None

WRFD-021304 01

Dedicated Carrier for Each Operator

WRFD-021304 02

Flexible Network Architecture

RAN Sharing Function

BSC6900

WRFD-021304 03

Mobility Control and Service Differentiation

RAN Sharing Function

BSC6900

WRFD-021304 04

Independent License Control

RAN Sharing Function

BSC6900

WRFD-021304 05 WRFD-021304 06

Independent Cell-level FM/ PM/CM Transmission Recourse Sharing on Iub/ Iur Interface RAN Sharing Phase 2

RAN Sharing Function RAN Sharing Function

BSC6900

BSC6900

None

WRFD-021305

RAN Sharing Enhanced Package RAN Sharing Enhanced Package

BSC6900

191 Configuring RAN Sharing Phase 2 192 Configuring Dedicated Iub Transmission Control 193 Configuring IMSI Based Handover

WRFD-021305 01

Dedicated Iub Transmission Control

BSC6900

WRFD-021303

IMSI Based Handover

IMSI Based Handover

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item MOCN Introduction Package

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 194 Configuring MOCN Introduction Package 195 Configuring Carrier Sharing by Operators 196 Configuring Dedicated NodeB/Cell for Operators 197 Configuring MOCN Mobility Management 198 Configuring MOCN Load Balance None

WRFD-021311

MOCN Introduction Package

WRFD-021311 01

Carrier Sharing by Operators

MOCN Introduction Package

BSC6900

WRFD-021311 02

Dedicated Node B/Cell for Operators

MOCN Introduction Package

BSC6900

WRFD-021311 03

MOCN Mobility Management

MOCN Introduction Package

BSC6900

WRFD-021311 04

MOCN Load Balance

MOCN Introduction Package MOCN Introduction Package MOCN Introduction Package

BSC6900

WRFD-021311 05

MOCN Independent Performance Management Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion

BSC6900

WRFD-021311 06

BSC6900

199 Configuring Routing Roaming UEs in Proportion 200 Configuring MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation 201 Configuring HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)

WRFD-140223

MOCN Cell Resource Demarcatio

MOCN Cell Resource Demarcation (per Cell) Hierarchical Cell Structure

BSC6900

WRFD-021200

HCS (Hierarchical Cell Structure)

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item One Tunnel

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 202 Configuring One Tunnel 203 Configuring Overbooking on ATM Transmission 204 Configuring ATM SwitchingBased Hub NodeB 205 Configuring AAL2 SwitchingBased Hub NodeB None

WRFD-020111

One Tunnel

WRFD-050405

Overbooking on ATM Transmission

ATM IUB overbooking Function

BSC6900

WRFD-050105

ATM Switching Based Hub Node B

ATM Switching Based Hub NodeB (per NodeB)

NodeB

WRFD-050106

AAL2 Switching Based Hub Node B

ATM Switching Based Hub NodeB (per NodeB)

NodeB

WRFD-050406

ATM QoS Introduction on Hub Node B (Overbooking on Hub Node B Transmission) Fractional ATM Function on Iub Interface IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface

HUB IUB overbooking Function

BSC6900

WRFD-050302

Fractional ATM

BSC6900

None

WRFD-050402

IP Transportation in Iub Interface

BSC6900

206 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iub Interface None

WRFD-050411

Fractional IP Function on Iub Interface Hybrid Iub IP Transmission

Fractional IP

BSC6900

WRFD-050403

IUB Hybrid IP Transportation Function

BSC6900

207 Configuring Hybrid Iub IP Transmission

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item IUB ATM/IP Dual Stack Transportation Function IP Transportation in Iu Interface

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 208 Configuring ATM/IP Dual Stack NodeB 209 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface 210 Configuring IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface 211 Configuring FP MUX for IP Transmission 212 Configuring Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP 213 Configuring Overbooking on IP Transmission 214 Configuring IP Routing-Based Hub NodeB 215 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507) 216 Configuring RNC Offload

WRFD-050404

ATM/IP Dual Stack Node B

WRFD-050409

IP Transmission Introduction on Iu Interface

BSC6900

WRFD-050410

IP Transmission Introduction on Iur Interface

IP Transportation in Iur Interface

BSC6900

WRFD-050420

FP MUX for IP Transmission

FP MUX

BSC6900

WRFD-050422

Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP

Dynamic Bandwidth Control of Iub IP

BSC6900

WRFD-050408

Overbooking on IP Transmission

IP IUB overbooking Function

BSC6900

WRFD-050107

IP routing Based Hub Node B

IP Routing Based Hub NodeB (per NodeB) PDCP Header compression

NodeB

WRFD-011500

PDCP Header Compression (RFC2507)

BSC6900

WRFD-012001

RNC offload (trial)

None

None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 217 Configuring UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission 218 Configuring Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC 219 Configuring Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC 220 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface 221 Configuring Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface 222 Configuring Clock Synchronizatio n on Ethernet in NodeB 223 Configuring Synchronous Ethernet

WRFD-050412

UDP MUX for Iu-CS Transmission

WRFD-140207

Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

Iu/Iur Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

BSC6900

WRFD-140208

Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

Iub Transmission Resource Pool in RNC

BSC6900

WRFD-050104

Satellite Transmission on Iub Interface

Satellite Communication in Iub Interface

BSC6900

WRFD-050108

Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface

Satellite Transmission on Iu Interface

BSC6900

WRFD-050501

Clock Sync on Ethernet in Node B

the number of NodeBs with IP Clock function enabled

NodeB

WRFD-050502

Synchronous Ethernet

The Number of NodeBs with Ethernet Synchronizatio n Function Enabled

NodeB

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Ethernet Operation and Maintenance Function (per NodeB) RNC Node Redundancy

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 224 Configuring Ethernet OAM

WRFD-050425

Ethernet OAM

WRFD-040202

RNC Node Redundancy

BSC6900

225 Configuring RNC Node Redundancy 226 Configuring RRU Redundancy 227 Configuring Iu Flex 228 Configuring Iu Flex Load Distribution Management 229 Configuring Transmit Diversity 230 Configuring 4Antenna Receive Diversity 231 Configuring Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km None

WRFD-040203

RRU Redundancy

RRU Backup (per Sector)

NodeB

WRFD-021302

Iu Flex

IU FLEX

BSC6900

WRFD-021306

Iu Flex Load Distribution Management

Enhanced Iu Flex

BSC6900

WRFD-010203

Transmit Diversity

Transmit Diversity (per NodeB) 4-Antenna Receive (per NodeB)

NodeB

WRFD-010209

4-Antenna Receive Diversity

NodeB

WRFD-021308

Extended Cell Coverage up to 200km

None

None

WRFD-021309

Improved Downlink Coverage

Improved Downlink Coverage

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE power limitation

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 232 Configuring HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE Power Limitation 233 Configuring Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier 234 Configuring High Speed Access 235 Configuring Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell 236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage 237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS

WRFD-020138

HSUPA Coverage Enhancement at UE power limitation

WRFD-021001

Flexible frequency bandwidth of UMTS carrier

The number of NodeBs with flexible frequency separation function enabled None

NodeB

WRFD-010206

High Speed Access

None

WRFD-021350

Independent Demodulation of Signals from Multiple RRUs in One Cell

the number of RRUs with in independent demodulation of signals in one cell Inter frequency hard handover

NodeB

WRFD-020302

Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage

BSC6900

WRFD-020304

Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS

Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved) SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method None

WRFD-020605

SRNS Relocation Introduction Package SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved)

WRFD-020605 01

BSC6900

238 Configuring SRNS Relocation (UE Not Involved) 239 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover 240 Configuring SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update None 241 Configuring Multiple RAB Package (PS RAB 2) 242 Configuring Combination of Two PS Services 243 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services

WRFD-020605 02

SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover

SRNS Relocation with Hard Handover

BSC6900

WRFD-020605 03

SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update

SRNS Relocation with Cell/URA Update

BSC6900

WRFD-020605 04 WRFD-010615

Lossless SRNS Relocation Multiple RAB Package

Lossless SRNS Relocation Multiple RAB

BSC6900 BSC6900

WRFD-010615 01

Combination of Two PS Services

Multiple RAB

BSC6900

WRFD-010615 02

Combination of One CS Service and Two PS Services

Multiple RAB

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Multiple RAB

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 244 Configuring Combination of Three PS Services 245 Configuring Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services 246 Configuring Combination of Four PS Services 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance 248 Configuring Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC) None

WRFD-010615 03

Combination of Three PS Services

WRFD-010615 04

Combination of One CS Service and Three PS Services

Multiple RAB

BSC6900

WRFD-010615 05

Combination of Four PS Services

Multiple RAB

BSC6900

WRFD-020103

Inter Frequency Load Balance

Inter frequency load handover

BSC6900

WRFD-020114

Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)

Domain Specific Access Control (DSAC)

BSC6900

WRFD-020110

Multi Frequency Band Networking Management Enhanced Multiband Management

Multi Frequency Band Networking Management Enhancement for Multi frequency band Networking management None

BSC6900

WRFD-020160

BSC6900

249 Configuring Enhanced Multiband Management 250 Configuring DRD Introduction Package

WRFD-020400

DRD Introduction Package

None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Intra System Direct Retry

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 251 Configuring Intra System Direct Retry 252 Configuring Inter System Direct Retry 253 Configuring Inter-System Redirect 254 Configuring Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup 255 Configuring Measurement Based Direct Retry 256 Configuring Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup 257 Configuring Uplink Flow Control of User Plane 258 Configuring Intra Frequency Load Balance

WRFD-020400 01

Intra System Direct Retry

WRFD-020400 02

Inter System Direct Retry

Inter System Direct Retry

BSC6900

WRFD-020400 03

Inter System Redirect

Inter System Redirect

BSC6900

WRFD-020400 04

Traffic Steering and Load Sharing During RAB Setup

None

None

WRFD-020402

Measurement Based Direct Retry

Measurement Based Direct Retry Function

BSC6900

WRFD-020120

Service Steering and Load Sharing in RRC Connection Setup

Service Steering in RRC Connection Setup

BSC6900

WRFD-020124

Uplink Flow Control of User Plane

Uplink Flow Control of User Plane

BSC6900

WRFD-020104

Intra Frequency Load Balance

Intra frequency load balancing

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment(per Cell) CE overbooking (Per NodeB)

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 259 Configuring Dynamic Target ROT Adjustment 260 Configuring CE Overbooking 261 Configuring Intelligent Access Class Control 262 Configuring Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period 263 Configuring Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration 264 Configuring InterFrequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold

WRFD-140211

Dynamic Target RoT Adjustment

WRFD-140212

CE Overbooking

NodeB

WRFD-140213

Intelligent Access Class Control

Intelligent Access Class Control

BSC6900

WRFD-140215

Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period

Dynamic Configuration of HSDPA CQI Feedback Period (per Cell)

BSC6900

WRFD-140216

Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration

Load-based Uplink Target BLER Configuration (per Cell) Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold (per Cell)

BSC6900

WRFD-140217

Inter-Frequency Load Balancing Based on Configurable Load Threshold

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Handover Based on Load on Iur-g

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 265 Configuring Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g 266 Configuring NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change) Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g 267 Configuring GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g 268 Configuring GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g 269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage 270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS

WRFD-070004

Load Based GSM and UMTS Handover Enhancement Based on Iur-g

WRFD-070005

NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g

NACC Procedure Optimization Based on Iur-g

BSC6900

WRFD-070006

GSM and UMTS Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

BSC Load Balancing Based on Iur-g

BSC6900

WRFD-070007

GSM and UMTS Traffic Steering Based on Iur-g

BSC Service Distribution Based on Iur-g

BSC6900

WRFD-020303

Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage

Coverage Based Inter-RAT Handover Between UMTS and GSM/ GPRS Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS

BSC6900

WRFD-020309

Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 271 Configuring Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO 272 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2 273 Configuring NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change) 274 Configuring PS Handover between UMTS and GPRS 275 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service 276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load 277 Configuring Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance

WRFD-020307

Video Telephony Fallback to Speech (AMR) for Inter-RAT HO

WRFD-020308

Inter-RAT Handover Phase 2

None

BSC6900

WRFD-020308 01

NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)

NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)

BSC6900

WRFD-020308 02

PS Handover Between UMTS and GPRS

PS Handover Between UMTS and GPRS

BSC6900

WRFD-020305

Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service

Inter system Service Handover

BSC6900

WRFD-020306

Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load

Inter system Load Handover

BSC6900

WRFD-020401

Inter-RAT Redirection Based on Distance

Inter System Redirect Based on Distance

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item 3G/2G Common Load Management

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 278 Configuring 3G/2G Common Load Management 279 Configuring Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1 280 Configuring Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE 281 Configuring Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE 282 Configuring Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM 283 Configuring Queuing and Preemption 284 Configuring Access Class Restriction 285 Configuring Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources
49

WRFD-020310

3G/2G Common Load Management

WRFD-020126

Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1

Mobility Between UMTS and LTE Phase 1

BSC6900

WRFD-020129

Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE

Service-Based PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE

BSC6900

WRFD-140218

Service-Based PS Handover from UMTS to LTE

PS Service Redirection from UMTS to LTE

BSC6900

WRFD-140224

Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM

Fast CS Fallback Based on RIM

BSC6900

WRFD-010505

Queuing and Pre-Emption

Queuing and Pre-emption

BSC6900

WRFD-021103

Access Class Restriction

Access Class Restriction when SPU overload Traffic Priority Mapping on Transport

BSC6900

WRFD-050424

Traffic Priority Mapping onto Transmission Resources

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight

License Configured on... BSC6900

Configuration Method 286 Configuring Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight 287 Configuring Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness 288 Configuring Active Queue Management (AQM) 289 Configuring Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service 290 Configuring TCP Accelerator 291 Configuring Rate Negotiation at Admission Control 292 Configuring Videophone Service Restriction 293 Configuring Intelligent Inter-Carrier UE Layered Management

WRFD-020806

Differentiated Service Based on SPI Weight

WRFD-020131

Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness

Optimization of R99 and HSUPA Users Fairness

BSC6900

WRFD-011502

Active Queue Management (AQM)

Active Queue Management (AQM)

BSC6900

WRFD-020128

Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service

Quality Improvement for Subscribed Service

BSC6900

WRFD-020123

TCP Accelerator

TCP Accelerator

BSC6900

WRFD-010507

Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

RAB Downsizing at Admission Control

BSC6900

WRFD-020130

Videophone Service Restriction

Videophone Service Restriction

BSC6900

WRFD-020135

Intelligent InterCarrier UE Layered Management

Intelligent InterCarrier UE Layered Management (per Cell)

BSC6900

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Micro NodeB Self-Planning (Per Cell) NodeB integrated IPSec (Per NodeB)

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 294 Configuring Micro NodeB Self-Planning 295 Configuring NodeB Integrated IPSec 296 Configuring NodeB PKI Support 297 Configuring Intelligent Battery Management 298 Configuring Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS) 299 Configuring GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS) 300 Configuring IP-Based Multi-Mode CoTransmission on Base Station Side (NodeB)

WRFD-140219

Micro NodeB Self-Planning

WRFD-140209

NodeB Integrated IPSec

NodeB

WRFD-140210

NodeB PKI Support

NodeB PKI support(Per NodeB) Intelligent Battery Management (Per NodeB) GSM and UMTS Dynamic Power Sharing

NodeB

WRFD-140220

Intelligent Battery Management

NodeB

MRFD-221801

Multi-mode Dynamic Power Sharing (UMTS)

NodeB

MRFD-221802

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)

GSM and UMTS Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)(Per NodeB) None

NodeB

MRFD-221501

IP-Based Multimode CoTransmission on BS side (NodeB)

None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Multi Mode BTS Transmission Sharing

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 301 Configuring TDM-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB) None

MRFD-221504

TDM-Based Multi-mode CoTransmission via Backplane on BS side (NodeB)

MRFD-221505

Bandwidth sharing of MBTS Multimode CoTransmission (NodeB)

the number of NodeBs with Bandwidth sharing of MBTS Multimode CoTransmission function enabled None

NodeB

MRFD-221601

Multi-mode BS Common Reference Clock(NodeB)

None

302 Configuring Multi-Mode BS Common Reference Clock (NodeB) 303 Multimode BS Common IPSec(UMTS) 304 Configuring 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS)

MRFD-221602

Multi-mode BS Common IPSec (UMTS)

Co-IPSec Between GSM,UMTS and LTE (UMTS) 2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS) (Per NodeB)

NodeB

MRFD-221703

2.0MHz Central Frequency point separation between GSM and UMTS mode(UMTS)

NodeB

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions

Feature ID

Feature Name

License Control Item Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)

License Configured on... NodeB

Configuration Method 305 Configuring Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS) 306 Configuring GSM Power Control on Interface Frequency for GU Small Frequency Gap (UMTS)

MRFD-221803

Dynamic MA for GU Dynamic Spectrum Sharing (UMTS)

MRFD-221804

GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (UMTS)

GSM Power Control on Interference Frequency for GU Small Frequency gap (UMTS)

NodeB

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Overview of Configurations on the CME

About This Chapter


This section provides an overview of the configuration on the CME. The CME is a configuration tool on GUIs assisting you to effectively configure the data about wireless NE features. You can reconfigure configuration parameters by using the configuration expresses provided by the CME to activate or deactivate specified features. Feature activation and deactivation are mainly performed on the configuration expresses on the CME. This part introduces the operations on the configuration expresses and you need to understand the operations before activating or deactivating features. 3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods This section describes how to configure the features of one or multiple NEs at a time by using the CME. 3.2 Configuring Device Data This section describes how to configure device data on the device panel. 3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Parameters This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS global parameters. 3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iub Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iub interfaces. 3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-CS Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-CS interfaces. 3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PS Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-PS interfaces. 3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iur Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iur interfaces. 3.8 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-BC Interfaces
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 54

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-BC interfaces. 3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PC Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-PC interfaces. 3.10 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (U)Iur-g Interface This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for the (U)Iur-g interface. 3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gi Interfaces This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Gi interfaces. 3.12 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Radio Parameters This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS global radio parameters. 3.13 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Cells This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS cells. 3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring UMTS Cells This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for neighboring UMTS cells. 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNCs in batches. 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified logical NodeBs in batches. 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches This section describes how to modify the data about multiple physical NodeBs in batches. 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS cells in batches. 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNC external cells in batches. 3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS channels in batches. 3.21 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration This section describes how to search for external cells in an object group and configure them.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.1 Introduction to Configuration Methods


This section describes how to configure the features of one or multiple NEs at a time by using the CME.

Introduction to Configuration Methods


The CME enables you to configure NE features in both single and batch modes. For details, see Table 3-1. Table 3-1 Introduction to configuration methods Config uratio n Metho d Single configu ration Characteristics

Configures parameters for only one object (for example, a base station or a cell) each time. The CME provides configuration expresses and device panels for various types of data to configure one object. l The CME displays a navigation tree in the left pane and a table in the right pane. The navigation tree shows managed objects (MOs) while the table shows the parameters of the MOs and parameter values. After selecting an MO in the navigation tree, you can configure its values in the table. l The device panel is displayed on a GUI, allowing you to directly configure data for devices such as cabinet, subrack, and board.

Batch modific ation center

Applies the configuration data about an object (for example, a base station or a cell) to other objects.
NOTE This method is applicable to scenarios where the parameters for multiple objects need to be configured the same.

For example, after setting the VAMOSSWITCH parameter for cell 1 to ON, you can use the batch modification function to set the VAMOSSWITCH parameters for other specified cells to ON at a time. By doing this, you do not need to configure the parameters for these cells one by one.

Introduction to Data Configuration Procedures


Before using the CME to configure features, you need to be familiar with basic operations on the CME. For details, see CME Guidelines in the M2000 Help. The procedures for using the CME to activate or deactivate features are as follows: 1. 2. Synchronize the data in the current data area with the data on the live network. Create a planned data area and copy the data in the current data area to the planned data area for configuration.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 56

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3. 4. 5.

Modify the parameters according to the planned data. After configuring data, export the data as scripts. Deliver the exported scripts to the live network for the configuration data to take effect on NEs.

3.2 Configuring Device Data


This section describes how to configure device data on the device panel. Right-click a BSC to be configured in the Main View navigation tree in the left pane, and choose Device Panel from the shortcut menu. The NE device panel is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1 Device panel

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Operatio n Add

Operation description l In the upper-right part of the device panel window, click Add Cabinet. l Right-click an empty subrack on the device panel window, and choose Add Subrack from the shortcut menu. l Right-click the empty slots on the panels of each subrack, and choose the required board types from the shortcut menu.

Delete

l Right-click a cabinet to be deleted, and choose Delete Cabinet from the shortcut menu. l Right-click a subrack to be deleted, and choose Delete Subrack from the shortcut menu. l Right-click a board to be deleted, and choose Delete Board from the shortcut menu.

View or modify

Right-click a device to be viewed or modified, and choose Property to view or modify the device.

3.3 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Parameters


This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS global parameters. The configuration express provides a window for configuring RNC-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-2. Figure 3-2 Configuration express for UMTS global parameters

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Configuration Guidance
1. 2. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > RNC in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring UMTS global parameters is displayed. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

3.4 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iub Interfaces


This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iub interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-3. Figure 3-3 Configuration express for Iub interfaces

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Configuration Guidance
1. 2. 3. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iub in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iub interfaces is displayed. In area 2, select a NodeB to be configured. In area 3, select an object to be configured in the navigation tree Properties. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 4.
TIP

In area 3, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

4.

In area 4, configure the parameters.

3.5 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-CS Interfaces


This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-CS interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4 Configuration express for Iu-CS interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-CS in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iu-CS interfaces is displayed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 60

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

2.

In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

3.6 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PS Interfaces


This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-PS interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5 Configuration express for Iu-PS interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. 2. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-PS in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iu-PS interfaces is displayed. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

3.7 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iur Interfaces


This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iur interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-6. Figure 3-6 Configuration express for Iur interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. 2. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iur in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iur interfaces is displayed. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.8 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-BC Interfaces


This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-BC interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-7. Figure 3-7 Configuration express for Iu-BC interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. 2. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-BC in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iu-BC interfaces is displayed. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

63

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.9 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Iu-PC Interfaces


This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Iu-PC interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-8. Figure 3-8 Configuration express for Iu-PC interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. 2. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iu-PC in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Iu-PC interfaces is displayed. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.10 Introduction to the Configuration Express for the (U) Iur-g Interface
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for the (U)Iur-g interface. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-9. Figure 3-9 Configuration express for the (U)Iur-g interface

Configuration Guidance
1. 2. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Iur-g in the Transport navigation tree. The configuration express window for configuring (U)Iur-g interfaces is displayed. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.11 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Gi Interfaces


This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for Gi interfaces. The configuration express provides a window for configuring interface-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-10. Figure 3-10 Configuration express for Gi interfaces

Configuration Guidance
1. 2. In area 1, choose The NE to be configured > UMTS > Gi in the Transport navigation tree. The express window for configuring Gi interfaces is displayed. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.12 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Global Radio Parameters
This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS global radio parameters. The configuration express provides a window for configuring BSC-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-11. Figure 3-11 Configuration express for UMTS global radio parameters

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, right-click a UMTS NE to be configured in the Main View navigation tree, and choose UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express from the shortcut menu. The express window for configuring UMTS global radio parameters is displayed. In area 2, select an object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 3.
TIP

2.

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.13 Introduction to the Configuration Express for UMTS Cells


This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for UMTS cells. The configuration express provides a window for configuring cell-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-12. Figure 3-12 Configuration express for UMTS cells

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, right-click a UMTS cell in the Main View navigation tree, and choose UMTS Cell Configuration Express from the shortcut menu. The express window for configuring UMTS cells is displayed. (Optional)In area 2, select a cell to be configured. In area 3, select an object to be configured in the navigation tree Properties. The configuration parameters of the object are displayed in area 4.
TIP

2. 3.

In area 3, you can also type the parameters to be configured on the tab pages Parameter List and Search. This helps to quickly locate parameters.

4.

In area 4, configure the data.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.14 Introduction to the Configuration Express for Neighboring UMTS Cells


This section describes the structure and provides the configuration guidance to the configuration express for neighboring UMTS cells. The configuration express provides a window for cell-level objects, as shown in Figure 3-13. Figure 3-13 Configuration express for neighboring UMTS cells

Configuration Guidance
1. In area 1, right-click a UMTS cell in the Main View navigation tree, and then choose UMTS Neighboring Cell Configuration Express. The express window for configuring neighboring UMTS cells is displayed. (Optional)Select a source cell in area 2. Select the object to be configured in the Properties navigation tree in area 3. Select the corresponding Template and NE in area 4. Select one or multiple required neighboring cells, and click Add. The information about the neighboring cell is displayed in area 5. (Optional) Right-click the neighboring cell selected in area 5, and choose Modify NCell Relationship from the shortcut menu to modify the information about the neighboring cell.

2. 3. 4.

5.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches


This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNCs in batches.

Procedure
Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click objects is displayed. Step 2 Select RNCs to be modified in batches. Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.
NOTE

. The dialog box for selecting

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified RNCs in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the results. Step 6 Click Finish. ----End

3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches


This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified logical NodeBs in batches.

Procedure
Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click objects is displayed. . The dialog box for selecting

Step 2 Click Add. Select the mode for adding NodeBs. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes. Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.
NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified NodeBs in batches.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the results. Step 6 Click Finish. ----End

3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches


This section describes how to modify the data about multiple physical NodeBs in batches.

Procedure
Step 1 In the Main View navigation tree in the left pane of the planned data area, right-click a UMTS NE, and choose CM Express > UMTS Application > Physical NodeB Management > Modify Physical NodeB Parameters in Bulk (M2000 Client Mode) or UMTS Application > Physical NodeB Management > Modify Physical NodeB Parameters in Bulk (CME Client Mode) from the menu bar. The Modify Physical NodeB Parameters in Bulk dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select an object to be modified and click Next. The data about the object for all physical NodeBs in the planned data area is displayed in the lower part of the window. Select one or multiple records, and click .

Step 3 Click Next, and modify the parameters value of the selected object. Step 4 Click Finish. The CME starts to modify the parameter value of the selected object. Step 5 After the modification is complete, click Finish to exit the wizard. After the automatic modification is complete, the CME displays a message, indicating whether the modification is successful. If the modification fails, you need to locate and solve the problem based on the displayed information. ----End

3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches


This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS cells in batches.

Procedure
Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click objects is displayed. Step 2 Select cells to be modified in batches. If you need to... Modify all cells under an NE in batches Then... Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down list and select NEs in the NE list. . The dialog box for selecting

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

If you need to... Modify specified cells under an NE in batches

Then... Select BY Cell from the Select mode drop-down list, click Add, and select the mode for adding cells based on site requirements. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.
NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified cells in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the results. Step 6 Click Finish. ----End

3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches


This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified RNC external cells in batches.

Procedure
Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click objects is displayed. Step 2 Select RNC external cells to be modified in batches. If you need to... Then... . The dialog box for selecting

Modify all RNC external cells under an Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down NE in batches list and select NEs in the NE list.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

If you need to... Modify specified RNC external cells under an NE in batches

Then... The following uses RNC 2G external cell as an example. Select BY GSMCELL from the Select mode drop-down list, click Add, and select the mode for adding RNC external cells based on site requirements. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes.
NOTE l If you want to modify RNC 3G external cells, the Select mode drop-down list displays BY NRNCCELL. l If you want to modify RNC LTE external cells, the Select mode drop-down list displays By LTECELL.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.
NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified RNC external cells in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the results. Step 6 Click Finish. ----End

3.20 Modifying UMTS Channel Parameters in Batches


This section describes how to change values of specified parameters for specified UMTS channels in batches.

Procedure
Step 1 In the configuration window, select a data record and click objects is displayed. Step 2 Select cells to be modified in batches. If you need to... Modify all cells under an NE in batches Then... Select BY NE from the Select mode drop-down list and select NEs in the NE list. . The dialog box for selecting

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

If you need to... Modify specified cells under an NE in batches

Then... Select BY Cell from the Select mode drop-down list, click Add, and select the mode for adding cells based on site requirements. For details, see Introduction to the Object Selection Modes.

Step 3 Click Next. The dialog box for selecting parameters is displayed. Step 4 Select parameters to be modified in batches.
NOTE

The dialog box displays only names and values of the parameters that can be changed in batches. You can change parameter values as required. The CME uses values of selected parameters as references to change parameter values of other specified cells in batches.

Step 5 Click Next. The CME starts batch modification. After modification, the CME displays the results. Step 6 Click Finish. ----End

3.21 Introduction to the Object Group Configuration


This section describes how to search for external cells in an object group and configure them. Figure 3-14 shows the window for configuring external cells. Figure 3-14 Window for configuring external cells

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

3 Overview of Configurations on the CME

Configuration Guidance
1. 2. In area 1, select the BSC to be configured in the Main View navigation tree. In area 2, select the external cell to be configured in the Object Group navigation tree.
TIP

In area 2, you can also type the parameters to be set on the Search tab page. This helps quickly locate parameters.

3.

In area 3, configure the data.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

4 Activating the UMTS License

4
About This Chapter

Activating the UMTS License

In the case of certain UMTS features, a license control item is defined for each feature. The license control item of a feature must be activated before the configuration and use of the feature. The license control items related to the RNC can be activated on the M2000 or RNC LMT, whereas those related to the NodeB can be activated only on the M2000. 4.1 Activating the BSC6900 License This section describes how to activate the BSC6900 license. 4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators When multiple telecom operators share one RAN, they can also share the resources defined in a NodeB license after you allocate the license to the telecom operators. 4.3 Allocating a License to NodeBs After uploading a NodeB license file of a RAN to the M2000 server, you need to allocate the license to the NodeBs in the RAN. Then you can activate the license for it to take effect.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

4 Activating the UMTS License

4.1 Activating the BSC6900 License


This section describes how to activate the BSC6900 license.

Prerequisites
l l The LMT is started and you have logged in to the BSC6900. The BSC6900 is in service.

Procedure
Step 1 Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ESN and record the Equipment Serial Number (ESN) of the BSC. Step 2 Run the BSC6900 MML command DLD LICENSE to download the license file from the FTP server to the \ftp\license directory of the main area directory of the OMU. Step 3 Run the LST LICENSE command and enter the filename of the license to be activated to query the file information. If... Then...

The file information complies with the information of Go to Step 4. the file that you apply for, The file information does not comply with the information of the file that you apply for, Exit the task and contact Huawei.

Step 4 Run the LST CFGMODE command to query the BSC6900 configuration status. If the BSC6900 is ineffective, run the SET CFGDATAEFFECTIVE command to switch it to the effective state. Step 5 Run the ACT LICENSE command to activate the license. Step 6 If the primary operator and secondary operators exist, run the SET LICENSE command to active the license for the primary operator first and then for secondary operators. If multiple secondary operators exist, run the SET LICENSE command repeatedly. Step 7 Run the BSC6900 MML command CMP LICENSE to check whether the running license on the host is consistent with that on the OMU. If... Then...

If the running license on the host is consistent with that End the task or go to Step 8. on the OMU If the running license on the host is inconsistent with that on the OMU End the task and contact Huawei.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

4 Activating the UMTS License

Step 8 In the case of high traffic, run the SET LICENSECTRL command to enable the license control function of the BSC6900 to enter the grace protection period. ----End

4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators


When multiple telecom operators share one RAN, they can also share the resources defined in a NodeB license after you allocate the license to the telecom operators.

Prerequisites
You have uploaded a valid NodeB license file to the M2000 server.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose License > NE License Management > NodeB License Management. The NodeB License Management window is displayed. Step 2 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the NodeB License Management window, select an RNC node whose NodeB license file is already uploaded to the M2000 server. Step 3 Right-click a license, and then choose License Distributed to Operator from the shortcut menu. Step 4 In the License Distributed to Operator window, set available functions and resources for each telecom operator, and then click OK. ----End

4.3 Allocating a License to NodeBs


After uploading a NodeB license file of a RAN to the M2000 server, you need to allocate the license to the NodeBs in the RAN. Then you can activate the license for it to take effect.

Prerequisites
You have uploaded a valid NodeB license file to the M2000 server.

Procedure
Step 1 Choose License > NE License Management > NodeB License Management. The NodeB License Management window is displayed. Step 2 From the navigation tree in the left pane of the NodeB License Management window, select an RNC node whose NodeB license file is already uploaded to the M2000 server. Step 3 Optional: In the lower part of the license information area, click the tab of a telecom operator. If a RAN is shared by multiple telecom operators, you can allocate a NodeB license to them by referring to 4.2 Allocating a license to Telecom Operators. The license allocation information about all the NodeBs related to the telecom operator is displayed in a list.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 78

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

4 Activating the UMTS License

Step 4 Double-click a NodeB to which you need to allocate the license, or right-click the NodeB and choose Modify from the shortcut menu. Then, set available resources and functions for the NodeB.
NOTE

l You can set a function control item to either 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the function is not enabled while 1 indicates that the function is enabled. l You can hold down Ctrl or Shift to select multiple NodeBs at a time. Right-click the selected NodeBs, and then choose Modify from the shortcut menu to set a control item value to all the selected NodeBs. l If a control item is unavailable in the Modify dialog box, it indicates that the control item is not supported by NodeBs. To view the values indicating that the control item is not supported by NodeBs, click the status description on the right in the Modify dialog box. For descriptions of the values, see Parameter Description in the dialog box. l When setting a certain control item, you can click Clear to clear the preset values in the column of the control item. l You can click Settings in the Modify dialog box to add or delete one or multiple control items to be set.

Step 5 Perform operations according to license allocation policies. After a NodeB license file is uploaded to the M2000, you can allocate the license to NodeBs immediately. You can also create a scheduled task for delivering preset license allocation information to NodeBs at a certain non-busy hour. You can allocate an inactive license to NodeBs. After an inactive license is allocated to NodeBs, it is activated automatically. If you want to ... Then ...

Allocate a license to NodeBs immediately 1. In the license information area, right-click a license record, and then choose Distribute from the shortcut menu. 2. In the displayed Message dialog box, click Yes. You can click Details to view the license allocate information. Deliver license allocation information to NodeBs on a scheduled basis 1. In the license information area, right-click a license record, and then chooseLicense Distribute Task from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, select the license record, and then click . The Task Management window is displayed. 2. Set the parameters of the scheduled task for delivering license allocation information. ----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release

5
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010510 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables RRC connection establishment and release and RAB assignment for services of different rates, so as to meet different QoS requirements. This feature is fundamental to service provision.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCESTCAUSE (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Channel Type and Rate of RRC Setup Cause Configuration > RRC Connection Establish Channel Type And Bit Rate; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the channel type and bit rate corresponding to a specific RRC connection establishment cause.
NOTE

Do not set Channel type for RRC establishment to FACH. Set Switch for RRC established on E_FACH to OFF.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 80

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release

1.

Start Iub interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 5-1 Figure 5-1 Iub Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Establish a service on the UE. Among the traced Iub data, view the dCH-ID in the DCH-Specific-FDD-Item IE in the NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ message. The result shows that the ID of the transport channel that carries signaling is 32. View the transmissionTimeInterval and nrOfTransportBlocks IEs in the ulTransportFormatSet IE associated with the DCH whose dCH-ID value is 32. If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 40, you can infer that an RRC connection is established for a 3.4 kbit/s service. If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 20, you can infer that an RRC connection is established for a 6.8 kbit/s service. If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 10 and the maximum value of nrOfTransportBlocks is 1, you can infer that an RRC connection is established for a 13.6 kbit/s service. If the value of transmissionTimeInterval is 10 and the maximum value of nrOfTransportBlocks is 2, you can infer that an RRC connection is established for a 27.2 kbit/s service.

3.

4.

Release the service on the UE, and perform Uu interface tracing. If you find an RRC_RRC_CONN_REL_CMP message in the traced data, you can infer that the RRC connection is released. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

5 Configuring 3.4/6.8/13.6/27.2Kbps RRC Connection and Radio Access Bearer Establishment and Release

//set the channel type and bit rate corresponding to a specific RRC connection establishment cause SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF; SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_6.8K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF; SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF; SET URRCESTCAUSE: RrcCause=ORIGCONVCALLEST, SigChType=DCH_27.2K_SIGNALLING, EFachSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class

6
Prerequisites

Configuring Conversational QoS Class


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010501 Conversational QoS Class.

l l l l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Others The UE and the CN support the conversational class.

Context
Based on QoS requirements, 3GPP defines four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive, and background. They differ in their sensitivity to delay. The conversational class is highly sensitive to the delay and therefore has a high requirement on real-time transmission. The conversational class has the following fundamental characteristics: l l Preservation of the time relationships between information entities in a stream and limitation of the transmission delay and delay jitter within an acceptable range. Conversational pattern (stringent requirement on the delay).

Conversational services are applicable in both the CS and PS domains. Most typical applications of the conversational class are voice services and videophone services in the CS domain and VoIP services in the PS domain. Huawei RAN supports the following basic types of conversational services: l l CS AMR speech services at the rates of 12.2 kbit/s, 10.2 kbit/s, 7.95 kbit/s, 7.4 kbit/s, 6.7 kbit/s, 5.9 kbit/s, 5.15 kbit/s, and 4.75 kbit/s CS transparent data services (conversational class) at the rates of 64 kbit/s, 56 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, and 28.8 kbit/s
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 83

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class

PS bidirectional symmetric voice services at the rates of 64 kbit/s, 42.8 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CS voice channel type and VOIP channel type to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH). Initiate Iub interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Verification Procedure 1.

Figure 6-1 Iub interface trace dialog box

2.

Establish a conversational service on the UE. Check the DPC (that is, the source) of the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message among the traced Iu data to determine whether the service is a CS service or PS service. View the trafficClass IE in the rRB-Parameters IE of the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message to verify that the traffic class is conversational. View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional, then the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate of the conversational service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission uses asymmetric rates. If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate applicable in both the uplink and the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission uses symmetric rates. If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional downlink, then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the downlink rate of the conversational service. In this case, the uplink rate of the service is 0. If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional Uplink, then the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the uplink

3.

4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

6 Configuring Conversational QoS Class

rate of the conversational service. In this case, the downlink rate of the service is 0. 5. View the guaranteedBitRate (the guaranteed bit rate of the conversational service) and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message by following the same rules as those for viewing maxBitrate. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating conversational QoS class SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType=DCH, VoipChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class

7
Prerequisites
l l l l License

Configuring Streaming QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010502 Streaming QoS Class.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. This feature is not under license control. Others The UE and CN support streaming services.

Context
Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive, and background. QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay. The streaming class is a relatively recent development in data communications, which raises a number of new requirements in both telecommunication and data communication systems. The transmission of streaming services must follow the time sequence of information entities . The streaming class has the following features: l l The time sequence of information entities in a stream is not changed. Streaming services are applicable in both the CS and PS domains. The most typical applications of the streaming class are fax services in the CS domain and streaming video services in the PS domain.

Streaming services are real-time services, such as audio and video programs. They are transmitted in only one direction and serve individual users.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 86

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for streaming services. If the assigned rate of a streaming service is lower than this threshold, the streaming service is set up on R99 channels.
NOTE

In the tests on 384 kbit/s streaming services, the settings of the thresholds cannot ensure that the services are set up on R99 services. In this case, you can disable the HSDPA and HSUPA capabilities of the cell to enable the streaming services to be set up on R99 channels.

2.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters. Set ACTSTATUS to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to disable the HSDPA capability of the cell. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell. Set Cell HSUPA state to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to disable the HSUPA capability of the cell. Start Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 7-1

3.

Verification Procedure 1.

Figure 7-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Use a UE to set up a streaming service. Check the DPC (that is, the source) of the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message among the traced Iu data to determine whether the service is a CS service or PS service. Check the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value of the trafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is streaming. View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. Expected result: If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate of the streaming service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service.

3. 4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

7 Configuring Streaming QoS Class

If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate in both the uplink and the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission use the same rate. If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional downlink, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the downlink rate of the streaming service. In this case, the uplink rate of the service is 0. If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric Uni directional Uplink, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the uplink rate of the streaming service. In this case, the downlink rate of the service is 0. 5. View the guaranteedBitRate (the guaranteed bit rate of the streaming service) and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message by following the same rules as those for the maxBitrate IE. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating Streaming Class QoS SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlStrThsOnHsdpa=D384, UlStrThsOnHsupa=D384; DEA UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1; DEA UCELLHSUPA: CellId=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class

8
Prerequisites
l l l l

Configuring Interactive QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010503 Interactive QoS Class.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Others The UE and CN support interactive services.

Context
Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive, and background. QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay. The interactive class is a typical data communication solution. It is characterized by the request/ response pattern of end users. For example, a person or an entity at the destination sends a data request to a remote server and expects a response message within a specific time. In this situation, the Round Trip Time (RTT) is one of the key attributes of the interactive class. Another characteristic is that the packets should be transparently transferred at a low Bit Error Rate (BER). In summary, the interactive class has the following fundamental characteristics: request/ response pattern and preservation of the payload. Interactive services are applicable in the PS domain and not applicable in the CS domain. The most typical application of the interactive class is web browsing. Huawei RAN supports the following types of interactive services: PS bidirectional symmetric or asymmetric interactive services at the rates of 384 kbit/s, 285 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

8 Configuring Interactive QoS Class

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for interactive services. If the assigned rate of an interactive service is lower than this threshold, the interactive service is set up on R99 channels. Start Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 8-1

Verification Procedure 1.

Figure 8-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Use a UE to set up an interactive service. Check the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value of the trafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is interactive. View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. Expected result: If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate of the interactive service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service. If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate in both the uplink and the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission use the same rate.

3.

Deactivation Procedure 1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating Interactive QoS Class SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D13900, UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa=D5440;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

9 Configuring Background QoS Class

9
Prerequisites
l l l l

Configuring Background QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010504 Background QoS Class.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Others The UE and CN support this feature.

Context
Based on QoS requirements, there are four traffic classes: conversational, streaming, interactive, and background. QoS indicates the sensitivity of services to the delay. A typical type of background service is data services. One of the characteristics of the background class is that the destination does not expect data within a specific time, and therefore the background class is delay-insensitive. Another characteristic is that the packets should be transparently transferred at a low Bit Error Rate (BER). In summary, the background class has the following fundamental characteristics: destination not expecting data within a specific time and preservation of the payload. Background services are applicable in the PS domain and not applicable in the CS domain. The most typical applications of the background class are download and emails. Huawei RAN supports the following types of background services: PS bidirectional symmetric or asymmetric background services at the rates of 384 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, and 8 kbit/s.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

9 Configuring Background QoS Class

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the HSDPA/HSUPA rate threshold for background services. If the assigned rate of a background service is lower than this threshold, the background service is set up on R99 channels. Start Iu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 9-1

Verification Procedure 1.

Figure 9-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Use a UE to set up a background service. Check the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message and check that the value of the trafficClass information element (IE) in rRB-Parameters is background. View the maxBitrate and rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IEs in the RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. Expected result: If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Asymmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains two values. The first value indicates the downlink rate of the background service, and the second indicates the uplink rate of the service. If the value of the rAB-AsymmetryIndicator IE is Symmetric bidirectional, the maxBitrate IE contains one value, which indicates the rate in both the uplink and the downlink. That is, the uplink and downlink transmission use the same rate.

3.

Deactivation Procedure 1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating Background QoS Class SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa=D13900, UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa=D5440;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

10 Configuring Emergency Call

10
Prerequisites
l l l License

Configuring Emergency Call

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021104 Emergency Call.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature grants higher priority to emergency calls so that they are preferentially processed, compared to normal calls.

CAUTION
If the license of the AMR-WB service is not activated on a RNC, ensure that AMR-WB is not enabled for this RNC on the CS core network side. Otherwise, both the AMR-NB services and emergency calls cannot be set up for the UE supporting AMR-WB.

Procedure
l l l Activation Procedure This feature need not be activated. Verification Procedure 1. Use a UE to initiate an emergency call.. The emergency call is successfully established. Deactivation Procedure This feature need not be deactivated.

----End
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 93

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface

11
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010506 RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface.

Dependencies on Hardware The NEs in the core network must support selective configuration of the maximum bit rate (MBR) and guaranteed bit rate (GBR). Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables the BSC6900 to initiate Iu renegotiation on the MBR and GBR of PS realtime services to reduce the rate of real-time services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable the cell-level LDR algorithm. In this step, set Cell LDC algorithm switch to UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm), DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm), and CELL_CREDIT_LDR (Credit LDR Algorithm). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to enable the NodeB-level LDR algorithm. In this step, set NodeB LDC algorithm switch to IUB_LDR(IUB LDR
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 94

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface

Algorithm), LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm), and NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm). 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-level LDR trigger threshold. In this step, set UL/DL LDR Trigger threshold and DL State Trans Hysteresis threshold according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBLDR (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set the NodeBlevel LDR credit spreading factor (SF) reserved threshold. In this step, set Ul LDR Credit SF reserved threshold and Dl LDR Credit SF reserved threshold according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the NodeB credit LDR threshold for the local cell. In this step, set Ul LDR Credit SF reserved threshold and DL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set LDR period timer length according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable QoS renegotiation on real-time services. In this step, set DL LDR first action to QOSRENEGO. Establish a PS streaming service. Trigger LDR in the cell according to the cell LDR threshold specified in the activation procedure. If RAB MODIFY REQUEST is traced on the Iu interface, this feature has been activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to disable the cell-level LDR algorithm. In this step, deselect UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm), DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm), and CELL_CREDIT_LDR(Credit LDR Algorithm) from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list box. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to disable the NodeB-level LDR algorithm. In this step, deselect IUB_LDR(IUB LDR Algorithm),
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 95

4.

5.

6.

7.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

11 Configuring RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface

LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm), and NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm) from the NodeB LDC algorithm switch drop-down list box. ----End

Example
/*Activating RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface*/ //Enabling the cell-level LDR algorithm MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-1; //Enabling the NodeB-level LDR algorithm MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NODEB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-1&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-1&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-1; //Enable QoS renegotiation on real-time services MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, DlLdrFirstAction=QoSRenego; /*Deactivating RAB Quality of Service Renegotiation over Iu Interface*/ //Disabling the cell-level LDR algorithm MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= UL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_LDR-0&CELL_CREDIT_LDR-0; //Disabling the NodeB-level LDR algorithm MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NODEB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-0&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-0&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity

12
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210604 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity.

Dependencies on Hardware In receive diversity mode, the NodeB should provide sufficient RF channels and demodulation resources to meet the requirements for the number of antenna diversities. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
The 2-Antenna Receive Diversity is an effective approach of reducing signal attenuation by using two antennas to receive a signal at the reception end, where two received signals are combined after certain processing.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Antenna Magnitude to 2. Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC to query the value of Antenna Magnitude. Expected result: Antenna Magnitude is 2.

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 97

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

12 Configuring 2-Way Antenna Receive Diversity

Example
//Activation procedure ADD SEC: STN=1, SECN=0, SECT=REMOTE_SECTOR, ANTM=2, DIVM=COMMON_MODE, ANT1SRN=60, ANT1N=R0A, ANT2SRN=60, ANT2N=R0B; //Verification procedure LST SEC: STN=1, SECN=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split

13
Prerequisites
l

Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010205 Cell Digital Combination and Split.

Dependencies on Hardware Only DBS3800/DBS3900 supports this feature, RRU3801c cannot support this feature. Each RRU is configured with only one RX antenna. It is not recommended that distributed sectors and non-distributed sectors are configured on an RRU chain. If distributed sectors are configured, one CPRI port supports a maximum of four cascaded RRUs, a maximum of four RRUs share one cell, and a maximum of three distributed cells are supported. One BBU supports combination of uplink digital signals on only one CPRI port. A maximum of four RRUs share one cell. In consideration of delay requirements, the remote distance of fiber optic cables for the RRUs in a cell and with the same coverage should be smaller than four kilometers. RF modules, RRU3828 and RRU3829 can only support a maximum of four carriers when they are implemented for Cell Digital Combination and Split.

l l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
The feature enables multiple sectors to use the resources in the same cell, which improves system spectrum efficiency and resource utilization. Compared with the analog combination and split, the digital combination and split can provide higher capacity and wider coverage without bringing additional noises or signal losses. Cell coverage can be adjusted simply through software to adapt to actual traffic distribution and changes, which improves CE resource utilization and operation benefits.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 99

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRUCHAIN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click TOPO > Add RXU Chain; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RRU chain. In this step, set Topo Type to CHAIN. Run the NodeB MML command ADD RRU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > TOPO > Right click RXU CHAIN > Add RXU Board; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an RRU. In this step, set a group of RRUs in consecutive numbering to the RRUs to be used by the distributed sector. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SEC (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Sector; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a sector. In this step, set Sector Type to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR). Run the NodeB MML command ADD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a local cell. In this step, set Sector Type to DIST_SECTOR (DIST_SECTOR). Run the NodeB MML command LST SEC. In this step, check that Sector Type is set to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR). Run the NodeB MML command LST LOCELL. In this step, check that Sector Type is set to DIST_SECTOR(DIST_SECTOR).

2.

3.

4.

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
1. NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, BM=COLD, HSN=2, HPN=0; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU, RS=UO; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, SN=1, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=1, RT=MRRU, RS=UO; ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, SRNB=60, SRNE=61; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=100, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=9610, DLFREQ=10560, HISPM=FALSE; //Verification procedure LST SEC: STN=0, SECN=1; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=100;

2.

NodeB V100R014
//Activation procedure ADD RRUCHAIN: RCN=0, TT=CHAIN, HSN=0, HPN=0; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=60, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU; ADD RRU: CN=0, SRN=61, TP=TRUNK, RCN=0, PS=0, RT=MRRU; ADD SEC: STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, SRNB=60, SRNE=61; ADD LOCELL: LOCELL=100, STN=0, SECN=1, SECT=DIST_SECTOR, BBPOOLTYPE=GEN_POOL, RRUMODE=SYNC, ULFREQ=9610, DLFREQ=10560, HISPM=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

13 Configuring Cell Digital Combination and Split


//Verification procedure LST SEC: STN=0, SECN=1; LST LOCELL: MODE=LOCALCELL, LOCELL=100;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)

Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010202 UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH).

14
l l l l

Configuring UE State in Connected

Prerequisites
Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Other Prerequisites The Iu-PS activity factor is already modified. The Iu-PS activity factor can be modified by running the ADD TRMFACTOR (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Factor Table; CME batch modification center: not supported) and MOD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > IP Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) commands. The recommended value of the Iu-PS activity factor is 10%.
NOTE

If there are excessive users in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, a large amount of bandwidth on the Iu-PS interface is consumed though such users do not have data to transmit. Adjusting the Iu-PS activity factor can prevent PS service admission failures due to the increase in the number of UEs in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state.

The Fast Dormancy procedure of the UE must comply with 3GPP TS 25.331 CR3483. UEs must support associated states.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)

Context
Huawei RAN supports four states of UEs in connected mode: CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, and CELL_FACH. This feature helps save radio resources efficiently.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure A UE can directly enter the CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH state. It can enter the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state only through state transition from CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH. The settings of state transition are as follows: 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_F2U_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to enable state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer and Cell Reselection Timer to appropriate values. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > UE State Translating Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell Reselection Counter Threshold to an appropriate value.
NOTE

2.

3.

4.

l This feature involves the parameter settings of state transition from CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH to CELL_PCH or URA_PCH. For the parameter settings of other types of state transition, see 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control. l For the parameter settings related to fast dormancy, see 175 Configuring Enhanced Fast Dormancy.

Verification Procedure This feature cannot be verified separately. The state of a UE changes when it requests different services. This is referred to as state transition. For details, see 17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 103

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH)

Example
//Activating UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH) //Enabling status transition (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_F2U_SWITCH-1; //(Optional) Enabling state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=65535, CellReSelectTimer=180; //Setting the parameters related to this feature SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=9;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

15
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Paging UE in Idle,

CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010301 Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1).

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
In paging type 1, the UTRAN sends a paging message to the UE in idle mode, CELL_PCH state, or URA_PCH state through the paging control channel (PCCH).

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch set to DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH, DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH and DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter Reserved parameter 1 to RSVDBIT1_BIT21 (Reserved Parameter 1 Bit 21).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 105

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer to 10 Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Interactive service T1 and Background service T1 to 1800. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD TRMFACTOR (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Factor Table; CME batch modification center: not supported) and MOD ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify the Iu-PS activation factor. The recommended value is 10%.
NOTE

4.

5.

l After this feature is activated, number of UEs in CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state will increase sharply. These UEs consume a large number of Iu-PS resources although there is no service data transmission. l You can adjust the Iu-PS activation factor to avoid the PS admission failure due to increasing number of UEs in CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state.

Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in Idle Mode) 1. 2. 3. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, Trace Mode and Save File. Then, click Submit. Power on UE1 and UE2, and camp on CELL1. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed on the Trace Data tab page. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive. Establish an R99 PS service on UE1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH. Do not send any data from UE1 for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform UE1 transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH. Do not send any data from UE1 for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE1 transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 106

Commissioning Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_PCH State) 1. 2. 3.

4.

5.

6. l 1.

Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in URA_PCH)

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

2.

Repeat step 3 through step 5 described in section "Paging a UE in URA_PCH" to perform UE1 transition to CELL_PCH. Cause UE1 to perform a cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2. Cause UE1 to perform another cell reselection after the Cell Reselection Timer[s] expires. Search for the last RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message in trace data. The value of rrcstateindicator IE should be URA_PCH. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE1 message should be displayed.
NOTE

3.

For details about how to enable UE transition to CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, see 14 Configuring UE State in Connected Mode (CELL_DCH, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH, CELL_FACH).

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect RSVDBIT1_BIT21 (Reserved Parameter 1 Bit 21) from the Reserved parameter 1 drop-down list box. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer to 65535. When this parameter is set to 65535, the FACH-to-PCH state transition is disabled. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Interactive service T1and set Background service T1 to 20.

2.

3.

----End

Example
// Activation Procedure //Setting the FACH/E_FACH-tO-PCH state transition timer for BE services SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=10; //Setting the PS inactive period detection timer for RNC SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=1800, PsInactTmrForBac=1800; //Adding an activation factor ADD TRMFACTOR: FTI=1, REMARK="Iu-PS", PSCONVDL=10, PSCONVUL=10, PSSTRMDL=10, PSSTRMUL=10, PSINTERDL=10, PSINTERUL=10, PSBKGDL=10, PSBKGUL=10; //Modifying the mapping between activation factor and adjacent node MOD ADJMAP: ANI=1, ITFT=IUPS, FTI=1; //Enabling the cell update during CS service setup SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT21-0; // Deactivation Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

15 Configuring Paging UE in Idle, CELL_PCH, URA_PCH State (Type 1)

//Setting the FACH/E_FACH-tO-PCH state transition timer for BE services SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=65535; //Setting the PS inactive period detection timer for RNC SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=20, PsInactTmrForBac=20; //Disabling the cell update during CS service setup SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT21-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2)

16

Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010302 Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2).

Prerequisites
l l l Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
In paging type 2, the UTRAN sends a paging message to the UE in CELL_FACH or CELL_DCH state through the DCH or FACH.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer[s] to 30s. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 109

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

16 Configuring Paging UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_DCH State (Type 2)

Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inactivity detection timers for PS services. l Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_DCH State) 1. 2. 3. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, Trace Mode and Save File. Then, click Submit. Establish an R99 PS service on UE1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE2 message should be displayed. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File, and then click Submit. The Trace Data tab page is displayed. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive. Establish an R99 PS service on UE1. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH. Do not send any data from UE1 for 30 seconds. Then, you can view that the network side performs UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message. The value of rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH. Use UE2 to call UE1. The RRC_PAGING_TYPE2 message should be displayed. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

4. l 1. 2. 3. 4.

Verification Procedure (Paging a UE in CELL_FACH State)

5.

6. l 1. ----End

Deactivation Procedure

Example
//Activating paging type 2 SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30; SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=1440, ProtectTmrForInt=20, PsInactTmrForBac=1440, ProtectTmrForBac=20;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

17
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021101 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control (DCCC). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature allows dynamic rate adjustment and UE state transition triggered by various reasons. This improves the quality of services and increases resource utilization.

Procedure
l Activating DCCC 1. To activate the DCCC algorithm, perform the following steps: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH. 2. To activate traffic-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following steps: a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC to set the following event 4A and 4B parameters: Direction Event4AThd Event4BThd TimetoTrigger4A
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 111

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

TimetoTrigger4B PendingTime4A PendingTime4B b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNClevel DCCC algorithm parameters: DcccStg UlRateUpAdjLevel UlRateDnAdjLevel DlRateUpAdjLevel DlRateDnAdjLevel UlDcccRateThd DlDcccRateThd UlMidRateCalc DlMidRateCalc UlMidRateThd DlMidRateThd 3. To activate throughput-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following steps: a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_THROUGHPUT_DCCC_SWITCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC. In this step, set DCH Throu Meas Period and HSUPA DCCC strategy. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC to set the following event 4B parameters for the DCH: Period Amount to trigger 4B on DCH Period Amount after trigger 4B on DCH 4. To activate link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment, perform the following steps: a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT to set the RNC-level QoS enhancement algorithm parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stability are: QOS Switch for BE Traffic First Action for BE Uplink QOS Second Action for BE Uplink QOS Third Action for BE Uplink QOS Wait Timer for BE Uplink Rate First Action for BE Downlink QOS Second Action for BE Downlink QOS Third Action for BE Downlink QOS Indicator for BE Uplink QOS Event Srnc Parameter for BE Downlink RLC QOS DRNC Parameter for BE Downlink RLC QOS
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 112

b. c.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

Measurement of 6A1 Switch Measurement of 5A Switch Measurement of 6D Switch b. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUALITYMEAS to set the RNClevel QoS measurement parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stability are: BE Trigger Time 6A1 BE Trigger Time 6B1 BE Trigger Time 6A2 BE Trigger Time 6B2 BE Trigger Time 6D UL Measurement Filter Coefficient DL TCP Measurement Filter Coefficient BE Trigger Time of Event E BE Reporting Period Unit for Event E BE Event E Reporting Period or BE Event E Reporting Period minute BE Trigger Time of Event F BE Reporting Period Unit for Event F BE Event F Reporting Period or BE Event F Reporting Period minute c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the cell-level Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stability are: Max UL TX power of interactive service Max UL TX power of background service
NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for Max UL TX power of interactive service and Max UL TX power of background service. Retain the default values in normal situations.

d. e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLRLPWR to set the cell-level downlink transmit power parameters. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLQUALITYMEAS to set the cell-level QoS measurement parameters. The parameters for ensuring link stability are: BE Trigger Time 6A1 BE Trigger Time 6B1 BE Trigger Time 6A2 BE Trigger Time 6B2 BE Trigger Time 6D BE Trigger Time of Event E BE Reporting Period Unit for Event E BE Event E Reporting Period BE Trigger Time of Event F

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

BE Reporting Period Unit for Event F BE Event E Reporting Period


NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for the preceding parameters. Retain the default values in normal situations.

f.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS to set the following typical parameters for QoS measurement: Uplink Event 6A1 Relative Threshold Uplink Event 6A2 Relative Threshold Uplink Event 6B1 Relative Threshold Uplink Event 6B2 Relative Threshold Statistic Block Number for 5A Event Event 5A Threshold Event 5A Interval Block Number Event Ea Relative Threshold Event Eb Relative Threshold

g.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABRLC to set Radio Link Control (RLC) parameters for a typical Radio Access Bearer (RAB). The parameters for ensuring link stability are: Re-TX monitor period Event A threshold Hysteresis of Event A Event A pending time after trigger Filter Coefficient of RLC Retransmission Ratio
NOTE

The BSC6900 defines default values for the preceding parameters. Retain the default values in normal situations.

h.

Link stability control for BE services is implemented through Inter-frequency handover. a. b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step, set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to INTERFREQ. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH.

i.

To configure inter-RAT handover for the link stability of BE services, perform the following steps: a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step, set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to INTERRAT and Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

b.

j.

To configure inter-frequency handover and inter-RAT handover for the link stability of BE services, perform the following steps:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 114

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHOCOMM. In this step, set Inter-Frequency and Inter-RAT Coexist Switch to SIMINTERFREQRAT and Inter-RAT PS Handover Switch to ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH and HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH.

b.

k.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNClevel DCCC algorithm parameters: Uplink Full Coverage Bit Rate Downlink Full Coverage Bit Rate

l.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLDCCC to set the following cell-level DCCC algorithm parameters: Uplink Full Coverage Bit Rate Downlink Full Coverage Bit Rate
NOTE

For details about the settings of measurement control parameters, see 110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.

5.

Activating basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUSERGBR to set the guaranteed bit rates (GBRs) for gold, silver, and copper users requesting interactive and background services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET to set HSUPA Uplink Rate Adjust Set. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set the following RNClevel DCCC algorithm parameters: DCCC Rate Up Fail Time Threshold DCCC Rate Up Fail Monitor Time length DCCC Rate Up Fail Penalty Time Length

b. c.

Activating the UE state transition algorithm 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, turn on the following switches of Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch: DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH DRA_F2U_SWITCH DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH DRA_HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH
NOTE

The HSDPA state transition license must be activated before the HSDPA state transition switch is turned on.

2. 3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS to set the measurement control parameters of the UE state transition algorithm. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER to set the timer parameters of the UE state transition algorithm.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 115

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

4. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC to set Low Activity Bit Rate Threshold. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER to set the following timer parameters for checking the low activity of PS users: Conversational service T1 Streaming service T1 Interactive service T1 Background service T1 IMS signal T1 Conversational service T2 Streaming service T2 Interactive service T2 Background service T2 IMS signal T2

Activating always online 1.

Verifying DCCC 1. Traffic-based BE service rate adjustment Set up an R99 BE service. Check whether the information element (IE) trafficVolumeMeasurement exists in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message traced on the Uu interface, as shown in Figure 17-1. In addition, check whether the value of the IE periodicalOrEventTrigger is eventTrigger (1), as shown in Figure 17-2. Figure 17-1 IE trafficVolumeMeasurement

Figure 17-2 IE periodicalOrEventTrigger

2.

Throughput-based BE service rate adjustment a. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor window. In the Monitor tab page, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth monitoring tasks.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 116

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

b.

Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. In the Connection Performance Monitoring tab page, you can view the bandwidth reduction in UL Throughput Bandwidth.

3.

Link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment Set up an R99 BE service. Check whether the value of measurementQuantity in the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message traced on the Uu interface is ue-TransmittedPower (0), as shown in Figure 17-3. In addition, check whether the value of the IE periodicalOrEventTrigger is eventTrigger (1), as shown in Figure 17-4. Figure 17-3 IE measurementQuantity

Figure 17-4 IE periodicalOrEventTrigger

4.

Basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment a. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor window. In the Monitor tab page, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth monitoring tasks. Set up an R99 BE service. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check the cell congestion status on the Uu interface (the cell is in the basic congestion state). You can view the bandwidth decrease in UL Throughput Bandwidth in the Connection Performance Monitoring tab page.

b.

Verifying the UE state transition algorithm Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. Check whether the value of rrc-StateIndicator in the traced RRC_RB_RECFG message is cell-FACH (1), as shown in Figure 17-5. Figure 17-5 IE rrc-StateIndicator

Verifying always online Set up an R99 BE service and maintain the service without data operations. The message RRC_RB_REL is not traced on the Uu interface.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 117

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

1. 2. ----End

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to turn off the related switches. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH.

Example
//Activating DCCC //Activating the DCCC algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1; //Activating traffic-based BE service rate adjustment MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC: RabIndex=1, Direction=DOWNLINK, Event4aThd=D1024, Event4bThd=D16, TimetoTrigger4A=D240, PendingTime4A=D4000, TimetoTrigger4B=D2560, PendingTime4B=D4000; SET UDCCC: UlDcccRateThd=D64, DlDcccRateThd=D64, DcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_DCH, UlRateUpAdjLevel=3_Rates, UlRateDnAdjLevel=3_Rates, UlMidRateCalc=HAND_APPOINT, UlMidRateThd=D128, DlRateUpAdjLevel=3_Rates, DlRateDnAdjLevel=3_Rates, DlMidRateCalc=HAND_APPOINT, DlMidRateThd=D128; //Activating throughput-based BE service rate adjustment SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_THROUGHPUT_DCCC_SWITCH-1; SET UDCCC: HsupaDcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH, DchThrouMeasPeriod=100; MOD UTYPRABDCCCMC: RabIndex=1, Direction=UPLINK, Event4bThd=D64, DchThrouTimetoTrigger4B=2, DchThrouPendingTime4B=16; SET UUESTATETRANS: E2FThrouMeasPeriod=30; //Activating link-stability-based BE service rate adjustment //Setting the QoS-related parameters SET UQOSACT: BEQosPerform=YES, BeUlAct1=RateDegrade, BeUlAct2=InterFreqHO, BeUlAct3=InterRatHO, BeDlAct1=RateDegrade, BeDlAct2=InterFreqHO, BeDlAct3=InterRatHO, BeUlEvTrigInd=SINGLE, SrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch=YES, DrncBeDlRlcQosSwitch=YES, BeUlQos6A1McSwitch=YES, BeUlQos5AMcSwitch=YES, BeUlQos6DMcSwitch=YES; SET UQUALITYMEAS: UlBeTrigTime6A1=D640, UlBeTrigTime6B1=D2560, UlBeTrigTime6A2=D1280, UlBeTrigTime6B2=D1280, UlBeTrigTime6D=D240, UlMeasFilterCoef=D19, DlMeasFilterCoef=D1, DlBeTrigTimeE=64, ChoiceRptUnitForBeE=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForBeE=480, DlBeTrigTimeF=64, ChoiceRptUnitForBeF=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForBeF=480; MOD UCELLRLPWR: CellId=1, CNDOMAINID=CS_DOMAIN, MAXBITRATE=12200, RLMAXDLPWR=-30, RLMINDLPWR=-180, DLSF=D128; MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS: RabIndex=1, UlThd6a1=1, UlThd6a2=5, UlThd6b1=1, UlThd6b2=5, StaBlkNum5A=500, Thd5a=280, HangBlockNum5a=512, ThdEa=2, ThdEb=2; MOD UTYPRABRLC: RabIndex=1, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH, OppositeTrchType=TRCH_DCH, DelayClass=1, RlcMode=AM, AmRlcCfgPara=FLOWCONTROL_PARA, TimeToMoniter=6000, MoniterPrd=1000, ReTransRatioFilterCoef=1, EventAThred=160, TimeToTriggerA=2, PendingTimeA=1; //Configuring inter-frequency handover for the link stability of BE services MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, InterFreqRATSwitch=INTERFREQ, CoexistMeasThdChoice=COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ, CSServiceHOSwitch=OFF, PSServiceHOSwitch=OFF; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH-1; //Configuring inter-RAT handover for the link stability of BE services MOD UCELLHOCOMM: CellId=1, InterFreqRATSwitch=INTERRAT, CoexistMeasThdChoice=COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ, CSServiceHOSwitch=OFF, PSServiceHOSwitch=ON; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; //Setting the DCCC algorithm parameters

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

17 Configuring Dynamic Channel Configuration Control

SET UDCCC: UlFullCvrRate=D64, DlFullCvrRate=D64; MOD UCELLDCCC: CellId=1, UlFullCvrRate=D64, DlFullCvrRate=D64; //Activating basic-congestion-based BE service rate adjustment SET UUSERGBR: TrafficClass=INTERACTIVE, THPClass=High, BearType=R99, UserPriority=GOLD, UlGBR=D16, DlGBR=D16; SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET: EdchRateAdjustSet=RATE_144KBPS-1&RATE_384KBPS-1&RATE_1280KBPS-1; SET UDCCC: FailTimeTh=4, MoniTimeLen=60, DcccUpPenaltyLen=30; //Activating the UE state transition algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_B E_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_F2U_SWITCH1; SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=9, D2F2PTvmThd=D64, D2FTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, D2FTvmPTAT=D1000, F2PTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, F2PTvmPTAT=D16000, BeF2DTvmThd=D1024, BeF2DTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeH2FTvmThd=D64, BeH2FTvmTimeToTrig=D5000, BeH2FTvmPTAT=D1000, BeF2HTvmThd=D1024, BeF2HTvmTimeToTrig=D0, E2FThrouMeasPeriod=30, E2FThrouThd=8, E2FThrouTimeToTrig=2, E2FThrouPTAT=4, BeF2ETvmThd=D1024, BeF2ETvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeF2CpcHTvmThd=D1024, BeF2CpcHTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeF2CpcETvmThd=D1024, BeF2CpcETvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2DTvmThd=D1024, BeEFach2DTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2HTvmThd=D1024, BeEFach2HTvmTimeToTrig=D0, BeEFach2CpcTvmThd=D1024, BeEFach2CpcTvmTimeToTrig=D0, FastDormancyF2DHTvmThd=D3k; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=180, BeD2FStateTransTimer=5, BeF2PStateTransTimer=5, BeH2FStateTransTimer=5, BeE2FStateTransTimer=5, BeCpc2FStateTransTimer=5, BeD2EFachStateTransTimer=5, BeH2EFachStateTransTimer=5, BeCpc2EFachStateTransTimer=5; SET UDCCC: LittleRateThd=D64; //Activating always online SET UPSINACTTIMER:PsInactTmrForInt=240, ProtectTmrForInt=10, PsInactTmrForBac=240, ProtectTmrForBac=10, PsInactTmrForCon=240, ProtectTmrForCon=10,PsInactTmrForStr=240, ProtectTmrForStr=10, PSInactTmrForImsSig=3600, ProtectTmrForImsSig=10; //Deactivating DCCC SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

18 Configuring Integrity Protection

18
Prerequisites
l l l License

Configuring Integrity Protection

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011401 Integrity Protection.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature protects the network and user data from being listened and modified illegally.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUIA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Security Mode Configuration > Integrity Protection Algorithm; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the RNC to support the integrity protection algorithm. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Iu Interface Trace. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Keep UE1 and UE2 in idle mode in CELL1. Use UE2 to call UE1. The messages RANAP_SECURITY_ MODE_COMMAND and RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. The chosenIntegrityProtectionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the integrity protection algorithm.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 120

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

18 Configuring Integrity Protection

1. ----End

This feature does not need to be deactivated.

Example
//Activating integrity protection SET UUIA: IntegrityProtectAlgo=UIA1-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

19 Configuring Encryption

19
Prerequisites
l l l Dependencies on Hardware License

Configuring Encryption

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-011402 Encryption.

This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. This feature is not under license control.

Context
The encryption algorithms supported by Huawei RAN include UEA0 and UEA1.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUEA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Security Mode Configuration > Encryption Algorithm; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the RNC to support the encryption algorithm. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Iu Interface Trace. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Keep UE1 and UE2 in idle mode in CELL1. Use UE2 to call UE1. The messages RANAP_SECURITY_ MODE_COMMAND and RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. The chosenEncryptionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the encryption algorithm. End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 122

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

19 Configuring Encryption

6.

The messages RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMMAND and RANAP_SECURITY_MODE_COMPLETE should be displayed. The chosenEncryptionAlgorithm IE of the latter message indicates the encryption algorithm. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating encryption SET UUEA: EncryptionAlgo=UEA0-1&UEA1-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control

20
Prerequisites

Configuring Open Loop Power Control


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020501 Open Loop Power Control.

l l l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables BSC6900 to roughly estimate path loss based on power measurement results, network parameter settings, and QoS requirements. Based on the estimation results, BSC6900 sets the initial transmit power for a UE and a NodeB before connection is established between them.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure Activate open loop power control on the downlink DPCH. 1. This feature does not need to be activated on the downlink DPCH.

Activate open loop power control on the uplink DPCH. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the parameters related to uplink DPCH power control.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control

l The BSC6900 uses the Default Constant Value parameter to calculate the power offset on the uplink DPCCH (DPCCH_Power_offset). Based on the calculation result, the UE calculates the initial transmit power on the uplink DPCCH (DPCCH_Initial_Power). l The formula for calculating DPCCH_Power_offset is: DPCCH_Power_offset = Primary CPICH DL TX power + UL interference + Default Constant Value. Where, DPCCH_Power_offset indicates the initial transmit power offset on the DPCCH, Primary CPICH DL TX power indicates the downlink transmit power on the P-CPICH, UL interference indicates the uplink interference, and Default Constant Value is the value of Default Constant Value. l The formula for calculating DPCCH_Initial_Power is: DPCCH_Initial_Power = DPCCH_Power_offset - CPICH_RSCP. Where, CPICH_RSCP indicates the received signal code power (RSCP) that the UE measures on the P-CPICH. An excessively small value of DPCCH_Power_offset may lead to uplink synchronization failures at the cell edge during initial link establishment, which affects uplink coverage. An excessively great value of DPCCH_Power_offset may lead to instantaneous interference on uplink signal reception, which affects the uplink receiving performance. For details, see 3GPP TS 25.331.

Activate open loop power control on the uplink PRACH. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UPRACHUUPARAS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > PRACH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the parameters related to the PARCH to appropriate values.

Verification Procedure Verify open loop power control on the downlink DPCH 1. 2. Use UE 2 to establish a conversation with UE 1. The message NBAP_RL_SETUP_REQ on the Iub interface shows the value of the IE initialDL-transmissionPower. This value is used for the downlink DPCH open loop power control.

Verify open loop power control on the uplink DPCH 1. Check the IE dpcch-PowerOffset, whose value is the same as that of DPCCH Power Offset, under the IE ul-DPCH-PowerControlIonfo contained in the RRC message Radio Bearer Setup, as shown in Figure 20-1. Based on the dpcch-PowerOffset value, the UE can further calculate the initial transmit power on the uplink DPCCH (DPCCH_Initial_Power) and perform uplink open loop power control. Figure 20-1 ul-DPCH-PowerControlIonfo IE

Verify open loop power control on the uplink PRACH 1. Check whether the IE constantValue whose value is -20 is contained in the RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE5 message by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. If the message contains this IE, parameters configured for the UE take effect. After obtaining values of these parameters, the UE calculates the initial transmit power and performs open look power control on the uplink PARCH.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 125

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

20 Configuring Open Loop Power Control

Deactivation Procedure 1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating open loop power control on the uplink DPCH SET UFRC: DefaultConstantValue=-22; //Activating open loop power control on the uplink PRACH MOD UPRACHUUPARAS: CellId=111, PhyChId=1, Constantvalue=-20, PowerRampStep=2, PreambleRetransMax=20;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance

21
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Downlink Power Balance

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020502 Downlink Power Balance.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
In soft handover, error codes in a TPC command may lead to downlink transmit power drift. The downlink power balance feature solves the problem of power imbalance between links, thereby achieving best gain in soft handover. The greater the downlink transmit power drift, the smaller the macro diversity gain. Downlink power balance adjusts power drift and improves performance of soft handover.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Power Control Switch to PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH. On the BSC6900 LMT, choose Trace > UMTS Services and double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then click Submit. Move a UE from cell 1 to cell 2 to ensure that the UE performs a soft handover.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 127

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

21 Configuring Downlink Power Balance

4.

Check whether the active cell set update is complete in the traced Uu-interface messages. Figure 21-1 shows the expected result.

Figure 21-1 RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message traced in Uu interface message tracing

5.

Start Iub interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Check the value of the information element dedicatedMeasurementType in the NBAP_DEDIC_MEAS_INIT_REQ message. Expected result: the value of dedicatedMeasurementType is transmitted-codepower(2) shown in Figure 21-2.

Figure 21-2 Information element dedicatedMeasurementType

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH to 0.

----End

Example
//Activating downlink power balance SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating downlink power balance SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

128

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control

22
Prerequisites

Configuring Outer Loop Power Control


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020503 Outer Loop Power Control.

l l l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
Outer loop power control guarantees the service quality by adjusting the target SIR of inner loop power control. Outer loop power control is performed on the DCHs carrying the same RRC connection. When the moving speed of a UE or the multi-path environment changes, the target SIR needs to be adjusted to ensure a desirable service quality. Otherwise, the service quality may be bad or will accordingly lead to severe interference and power waste. The legacy OLPC algorithm enables the target SIR to quickly increase but slowly decrease, therefore leading to a waste of uplink power. The optimized OLPC algorithm rapidly adjusts the target SIR in any of the following scenarios: service setup, service reconfiguration, burst interference, and status switching between insufficient UE transmit power and sufficient UE transmit power. By doing so, the average uplink target SIR is reduced and the uplink power consumption is decreased.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure Activating outer loop power control 1. Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 129

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control

Parameters in Batches) to activate outer loop power control. In this step, select the PC_OLPC_SWITCH check box under the PcSwitch parameter. 2. Optional: Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB OLPC Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the parameters related to outer loop power control based on the network plan.

Activating optimized outer loop power control


NOTE

You need to activate outer loop power control before activating optimized outer loop power control.

1.

Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to activate optimized outer loop power control. In this step, select the PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH check box under the PcSwitch parameter. Optional: Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS radio global Configuration Express > RNC-Oriented OLPC Algorithm Parameters Configuration > RNC-Oriented OLPC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set SIRtargetDownSpeed to an appropriate value. Optional: Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB OLPC Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set RefSIRtarget for a DCH to an appropriate value.

2.

3.

Verification Procedure Verifying outer loop power control 1. On the BSC6900 LMT main page, click Monitor. In the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. In this dialog box, set Monitor Item to OLPC, Monitor Period to OLPC, IMSI to an appropriate value, and Carrier Info to Main Carrier. Then, click Submit to start tracing. Use a UE to initiate an AMR or R99 service. Check whether the target SIR in OLPC has changed. If the target SIR has changed, this feature has been activated.

2. 3.

Verifying optimized outer loop power control 1. On the BSC6900 LMT main page, click Monitor. In the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. In this dialog box, set Monitor Item to OLPC, Monitor Period to OLPC, IMSI to an appropriate value, and Carrier Info to Main Carrier. Then, click Submit to start tracing. Use a UE to initiate an AMR or R99 service.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 130

2.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

22 Configuring Outer Loop Power Control

3.

When the service is successfully set up, check whether the adjustment value of the target SIR is the same as the specified value in each OLPC period. If they are the same, this feature has been activated.

Deactivation Procedure Deactivating outer loop power control 1. Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate outer loop power control. In this step, clear the PC_OLPC_SWITCH check box under the PcSwitch parameter. Run the Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate optimized outer loop power control. In this step, clear the PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH check box under the PcSwitch parameter.

Deactivating optimized outer loop power control 1.

----End

Example
//Activating Outer Loop Power Control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-1; //Setting the parameters related to outer loop power control MOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=11, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH, DelayClass=1, BLERQuality=-20; //Deactivating Outer Loop Power Control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_SWITCH-0; //Activating optimized outer loop power control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH-1; //Setting the step of uplink target SIR adjustment SET UOLPC: SIRtargetDownSpeed=10; //Setting the reference target SIR for a DCH MOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=5, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_DCH, DelayClass=1, RefSIRtarget=107; //Deactivating optimized outer loop power control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_OLPC_FASTDOWN_OPTIMIZE_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control

23
Prerequisites

Configuring Inner Loop Power Control


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020504 Inner Loop Power Control.

l l l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
Inner loop power control is also known as fast close loop power control. It is applied for dedicated channels only. It is used to adjust the transmit power based on the feedback from the physical layer of the peer end. The UE and Node B can adjust transmit power according to the SIR sent by each other. In this way, radio link fading can be reduced.

Procedure
l l Activation Procedure 1. 1. The feature does not need to be activated. Click the Monitor on the BSC6900 LMT main page. On the Monitor Navigation Tree pane, choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. The Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box is displayed. In the displayed dialog box, set Monitor Item to UL SIR and UE Tx Power, and enter the corresponding IMSI. And then click Submit to initiate the trace. UE 1 calls UE 2. UE 2 rings, answers and starts the conversation. Observe the variation of UL SIR and UE Tx Power in the UL SIR and UE Tx Power Connection Performance Monitoring window. UE 1 moves in the cell to change radio link quality. When you move UE 1 away from the cell center, UE_1 transmit power increases.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 132

Verification Procedure

2. 3. 4. 5.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

23 Configuring Inner Loop Power Control

6.

When you move UE_1 towards cell center, UE_1 transmit power decreases.

Figure 23-1 UL SIR Tracing

Figure 23-2 UE Tx Power Tracing

Deactivation Procedure 1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

24 Configuring Admission Control

24
Prerequisites
l

Configuring Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020101 Admission Control.

Dependencies on Hardware Uplink power admission algorithm 4 introduced in RAN14.0 is based on the actual service load, which is reported by the NodeB. However, some boards cannot support the measurement of the service load. The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE do not support uplink power admission algorithm 4. The DBS3800 does not support uplink power admission algorithm 4. If the 3900 series base station is configured with the WBBPa board or the RRU3801C 20W, uplink power admission algorithm 4 is not supported. In other configurations, the algorithm is supported.

l l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables the BSC6900 to perform admission control on UEs requesting R99 services by considering the status of various resources. It helps ensure the QoS and optimize the allocation of system resources.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Activating code resource admission Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 134

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

24 Configuring Admission Control

Cell Parameters in Batches) with Dl handover credit and code reserved SF set to an appropriate value. 2. Activating power resource admission a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select associated cell-oriented power admission control algorithms from the Cell CAC algorithm switch dropdown list, and select an appropriate algorithm from both the Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch drop-down lists according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set power resource admission parameters to appropriate values. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH from the CAC algorithm switch drop-down list to turn on the NodeB-level CE admission switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CRD_ADCTRL (Credit Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list to turn on the NodeB-level credit admission switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set UL handover credit reserved SF to an appropriate value.

b.

3.

Activating NodeB credit resource admission a.

b.

c.

4. l

Activating Iub resource admission This feature does not need to be activated.

Verification Procedure The procedure for verifying downlink admission control on R99 non-real-time PS services based on the number of equivalent subscribers is as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Enable a UE in the idle state to camp on CELL_A11. Set the PS service type to interactive on the HLR. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set DL total equivalent user number of CELL_A11 to 1. Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a PS service. Expected result: The UE fails to initiate the PS service. In the Iu Interface Trace window, an RANAP_RAB_ASSIGNBMENT_RESP message sent from the RNC to the CN is displayed, containing the cause value no-radio-resources-available-intarget-cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 135

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

24 Configuring Admission Control

5. 6. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set DL total equivalent user number of CELL_A11 to 80. Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a PS service. Expected result: The data service is set up successfully.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. Deactivating code resource admission This feature does not need to be deactivated. Deactivating power resource admission Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch to ALGORITHM_OFF. 3. Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH from the CAC algorithm switch drop-down list. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect CRD_ADCTRL (Credit Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list.

b.

4. ----End

Deactivating Iub resource admission This feature does not need to be deactivated.

Example
//Activating code resource admission MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlNonCtrlThdForAMR=75, UlNonCtrlThdForNonAMR=75, UlNonCtrlThdForOther=60, DlConvAMRThd=80, DlConvNonAMRThd=80, DlOtherThd=75, UlNonCtrlThdForHo=80, DlHOThd=85, UlCellTotalThd=83, DlCellTotalThd=90, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SF32; //Activating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-1&HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1&HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, MaxHsdpaUserNum=64, MaxUlTxPowerforConv=24, MaxUlTxPowerforInt=24; //Activating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlHoCeResvSf=SF16; //Deactivating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

24 Configuring Admission Control

//Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-0; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

25 Configuring Load Measurement

25
Prerequisites
l

Configuring Load Measurement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020102 Load Measurement.

Dependencies on Hardware In RAN14.0, the load measurement of total uplink services is introduced, and the dependencies on NodeB are as follows: The BTS3812, BTS3812E and BTS3812AE do not report the actual service load. The DBS3800 does not report the actual service load. If the 3900 series base station is configured with the WBBPa board or the RRU3801C 20W, the actual service load is not reported. In other configurations, the actual service load is reported.

l l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature is used to measure the load for the load control feature.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. The function of measurement on RTWP, TCP, and non-HSPA power is always activated. Therefore, this feature does not need to be activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HSDPA_PBR_MEAS(HSDPA PBR Meas Algorithm) and HSUPA_PBR_MEAS(HSUPA PBR Meas Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list to activate the cell-level load measurement for HSDPA and HSUPA.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 138

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

25 Configuring Load Measurement

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set load monitoring parameters, including the uplink/downlink load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm trigger/release thresholds and uplink/downlink overload congestion (OLC) algorithm trigger/release thresholds to appropriate values. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Monitoring Parameter Configuration > LDM Algorithm Parameters of RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set parameters associated with load measurement, report period, and smoothing filter length according to the network plan. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor page. In the Monitor navigation tree, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring, and create tasks of monitoring Cell DL Carrier TX Power and RTWP. Check whether the uplink full-bandwidth RX power of the cell is displayed in the RTWP monitoring window. Check whether the downlink carrier TX power is displayed in the Cell DL Carrier TX Power monitoring window. The measurement on RTWP, TCP, and non-HSPA power has been activated and cannot be deactivated. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect HSDPA_PBR_MEAS(HSDPA PBR Meas Algorithm) and HSUPA_PBR_MEAS(HSUPA PBR Meas Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list to deactivate the cell-level load measurement for HSDPA and HSUPA.

4.

Verification Procedure 1.

2. 3. l

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2.

----End

Example
//Activating load measurement MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-1; MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=1, UlLdrTrigThd=55, UlLdrRelThd=45, DlLdrTrigThd=70, DlLdrRelThd=60, UlOlcTrigThd=95, UlOlcRelThd=85, DlOlcTrigThd=95, DlOlcRelThd=85, HsupAuRetrnsLdTrigThd=70, HsupAuRetrnsLdRelThd=50; SET ULDM: UlBasicCommMeasFilterCoeff=D6, ChoiceRprtUnitForUlBasicMeas=TEN_MSEC, TenMsecForUlBasicMeas=100, DlBasicCommMeasFilterCoeff=D6; //Deactivating load measurement MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-0&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

26 Configuring Load Reshuffling

26
Prerequisites
l l l License

Configuring Load Reshuffling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020106 Load Reshuffling.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature provides multiple load reshuffling policies for a cell in the basic congestion state to decrease the cell load and increase the access success rate. The load reshuffling policies are inter-frequency load handover, code reshuffling, BE service rate reduction, uncontrolled realtime traffic QoS renegotiation, CS domain inter-RAT load handover, PS domain inter-RAT load handover, downsizing the bit rate of AMR voice, and MBMS power downgrading.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
NOTE

The following section provides the related parameters and commands. The parameter settings depend on the network plan.

1.

Enable the related load reshuffling algorithms. a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn on the following switches of Cell LDC algorithm switch: UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm): UL UU load reshuffling algorithm

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

26 Configuring Load Reshuffling

DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm): DL UU load reshuffling algorithm CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm): Code reshuffling algorithm CELL_CREDIT_LDR(Credit LDR Algorithm):Credit reshuffling algorithm b. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, turn on the following switches of NodeB LDC algorithm switch: IUB_LDR(IUB LDR Algorithm): NodeB Iub reshuffling algorithm NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm): NodeB-level credit reshuffling algorithm LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm): cell-group-level credit reshuffling algorithm 2. Set the related thresholds. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set LDR thresholds (UL/DL LDR Trigger/release threshold and DL State Trans Hysteresis threshold). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set code LDR threshold (Cell LDR SF reserved threshold) and LDR actions. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBLDR (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set the cellgroup-level or NodeB-level LDR thresholds (Ul/DL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-level credit LDR thresholds (Ul/DL LDR Credit SF reserved threshold). 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the LDR period (LDR period timer length). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the functions used in the LDR actions. Inter-frequency load handover
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 141

4.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

26 Configuring Load Reshuffling

Set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH and HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH. BE service rate reduction Set Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to DRA_DCCC_SWITCH. Uncontrolled real-time traffic QoS renegotiation Set PS Rate Negotiation Switch to PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH. CS domain inter-RAT load handover Set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH. PS domain inter-RAT load handover Set HandOver Switch to HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH. Downsizing the bit rate of AMR voice Set CS Algorithm Switch to CS_AMRC_SWITCH. l Verification Procedure The following section takes R99 non-real-time data services as examples to verify BE service rate reduction in the basic congestion state. 1. 2. Enable a UE in idle mode to camp on CELL_A11. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page. In the Monitor Navigation Tree tab page, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring. In the displayed dialog box, create a Cell DL Throughput monitoring task. Connect the UE to a laptop through the USB port and initiate a data service. Check the rb-mappinginfo information element (IE) contained in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface. The value of rrc-Stateinditator is CELL_DCH. Use the UE to log in to the FTP server and then start FTP downloading. Data downloading is normal. To simulate the scenario where power load reaches 75%, run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM. The RRC_RB_RECFG message is displayed in the Uu Interface Trace dialog box. In the Cell DL Throughput of the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, you can view the downlink RB rate decrease configured on the RNC. To stop simulating power load, run the NodeB MML command STP DLSIM. In the Uu Interface Trace dialog box, the RRC_RB_RECFG message is displayed. In the Cell DL Throughput of the Connection Performance Monitoring dialog box, you can view the downlink RB rate increase configured on the RNC. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the following switches from Cell LDC algorithm switch: UL_UU_LDR(Uplink UU LDR Algorithm): UL UU load reshuffling algorithm DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm): DL UU load reshuffling algorithm CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm): Code reshuffling algorithm CELL_CREDIT_LDR(Credit LDR Algorithm):Credit reshuffling algorithm 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 142

3.

4. 5.

6.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

26 Configuring Load Reshuffling

Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the following switches from NodeB LDC algorithm switch: IUB_LDR(IUB LDR Algorithm): NodeB Iub reshuffling algorithm NODEB_CREDIT_LDR(NodeB Credit LDR Algorithm): NodeB-level credit reshuffling algorithm LCG_CREDIT_LDR(LCG Credit LDR Algorithm): cell-group-level credit reshuffling algorithm ----End

Example
//Activating Load Reshuffling //Enabling load reshuffling algorithms MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_LDR-1&CELL_CODE_LDR-1&CELL_CREDIT_LDR1; MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="nodeb1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-1&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-1&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-1; //Setting load reshuffling thresholds MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=100, UlLdrTrigThd=55, UlLdrRelThd=45, DlLdrTrigThd=70, DlLdrRelThd=60, UlOlcTrigThd=95, UlOlcRelThd=85, DlOlcTrigThd=95, DlOlcRelThd=85, DlLdTrnsHysTime=1000; //Setting code reshuffling thresholds MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=100, DlLdrFirstAction=CodeAdj, DlLdrSecondAction=InterFreqLDHO, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8; //Setting NodeB-level credit reshuffling thresholds MOD UNODEBLDR: NodeBName="nodeb1", UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8, DlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8; //Setting cell-level credit reshuffling thresholds MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=100, UlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8, DlLdrCreditSfResThd=SF8; //Setting load reshuffling period SET ULDCPERIOD: LDRPERIODTIMERLEN=10; //Turning on load reshuffling function switches SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PsSwitch=PS_BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH-1,DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1,CsSwitch=C S_AMRC_SWITCH-1, HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH-1&HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH-1&HO_I NTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating Load Reshuffling MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=100, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_LDR-0&CELL_CODE_LDR-0&CELL_CREDIT_LDR0; MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="nodeb1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_LDR-0&NODEB_CREDIT_LDR-0&LCG_CREDIT_LDR-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

27 Configuring Overload Control

27
Prerequisites
l l l License

Configuring Overload Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020107 Overload Control.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature provides load adjustment means to quickly lower the load in overloaded cells.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to enable the air interface OLC algorithm. Select the UL_UU_OLC(Uplink UU OLC Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU OLC Algorithm) check boxes under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to enable the OLC algorithm. Select the IUB_OLC(IUB OLC Algorithm) check box under the parameter NodeB LDC algorithm. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented LDM Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 144

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

27 Configuring Overload Control

Cell Parameters in Batches) to set UL OLC trigger threshold, DL OLC trigger threshold, UL OLC release threshold, and DL OLC release threshold. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the OLC period (OLC period timer value). Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLOLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Overload Congestion Control Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to OLCrelated actions. Run the following BSC6900 MML commands to verify whether the activation is successful. LST UCELLALGOSWTICH LST UCELLLDM LST UNODEBALGOPARA LST ULDCPERIOD LST UCELLOLC
NOTE

5.

Verification Procedure 1.

Consult Huawei engineers about the verification solution to obtain professional technical support.
NOTE

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to dienable the air interface OLC algorithm. Clear the UL_UU_OLC(Uplink UU OLC Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU OLC Algorithm) check boxes under the parameter Switch for Cell Load Control. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to disenable the OLC algorithm, Clear the IUB_OLC(IUB OLC Algorithm) check box under the parameter NodeB LDC algorithm.

2.

----End

Example
//Activating Overload Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_OLC-1&DL_UU_OLC-1; MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_OLC-1; SET ULDCPERIOD: OlcPeriodTimerLen=3000; ADD UCELLOLC: CellId=111; //Deactivating Overload Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

27 Configuring Overload Control

NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=UL_UU_OLC-0&DL_UU_OLC-0; MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch=IUB_OLC-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

28 Configuring Code Resource Management

28
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Code Resource Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020108 Code Resource Management.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature provides downlink code tree allocation and reshuffling. Through this, the code resources can be rationally allocated, therefore increasing the utilization efficiency of the resources.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
NOTE

The code allocation function is always activated. The activation procedure applies to only the code reshuffling function.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches), and then enable the required LDR algorithm switches for resources (CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm)) through setting the Cell LDC algorithm switch parameter. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 147

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

28 Configuring Code Resource Management

Parameters in Batches) to set code LDR threshold (Cell LDR SF reserved threshold) and set CodeAdj(Code adjust) as one of the DL LDR actions. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the length of LDR period (LDR period timer length). Enable the UE in the idle state to camp on CELL_A11. Set the PS service type to interactive on the HLR. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR with Cell LDR SF reserved threshold set to SF8 and Max user number for code adjust to 1. Connect the UE to a laptop on the USB port and enable the UE to initiate a data service. Expected result: Services are set up on the DCH successfully. You can view the rbmappinginfo information element (IE) in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface. In the Cell Code Tree Monitor window, you can view that the service occupies code SF32(4). Enable the UE to log in to the FTP Internet server and then enable FTP download. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check the cell health status. The status of cell code congestion is displayed as basic congestion. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URESERVEOVSF to release the service that occupies code SF32(1). Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLCHK to check the cell health status. The status of cell code congestion is displayed as not congested. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches), and then deactivate the required LDR algorithm switches for resources (CELL_CODE_LDR(Code LDR Algorithm)) through setting the Cell LDC algorithm switch parameter.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4.

5. 6. 7. 8. l

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating Code Resource Management MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=CELL_CODE_LDR-1; MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, DlLdrFirstAction=CodeAdj, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8; SET ULDCPERIOD: LdrPeriodTimerLen=10; //Verifying Code Resource Management MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=111, CellLdrSfResThd=SF8, MaxUserNumCodeAdj=1; DSP UCELLCHK: CHECKSCOPE=CELLID, CELLID=111; RMV URESERVEOVSF: CellId=111, DLOVSFSF=SF32, DLCODENO=1; //Deactivating Code Resource Management MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=CELL_CODE_LDR-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

29 Configuring Potential User Control

29
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Potential User Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020105 Potential User Control.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature reduces system load by modifying cell selection and reselection parameters. In this way, the cell where the UE camps can be controlled based on cell load.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to select PUC(Potential User Control Algorithm) from the Switch for Cell Load Control drop list to enable the cell-oriented PUC algorithm. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET ULDCPERIOD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Load Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented LDC Algorithm Cycle Length; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to specify the period of potential user control. In this step, set PUC period timer length to an appropriate value. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLPUC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented PUC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 149

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

29 Configuring Potential User Control

Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-oriented PUC algorithm parameters. l Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. Configure two cells CELL_A11 and CELL_A12 as inter-frequency neighboring cells on the NodeB. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLPUC to change the potential user control threshold for CELL_A11. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to simulate a situation where the cell has a high load. The following messages can be traced on the Iub interface: the NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_REQ from the RNC to the NodeB, and the NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_RSP message responded by the NodeB. The updated system information can be traced on the Uu interface. The value of the Sintersearch signaling element (IE) of the SIB3 of CELL_A11 decreases, and the values of the Qoffset1s,n and Qoffset2s,n IEs of the SIB11 of CELL_A11 increase. 4. 5. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLPUC to change the potential user control threshold for CELL_A12. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to simulate a situation where CELL_A12 has a high downlink load. The following messages can be traced on the Iub interface: the NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_REQ message from the RNC to the NodeB, and the NBAP_SYS_INFO_UPDATE_RSP response message from the NodeB. The updated system information can be traced on the Uu interface. The value of the Sintersearch IE of the SIB3 of CELL_A11 decreases, and the values of the Qoffset1s,n and Qoffset2s,n IEs of the SIB11 of CELL_A11 increase. l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the PUC(Potential User Control Algorithm) check box under the parameter Cell LDC algorithm switch.

----End

Example
//Activating Potential User Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=PUC-1; SET ULDCPERIOD: PucPeriodTimerLen=1800; ADD UCELLPUC: CELLID=1, SPUCLIGHT=45, SPUCHEAVY=70, SPUCHYST=5, OFFSINTERLIGHT=-2, OFFSINTERHEAVY=2, OFFQOFFSET1LIGHT=-4, OFFQOFFSET2LIGHT=-4, OFFQOFFSET1HEAVY=4, OFFQOFFSET2HEAVY=4; //Deactivating Potential User Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch=PUC-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

30 Configuring Cell Barring

30
Prerequisites
l l l Dependencies on Hardware License

Configuring Cell Barring

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-021102 Cell Barring.

This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
If the cell barring feature is enabled, cells can be barred either automatically or manually to facilitate operators' maintenance when the cells are running improperly.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure Setting automatic cell barring 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST and BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST from the Process switch dropdown list. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UIUTIMERANDNUM (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > CN > IU Timers And Counter for CN Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable interruption protection by specifying CN protection timer.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 151

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

30 Configuring Cell Barring

Setting manual cell barring 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCALLCELLBLK (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for Quickly Blocking all the Cells in the RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure parameters related to barring of all cells served by an RNC in a network. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCNOPALLCELLBLK (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for Quickly Blocking all the Cells of the Designated Operator in the RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure parameters related to operator-specific barring of all cells in a network.

2.

Verification Procedure Block the PS domain or the PS domain is disconnected, which prevents UEs from being admitted to PS services. Perform the following steps to verify whether this feature is activated:
NOTE

Perform the same verification procedure when blocking the CS domain or the CS domain is disconnected.

1. 2.

Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message Type, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE1. View whether information element (IE) information of the PS domain is contained in the traced messages. Expected result: PS domain IE information is not contained, as shown in Figure 30-1.

Figure 30-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

30 Configuring Cell Barring

Block CS and PS domains, CS and PS domains are disconnected, or block the CS domain and turn on BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST. Perform the following steps to verify whether this feature is activated: 1. 2. Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message Type, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3. View whether IE information related to CS and PS domains is contained in the traced messages. Expected result: The IE information is not contained, as shown in Figure 30-2.

Figure 30-2 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

Bar PS services of UEs served by an operator. Perform the following steps to verify whether this feature is activated:
NOTE

Perform the same verification procedure when barring CS services of UEs served by an operator.

1. 2.

Click to display Uu Interface Trace on the BSC6900 LMT. Under Uu Message Type, select RRC_SYS_INFO_TYPE3. View whether IE information related to CS and PS domains is contained in the traced messages. Expected result: The IE information is not contained, as shown in Figure 30-3.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 153

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

30 Configuring Cell Barring

Figure 30-3 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

Deactivation Procedure Deactivating automatic cell barring 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST and BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST from the Process switch dropdown list. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URNCALLCELLBLK (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for Quickly Blocking all the Cells in the RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove parameters related to barring of all cells served by an RNC in a network. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCNOPALLCELLBLK (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Access Restriction Algorithm Parameters Configuration > The Parameters for Quickly Blocking all the Cells of the Designated Operator in the RNC; CME

Deactivating manual cell barring 1.

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

30 Configuring Cell Barring

batch modification center: not supported) to remove parameters related to operatorspecific barring of all cells in a network. ----End

Example
//Activating Cell Barring SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH SET UIUTIMERANDNUM: CnOpIndex=0, //Deactivating Cell Barring SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH = SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST-1; = BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST-1; CNId=0, StateIndTmr=20000; = SYS_INFO_UPDATE_FOR_IU_RST-0; = BARRED_CELL_FOR_CSDOMAIN_RST-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode

31

Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021301 Shared Network Support in Connected Mode. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites
l l l l Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Other Prerequisites CN must support this feature. When the Iur interface is used, the RNC connected over the interface must also support this feature.

Context
This feature enables the RAN and CN together to perform UE access restriction in specified location areas.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

For the CS service, configure two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the MSC. For the PS service, run the MML command ADD SNA on the SGSN to add SNA, SNA1, and SNA2. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACINFO to modify the RACs of CELL1 and CELL2. Set up a cell. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide. Run the BSC6900 MML command to turn on the soft handover switch.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 156

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode

6. l 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable the SNA function. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Iu Interface Trace. The Iu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Keep UE1 and UE2 in idle mode in CELL1. Run the BSC6900 MML command to disable the SNA function. Use UE1 to call UE2. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE. Move UE1 to CELL2 to trigger soft handover. The RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message from the RNC to UE1 and the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message from UE1 to the RNC should be displayed in Uu trace data. End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode in CELL1. Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable the SNA function. Add a mapping relation between IMSI of UE1 and SNA1 on the MSC. Use UE1 to call UE2. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE.
NOTE

Verifying the SNA Function of the CS Service

6. 7. 8. 9.

CELL2 belongs to SNA2 but not SNA1. Therefore, the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message sent from the RNC to UE1 on the Uu interface should indicate that CELL2 is not in the monitoring cell.

10. Move UE1 to CELL2, which will not trigger soft handover because UE1 does not belong to SNA_2. 11. End the calling. UE1 and UE2 return to the idle mode in CELL1. l Verifying the SNA Function of the PS Service 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the MML command ADD SNA on the SGSN to add SNA information. Run the BSC6900 MML command to disable the SNA function. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1. Establish a PS service on UE1. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE. Move UE1 to CELL2 to trigger soft handover. The RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message from the RNC to UE1 and the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message from UE1 to the RNC should be displayed in Uu trace data. End the PS service of UE1. UE1 returns to the idle mode in CELL1. Run the BSC6900 MML command to enable the SNA function. Establish a PS service on UE1. The RANAP_COMMON_ID message from UE1 should be displayed in Iu trace data, and it should include the SNA ACCESS information IE. CELL2 belongs to SNA2 but not SNA1. Therefore, the RRC_MEAS_CTRL message sent from the RNC to UE1 on the Uu interface should indicate that CELL2 is not in the monitoring set.

5.

6. 7. 8.

9.

10. Move UE1 to CELL2, which will not trigger soft handover because UE1 does not belong to SNA_2. 11. End the PS service of UE1. UE1 returns to the idle mode in CELL1. l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 157

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

31 Configuring Shared Network Support in Connected Mode

1. ----End

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to disable the SNA function.

Example
//Adding two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the MSC ADD LOCNOLAI: LOCNONAME="SNA_1", LAI="460020001"; ADD LOCSNA: LOCNONAME=" SNA_1", SNAC=1; ADD SNAGRPCODE: SNAGRPN="1", SNAC=1; ADD LOCNOLAI: LOCNONAME="SNA_2", LAI="460020002"; ADD LOCSNA: LOCNONAME=" SNA_2", SNAC=2; ADD SNAGRPCODE: SNAGRPN="2", SNAC=2; //Activating the SNA function of the CS Service MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=1, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1; MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=2, LAC=2, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=2; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1; //Verifying the SNA function of the CS Service SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1; ///Add a mapping relation between IMSI and SNA1 on the MSC ADD IMSIGRP: IMSIPRE=K'460071104008338, MCCMNC1=K'46002, SNAGRPN1="1"; MOD RNC: RNCID=1, CAPABILITY=SNA-1; //Deactivating the SNA function SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0; //Adding two SNAs (for example, SNA1 and SNA2) on the SGSN ADD SNA: PLMN="46002", LAC="1", SNAC=1; ADD SNA: PLMN="46002", LAC="2", SNAC=2; //Activating the SNA function of the PS Service MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=1, LAC=1, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1; MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=2, LAC=2, SAC=0, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=2; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1; //Adding SNA information on the SGSN ADD SNAA: BEGIMSI="460071104008338", ENDIMSI="460071104008338", PLMN="46002", SNAC=1; //Verifying the SNA function of the PS Service SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating the SNA function SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_MC_SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover

32
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020201 Intra NodeB Softer Handover.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables softer handover within a NodeB. Intra-NodeB softer handover is one type of soft handover. To perform softer handover, multiple RLs need to be established. In this way, the uplink resources of a cell in the same uplink resource group can be fully shared. In contrast to soft handover, softer handover does not consume additional transmission resources on the Iub interface. Therefore, softer handover can provide higher combination gain and require less transmission resources on the Iub interface. Softer handover may occur within the same uplink resource group.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH under HandOver Switch to enable soft handover. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 159

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

32 Configuring Intra NodeB Softer Handover

Configuration > RNC Oriented Handover Algorithm Common Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Softer handover combination indicator switch to MAY or MUST. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intrafrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an intra-frequency neighboring cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Intra-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to handover. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then, click Submit. UE is in idle mode and camps on the CELL1. UE initiates PS Dial-up, and service is set up successfully. UE moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed RNC sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE and UE sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC. The data transmission remains normal while UE is moving to CELL2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UHOCOMM (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Handover Algorithm Common Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Softer handover combination indicator switch to MUST_NOT.

4.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6. l 1.

Deactivation Procedure

----End

Example
//Activating Intra NodeB Softer Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; SET UHOCOMM: DivCtrlField=MAY; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=202, CellId=2381, NCellRncId=203, NCellId=3291, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; SET UINTRAFREQHO: FilterCoef=D3, IntraFreqMeasQuantity=CPICH_EC/NO, PeriodMRReportNumfor1C=D16, ReportIntervalfor1C=D4000; //Deactivating Intra NodeB Softer Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover

33
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020202 Intra RNC Soft Handover.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
Intra-RNC soft handover is one type of soft handover. To implement intra-RNC soft handover, multiple RLs need to be established between NodeBs or within a NodeB. Intra-NodeB softer handover and intra-RNC soft handover differ in the place where macro diversity combining is performed. For intra-RNC soft handover, macro diversity combining, which is in selective mode, is performed within the RNC. In such a case, each RL on the Iub interface carries transmission data independently. Compared with intra-NodeB softer handover, the intra-RNC soft handover can be applied to more scenarios.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable soft handover. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intrafrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an intra-frequency neighboring cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 161

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

33 Configuring Intra RNC Soft Handover

Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Intra-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to handover. l Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then, click Submit. Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1. UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation clear. UE1 moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed that RNC1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE1, and UE1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Softer handover combination indicator to disable the soft handover.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating Intra RNC Soft Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=202, CellId=2381, NCellRncId=203, NCellId=3291, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; SET UINTRAFREQHO: FilterCoef=D3, IntraFreqMeasQuantity=CPICH_EC/NO, PeriodMRReportNumfor1C=D16, ReportIntervalfor1C=D4000; //Deactivating Intra RNC Soft Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover

34
Prerequisites
l l l l

Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020203 Inter RNC Soft Handover.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Other Prerequisites The Iur interface is configured between adjacent RNCs.

Context
Inter-RNC soft handover is one type of soft handover. To implement inter-RNC soft handover, multiple RLs need to be established between different RNCs. In such a case, macro diversity combining is performed by the SRNC connected through the Iur interface. The SRNC sends the DRNC the radio link establishment signaling over the Iur interface. Based on the signaling, the DRNC establishes a radio link in the new NodeB. Other procedures are similar to those of intraRNC soft handover. This feature enables telecom operators to provide seamless connection services to subscribers. Inter-RNC soft handover has wider application scenario than soft handover in other forms, as it can be applied to the RNCs connected through the Iur interface.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable soft handover. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 163

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

34 Configuring Inter RNC Soft Handover

modification center: not supported) or MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable cross-Iur soft handover. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a neighboring RNC cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intrafrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an intra-frequency neighboring cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Intra-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to handover. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then, click Submit. Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1. UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation clear. UE1 moves from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Data, it can be observed that RNC1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE message to UE1, and UE1 sends the RRC_ACTIVE_SET_UPDATE_CMP message to RNC1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable the cross-Iur soft handover.

4.

5.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating Inter RNC Soft Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1; ADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=1, CellId=2381, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST, CellName="2222", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=256, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9750, UARFCNDownlink=10700, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=2506, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, UseOfHcs=NOT_USED, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1, EFachSupInd=FALSE; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, CellId=221, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=222, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; //Deactivating Inter RNC Soft Handover MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-0&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover

35
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020301 Intra Frequency Hard Handover.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
When hard handover is performed, the existing connection is interrupted before new connection is set up. Intra-frequency hard handover is performed between cells on the same frequency.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the HandOver switch list. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intrafrequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an intra-frequency or inter-RNC neighboring cell. If cross-Iur hard handover is required, add the neighboring RNC and neighboring RNC cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 165

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover

batch modification center: not supported) to add a neighboring RNC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a neighboring RNC cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Neighboring Cell > Intra-frequency Neighboring Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the neighboring cell relations. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UINTRAFREQHO (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > HandOver Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented Intra-frequency Handover Measurement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter related to handover. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then, click Submit. Both UE1 and UE2 are subscribed in HLR to support speech service. 4. Both UE1 and UE2 are in idle mode and camp on the CELL1. UE1 calls UE2, and the conversation is clear. UE1 moved from CELL1 to CELL2, through the Trace Date, it can be observed RRC_MEAS_RPRT message with 1D event that UE1 sends to RNC1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deselect HO_INTRA_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH from the Handover switch list.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating Intra Frequency Hard Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-1; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=1, NCellId=211, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE; ADD UNRNC: NRncId =2, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-0&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-0, HHOTRIG=ON, SERVICEIND=SUPPORT_CS_AND_PS, IurExistInd=TRUE, DPX=1, RNCPROTCLVER=R5, STATEINDTMR=20, TnlBearerType=ATM_TRANS; ADD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=2, CellId=311, CellHostType=SINGLE_HOST, CellName="311", CnOpGrpIndex=0, PScrambCode=256, BandInd=Band1, UARFCNUplinkInd=TRUE, UARFCNUplink=9750, UARFCNDownlink=10700, TxDiversityInd=FALSE, LAC=H'2506, CfgRacInd=NOT_REQUIRE, QqualminInd=FALSE, QrxlevminInd=FALSE, MaxAllowedUlTxPowerInd=FALSE, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1, EFachSupInd=FALSE; ADD UINTRAFREQNCELL: RncId=1, CellId=111, NCellRncId=2, NCellId=311, SIB11Ind=TRUE, SIB12Ind=FALSE, TpenaltyHcsReselect=D0, NPrioFlag=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover

//Deactivating Intra Frequency Hard Handover SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_INTRA_FREQ_SOFT_HO_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

36
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010801 Intra RNC Cell Update.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
Cell update is mainly used to update the UE information on the network side when the UE location or behavior is changed. Intra-RNC cell update means cell update within the RNC.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameters BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer[s] and BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer[s] to 30s and 60s respectively. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 168

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inactivity detection timers for PS services. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCONNMODETIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE Timers and Constants Configuration > UE Timers And Constants in Connected Mode; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the periodic cell update timer to 5 minutes. Set CELL1 and CELL2 of the RNC as intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then, click Submit. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH. Cause the UE to reselect a new cell so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of cell reselection, and the RNC should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH. Do not send any data from UE1 for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH. Use the UE to transmit data so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of uplinkdatatransmission, and the RNC should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 169

5. l

Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Cell Reselection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

7.

Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Uplink Data Transmission 1. 2. 3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Verifying Periodic Cell Update 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

36 Configuring Intra RNC Cell Update

Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer[s] to 65535. For example,
SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeF2PStateTransTimer=65535;

2. 3. 4. 5.

Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH. Do not send any data from the UE for five minutes so as to trigger periodic cell update. The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of periodiccellupdate, and the RNC should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE. None

6.

7.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating intra-RNC cell update SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30, BeF2PStateTransTimer=60; SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0; SET UCONNMODETIMER: T305=D5;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update

37
Prerequisites
l l l l

Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010802 Inter RNC Cell Update.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Other Prerequisites The Iur interface is configured between adjacent RNCs.

Context
Cell update is mainly used to update the UE information on the network side when the UE location or behavior is changed. Inter-RNC cell update means cell update between RNCs.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer to 30s. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 171

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

37 Configuring Inter RNC Cell Update

Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inactivity detection timers for PS services. 4. 5. Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells controlled by different BSC6900s. For details, see the Configuring an Intra-Frequency Neighboring Cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameter IUR CCH support flag to ON.
NOTE

IUR CCH support flag is also turned on neighboring BSC6900.

Verifying Cell Update Triggered by Cell Reselection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then, click Submit. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH. Cause the UE to perform cell reselection from local cell to intra-frequency neighboring cell so as to trigger cell update. The UE should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE message to neighboring BSC6900, with the cell update cause of cell reselection, and local BSC6900 should send the RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

6.

7.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating inter-RNC cell update SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=30; SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SuppIurCch=YES;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

38
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010901 Intra RNC URA Update.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
The UTRAN registration area (URA) update procedure updates the URA of a UE when an RRC connection exists and the location of the UE is known on the URA level in the UTRAN. IntraRNC URA update means URA update within the RNC.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLACINFO (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set CELL1 and CELL2 as the intra-frequency neighboring cells that belong to the same location area, route area, and service area. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLURA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell URA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure CELL1 and CELL2 to make them belong to different URAs. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH from
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 173

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

the Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch drop-down list to turn on the RNCoriented PS BE service state transition switch. 4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_F2U_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to to enable state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the Cell Reselection Timer, BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer, and BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer parameters to 60s, 10s, and 10s respectively. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inactivity detection timers for PS services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCONNMODETIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE Timers and Constants Configuration > UE Timers And Constants in Connected Mode; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the periodic cell update timer to 5 minutes. Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then, click Submit. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH. When the DRA_F2U_SWITCH switch is on or off, the state transition of UE is different. If the switch is off: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_PCH. Make the UE perform a cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2. Make UE1 perform another cell reselection after the Cell Reselection

5.

6.

7.

8. l

Verifying URA Update Triggered by URA Reselection 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

7.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

38 Configuring Intra RNC URA Update

Timer[s] expires. Search for the last RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message in trace data. The value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH. If the switch is on: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to URA_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH. 8. Keep the UE in URA_PCH state. Perform another cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2 so as to trigger URA update. The UE should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of changeofURA, and the RNC should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE. Do not send any data from the UE for five minutes, to trigger periodic URA update. The UE should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of URA reselection, and the RNC should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

Verifying Periodic URA Update 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating intra-RNC URA update //Configring the cell information MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=111, LAC=1, SAC=1, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1; MOD UCELLACINFO: CellId=121, LAC=1, SAC=1, CfgRacInd=REQUIRE, RAC=1; ADD UCELLURA: CellId=111, URAId=0; ADD UCELLURA: CellId=121, URAId=1; //Enabling status transition (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; //(Optional) Enabling state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_F2U_SWITCH-1; //Setting the parameters related to this feature SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: BeD2FStateTransTimer=65535, CellReSelectTimer=180; SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=60, BeD2FStateTransTimer=10, BeF2PStateTransTimer=10; SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=1; SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0; SET UCONNMODETIMER: T305=D5;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

39
Prerequisites
l l l l

Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010902 Inter RNC URA Update.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Others The Iur interface is configured between adjacent RNCs.

Context
Inter-RNC URA update means URA update between RNCs.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Configure the Iur interface. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLURA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell URA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure CELL1 and CELL2 to make them belong to different URAs.
NOTE

Cell1 belongs to RNC_1, Cell2 belongs to RNC_2.

3.

On the RNC1 side, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 176

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the RNC-oriented PS BE service state transition switch. 4. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_F2U_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch to to enable state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > RNC StateTrans Timer Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the Cell Reselection Timer, BE DCH to FACH Transition Timer, and BE FACH or E_FACH to PCH Transition Timer parameters to 60s, 10s, and 10s respectively. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUESTATETRANS (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > UE State Transition Parameter Configuration > UE State Translating Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter Cell Reselection Counter Threshold to 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UPSINACTTIMER (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > PS Permanent Online Detection Timer Configuration > PS User Inactive Detecting Timer; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set inactivity detection timers for PS services. Configure intra-frequency neighboring cells. For details, see the BSC6900 UMTS Initial Configuration Guide. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the setup of command channels on the Iur interface. Log on the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Services, and then double-click Uu Interface Trace. The Uu Interface Trace dialog box is displayed. Set parameters in the areas Cell Config, Uu Message Type, and Save File. Then, click Submit. Keep the UE in idle mode in CELL1. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive. Establish an R99 PS service on the UE. The RRC_RB_SETUP message should be displayed in trace data, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_DCH. Do not send any data from UE for 30 seconds. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_FACH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be CELL_FACH. When the DRA_F2U_SWITCH switch is on or off, the state transition of UE is different. If the switch is off: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to CELL_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 177

5.

6.

7.

8. 9.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

6.

7.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

39 Configuring Inter RNC URA Update

CELL_PCH. Make the UE perform a cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2. Make UE1 perform another cell reselection after the Cell Reselection Timer[s] expires. Search for the last RRC_CELL_UPDATE_CONFIRM message in trace data. The value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH. If the switch is on: Do not send any data from the UE for another while. Then, the network side should perform UE transition to URA_PCH state through the RRC_RB_RECFG message, and the value of the rrc-stateindicator IE should be URA_PCH. 8. Keep the UE in URA_PCH state. Perform another cell reselection between CELL1 and CELL2 so as to trigger URA update. The UE should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE message to the RNC, with the cell update cause of CHANGE OF URA, and the RNC should send the RRC_URA_UPDATE_CONFIRM message to the UE. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating inter-RNC URA update //Configring the cell information ADD UCELLURA: CellId=111, URAId=0; ADD UCELLURA: CellId=121, URAId=1; //Enabling status transition (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; //(Optional) Enabling state transition from CELL_FACH to URA_PCH directly SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_F2U_SWITCH-1; //Setting the parameters related to this feature SET UUESTATETRANSTIMER: CellReSelectTimer=60, BeD2FStateTransTimer=10, BeF2PStateTransTimer=10; SET UUESTATETRANS: CellReSelectCounter=1; SET UPSINACTTIMER: PsInactTmrForInt=0, PsInactTmrForBac=0; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SuppIurCch=YES; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, SuppIurCch=YES;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Reestablishment (DSCR)

Connection Re-establishment (DSCR)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-021400 Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR).

40

Configuring Direct Signaling

Prerequisites
l l l Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
During a DSCR procedure, the RNC autonomously releases the RRC connection carrying nonreal-time RABs and then immediately requests the UE to re-establish an RRC connection for service setup. The RRC connection re-establishment procedure is triggered by an RRC CONNECTION RELEASE message with the cause value of Directed Signaling Connection re-establishment sent from the RNC to the UE. A routing area update follows the RRC connection re-establishment immediately. The DSCR feature is supplementary to the feature WRFD-020605 SRNS Relocation Introduction Package. When the Iur resources are insufficient or SRNS relocation fails, the DSCR feature ensures uninterrupted PS services. Only background and interactive services support this feature. The DSCR re-establishes a service through the routing area update procedure. Therefore, this feature is applicable only to PS services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 179

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Reestablishment (DSCR)

modification center: not supported). In this step, set Handover Type for PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_DSCR.
NOTE

The default value of Handover Type for PS BE Traffic is CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC. You can modify the value according to the actual requirements.

2.

If the Iur interface exists, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the switches related to SRNS relocation. If the UE is not in the CELL_DCH state, run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the DSCR switch for the DRNC. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 40-1 and Figure 40-2.

3.

Verification Procedure 1.

Figure 40-1 Uu interface tracing dialog box

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

40 Configuring Direct Signaling Connection Reestablishment (DSCR)

Figure 40-2 RRC CONNECTION RELEASE

2. 3.

Use the UE to establish a PS BE service. Perform a handover by adding a cell under the DRNC and then removing the source cell. View the RRC_RRC_CONN_REL message traced on the Uu interface. Check the value of the IE releaseCause in the rrcConnectionRelease of the message. If the value is Directed Signaling Connection re-establishment, this feature has been activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Handover Type for PS BE Traffic to CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) MOD UNRNC: NRncId=20, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_DSCR; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: SrnsrSwitch=SRNSR_DSCR_IUR_RESRCE_SWITCH-1&SRNSR_DSCR_LOC_SEPRAT_SWITCH-1 &SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH-1&SRNSR_DSCR_SEPRAT_DUR_SWITCH-1; SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=DRNC_DIRECT_DSCR-1; //Deactivating Direct Signaling Connection Re-establishment (DSCR) MOD UNRNC: NRncId=20, PsBeProcType=CORRM_SRNSR_PSBE_RELOC;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls

41
Prerequisites

Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-140102 CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor.

l l l l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Other Prerequisites UEs of Release 8 or later support PS handovers from LTE to UMTS and CSFB from LTE to UMTS. In addition, the message sent to the MME carries an emergency call indicator. The eNodeB supports PS handovers from LTE to UMTS and CSFB from LTE to UMTS. In addition, the handover request sent to the RNC carries CSFB High Priority. The CN supports PS handovers from LTE to UMTS and CSFB from LTE to UMTS. In addition, the INITIAL CONTEXT SETUP REQUEST message sent from the MME to the eNodeB carries CS Fallback High Priority.

Context
In the CS Fall Back (CSFB) process for an LTE emergency call, a UE can initiate an emergency call on the UMTS network only after the PS service has been admitted to the UMTS network. This feature ensures the success of PS admission by decreasing the PS service rate or performing resource preemption.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 182

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

41 Configuring CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls

1.

Configure the data on the LTE side, including setting the neighbor relationships between cells. For details about how to configure this feature on the LTE side, see the related documents provided by the LTE equipment vendor. If the LTE equipment is provided by Huawei, see the LTE document CS Fallback Parameter Description. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH under HandOver Switch to enable this feature.

2.

Verification Procedure After this feature is activated, the incoming LTE-to-UMTS PS handover success rate caused by LTE emergency calls increases. Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, clear HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH under HandOver Switch to disable this feature.

----End

Example
//Activating CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch= HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating CS Fallback Guarantee for LTE Emergency Calls SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch= HO_L2U_EMGCALL_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

42 Configuring NodeB Clock

42
Prerequisites
l

Configuring NodeB Clock

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210501 NodeB Clock.

Dependencies on Hardware Ensure that a clock link is available before configuring the LINE clock source. Ensure that the GPS card is configured before configuring the GPS card clock source. Ensure that the USCU is configured before configuring the BITS clock source. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E do not support the GPS clock input. The BTS3902E cannot support GPS and BITS clock.

l l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
In normal operation, the base station needs to track an external clock to calibrate its main clock frequency. The synchronization of the base station clock provides the basis for the frame synchronization. The base station can work in multiple clock synchronization modes: l l l l l l l Synchronization with the Iub clock (default mode) Synchronization with GPS Synchronization with the BITS clock Synchronization with the IP clock Synchronization with the synchronous Ethernet clock (NodeB V200R014) Synchronization with the multi-mode sharing clock (NodeB V200R014) Synchronization with the PTP clock (NodeB V100R014)

In addition to the preceding synchronization modes, the MBTS internal clock can work in freerun mode to keep the MBTS running.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 184

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

42 Configuring NodeB Clock

Procedure
l NodeB V200R014 Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source. Table 42-1 Parameters Clock Synchronization Modes Synchronization with the Iub clock (default mode) Synchronization with GPS Synchronization with the BITS clock Synchronization with the IP clock Synchronization with the synchronous Ethernet clock Synchronization with the multi-mode sharing clock Parameter Name Parameter Value

Selected Clock Source

LINECLK(Line Clock) GPS(GPS Clock) BITS(BITS Clock) IPCLK(IP Clock) SYNCETH(SyncEth Clock) PEERCLK(Peer Clock)

Verification Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the current clock source. Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. l NodeB V100R014 Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Clock Source > System Clock Link Management; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the working mode of the reference clock source.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

42 Configuring NodeB Clock

Table 42-2 Parameters Clock Synchronization Modes Synchronization with the Iub clock (default mode) Synchronization with GPS Synchronization with the BITS clock Synchronization with the IP clock Synchronization with the PTP clock Parameter Name Parameter Value

Clock Source Type

LINE(LINE clock source) GPSCARD(GPS card clock source) BITS(BITS clock source) IPCLK(IP clock source) PTP(PTP clock source)

Verification Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP CLKSTAT to query the status of the current clock source. Expected result: The value of Current Clock Source State is Normal. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Example
l NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure //Synchronization with the Iub clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINECLK; //Synchronization with the GPS clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0; //Synchronization with the BITS clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS; //Synchronization with the IP clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK; //Synchronization with the synchronous Ethernet clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=SYNCETH; //Synchronization with the multi-mode sharing clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PEERCLK; //Verification procedure DSP CLKSTAT: SN=7;

NodeB V100R014
//Activation procedure //Synchronization with the Iub clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=LINE; //Synchronization with the GPS clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPSCARD; //Synchronization with the BITS clock

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=BITS; //Synchronization with the IP clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=IPCLK; //Synchronization with the PTP clock SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=PTP; //Verification procedure DSP CLKSTAT:;

42 Configuring NodeB Clock

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface

Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030104 Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface.

43

Configuring Dynamic AAL2

Prerequisites
l l l l Dependencies on Hardware BTS3902E does not support this feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Others The RAN is based on ATM transmission.

Context
In ATM transmission mode, the ATM Adaptation Layer type 2 (AAL2) path is used to carry the user plane data on the Iub/Iur/Iu-CS interface. The AAL2 path is provided according to service type (conversational, streaming, interactive, and background) and bearer type (R99, HSDPA, and HSUPA). Physical bandwidth resources are dynamically allocated to delay-sensitive services and delay-insensitive services, which improves the utilization of transmission links on the Iub interface.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ADJNODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node, IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node, IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an adjacent node. Set the parameter Adjacent Node Type to IUB, IUR, or IUCS, and the parameter Transport Type to ATM. If the node is the lowest leaf node of the switching network, set the parameter Is Root Node to YES; otherwise, set the parameter Is Root Node to NO.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 188

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

43 Configuring Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface

For an adjacent node on the Iur or Iu-CS interface, the parameter Adjacent Node Type of its upperlevel hub node must be NNI_AAL2SWITCH; for an adjacent node on the Iub interface, the parameter Adjacent Node Type of its upper-level hub node must be UNI_AAL2SWITCH.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path, IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path, IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an AAL2 path. The parameters CARRYVPI and CARRYVCI must be consistent with those of the AAL2 path configured on the peer end. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AAL2PATH to query the status of the AAL2 path on the Iub interface. Expected result: The value of Operation state is Available. In the Iub/Iu-CS ATM transmission scenario, a UE in idle state camps on CELL1 and the control plane is correctly configured. Originate the speech and data services. If the service access is normal, the AAL2 path on the Iub/Iu-CS interface is set up successfully. Optional: In the ATM transmission scenario on the Iur interface, a UE in idle state camps on CELL1 and the control plane is correctly configured. Originate a cross-Iur handover. If the handover is successful, the AAL2 path on the Iur interface is set up successfully.

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

3.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface //Adding an adjacent node ADD ADJNODE: ANI=2, NAME="MSC1", NODET=IUCS, TRANST=ATM, IsROOTNODE=YES, DPX=1; //Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=2, PATHID=1, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=12, VCI=126, TXTRFX=111, RXTRFX=111, AAL2PATHT=R99; //Verifying Dynamic AAL2 Connections in Iub/IuCS/Iur Interface DSP AAL2PATH: ANI=2, PATHID=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic

44
Prerequisites
l l l l

Configuring Permanent AAL5

Connections for Control Plane Traffic

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030105 Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic.

Dependencies on Hardware BTS3902E does not support this feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Others The equipment data has been configured for the ATM transmission on the Iub/Iu/Iur interface.
NOTE

For details about how to configure the equipment data, see section Configuring the Equipment Data of the BSC6900UMTS Initial Configuration Guide.

Context
In the RAN in ATM transmission mode, AAL5 connections are used to bear the Iub/Iur/Iu signaling and the Iub OAM traffic. As specified by 3GPP, User-Network Interface SAAL (UNISAAL) is used for control-plane connections on the Iub interface and Network-Network Interface SAAL (NNI-SAAL) is used for control-plane connections on the Iur/Iu interface. AAL5 connections on the Iub/Iur/Iu interface are all set up by configuring Signaling ATM adaptation layer (SAAL) links.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SAALLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link, IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link,
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 190

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

44 Configuring Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic

IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SAAL link. If the interface is Iub, set the parameter Interface type to UNI. If the interface is Iu or Iur, set Interface type to NNI. 2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > NCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a NodeB Control Port (NCP) link. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > CCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a Communication Control Port (CCP) link.
NOTE

3.

An SAAL link can carry only one NCP or CCP link. Therefore, choose to perform step 2 or step 3 based on the actual situation.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP SAALLNK to query the status of the SAAL link. Expected result: The value of SAAL link state is AVAILABLE.

Deactivation Procedure
NOTE

An SAAL link can carry only one NCP or CCP link. Therefore, choose to remove the NCP or CCP link carried by the SAAL link, based on the actual situation.

1.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UNCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > NCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the NCP link carried by the SAAL link. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCCP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > CCP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the CCP link carried by the SAAL link. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV SAALLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link, IUCS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link, IUR Configuration Express > ATM Transport > SAAL Signaling Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the SAAL link.

2.

3.

----End

Example
//Activating Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic ADD SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYSRN=0, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=2, CARRYVPI=10, CARRYVCI=55, TXTRFX=100, RXTRFX=100, SAALLNKT=UNI; ADD UCCP: NODEBNAME="NodeB1", PN=0, CARRYLNKT=SAAL, SAALLNKN=10; //Verifying Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic DSP SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10; //Deactivating Permanent AAL5 Connections for Control Plane Traffic RMV UCCP: NODEBNAME="NodeB1", PN=0; RMV SAALLNK: SRN=1, SN=2, SAALLNKN=10;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth

45
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030106 Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth.

Dependencies on Hardware BTS3902E does not support this feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
With the Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth (AAL2 CAC) feature, admission requests are accepted or rejected selectively. This feature maximizes the usage of transmission resources in addition to ensuring the QoS.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set parameters to appropriate values. For example, set Service type to NRTVBR, Peak cell rate to 100, and Sustainable cell rate to 80. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an ATM Adaptation Layer type 2 (AAL2) path. In this step, set TXTRFX and RXTRFX in accordance with the settings in step 1.

2.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 192

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

45 Configuring Call Admission Based on Used AAL2 Path Bandwidth

1.

Assume that the verification is based on the preceding parameter settings and the peer end is configured with the corresponding AAL2 path link. Originate a PS interactive service. If the data rate is 64 kbit/s, the UE successfully accesses the network. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP AAL2PATH to view that the used bandwidth of the path is about 37 kbit/s, which is the admission bandwidth of the control plane. Originate a PS interactive service. If the data rate is 128 kbit/s, the UE fails to access the network.

2. 3. l

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=100, ST=NRTVBR, UT=CELL/S, PCR=100, SCR=80; ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=0, PATHID=10, CARRYT=UNI, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=14, CARRYUNILNKN=0, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=12, VCI=126, TXTRFX=100, RXTRFX=100, AAL2PATHT=R99;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

193

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes

46

Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-05030107 CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes".

Prerequisites
l l l Dependencies on Hardware BTS3902E does not support this feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
Huawei RAN supports service type of ATM : l l l l l Constant Bit Rate (CBR) Real time Variable Bit Rate (rt-VBR) Non-real time Variable Bit Rate (nrt-VBR) Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR) Enhanced unspecified Bit Rate (UBR+)

Configuring UBR+ QoS Class feature, please refer to Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class. The traffic volume on the VCC depends on the parameters (SCR, PCR, and CDVT) associated with each type of ATM service. Generally, rt-VBR is applicable to delay-sensitive services and nrt-VBR is applicable to delay-insensitive services. In addition, UBR and nrt-VBR are applicable to None Delay Sensitive service mapping on the HSDPA/HSUPA. It is recommended for configuring service type of ATM shown as Figure 46-1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

46 Configuring CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes

Figure 46-1 Service type of ATM

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an ATM traffic record. To add more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ATMTRF to query the ATM traffic configuration. The expected result is that the query result is consistent with the configuration information. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete an ATM traffic record. To delete more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=105, ST=CBR, UT=CELL/S, PCR=1000; //Verifying CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes LST ATMTRF: TRFX=105; Deactivating CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR ATM QoS Classes RMV ATMTRF: TRFX=105;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

47 Configuring F5

47
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware

Configuring F5

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-05030110 F5. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

VCL CC is applicable to the AEUa, AOUa, AOUc, UOIa(ATM), and UOIc boards of the BSC6900. VCL PM is applicable to the AOUc and UOIc boards of the BSC6900. Only BSC6900 does not support the latency detection based on IE LB. Only 3900 series Base Station supports the passive detection based on IE LB. BTS3902E does not support this feature. l l Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature supports: l l l ATM CC provides E2E continuity detection on the VCL. PM function provides performance monitoring on the VCL. It is recommended to activate VCL CC before activating VCL PM.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT VCLCC to activate the VCL CC or loopback function for a link. To activate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

47 Configuring F5

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT VCLPM to activate the VCL PM function for a link. To activate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP VCLCC to query the CC result of a VCL. If the VCL CC is activated and the PVC is functional, the SINK activated state and SOURCE activated state are UP, and LOC, AIS, and RDI alarm state is normal. If the loopback is activated and the PVC is functional, the loopback query result is UP, and LOC, AIS, and RDI alarm state is normal.

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP VCLPM to query the PM result of a VCL. If the VCL PM is activated, the SINK activated state and SOURCE activated state are PM_UP, and PM Active Fail Alarm is Normal.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA VCLCC to deactivate the VCL CC or loopback function for a link. To deactivate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA VCLPM to deactivate the VCL PM for a link. To deactivate the function for multiple links, run this command repeatedly. There are three types of links, that is, SAALLNK, AAL2PATH, and IPOAPVC.

2.

----End

Example
//Activating F5 ACT VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, ACT VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, //Verifying F5 DSP VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, DSP VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, //Deactivating F5 DEA VCLCC: LNKT=SAALLNK, DEA VCLPM: LNKT=SAALLNK, SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0, VCLTYPE=CC; SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0; SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0; SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0; SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0; SRN=3, SN=2, SAALLNKN=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class

48
Prerequisites
l l l l

Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature "WRFD-050305 UBR+ ATM QoS Class".

Dependencies on Hardware BTS3902E does not support this feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Other Prerequisites The basic information about the BSC6900 is configured. For details, see the Configuring the Basic Data.

Context
Huawei RAN supports the UBR+ ATM service class. UBR+ is the enhanced UBR feature. It adds the Minimum Desired Cell Rate (MDCR) indication. UBR+ is particularly applicable to the OAM channels over the Iub interface. The MDCR of UBR+ ensures the reliability of the OAM connection in case of transmission channel congestion, and the BE service of the UBR+ fully utilizes transmission bandwidth.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an ATM traffic record of the UBR+ class. To add more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly. Run the MML command LST ATMTRF to query the ATM traffic configuration. Expected result: The query result is consistent with the configuration information.

Verification Procedure 1.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 198

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

48 Configuring UBR+ ATM QoS Class

1.

Run the MML command RMV ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to delete an ATM traffic record of the UBR+ class. To delete more ATM traffic records, run this command repeatedly.

----End

Example
//Adding UBR+ ATM QoS Class ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=105, ST=UBR_PLUS, UT=CELL/S, MCR=100; //Verifying UBR+ ATM QoS Class LST ATMTRF: TRFX=105; //Deactivating UBR+ ATM QoS Class RMV ATMTRF: TRFX=105;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

49 Configuring Link Aggregation

49
Prerequisites
l l l l

Configuring Link Aggregation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210103 Link Aggregation.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature applies only to 3900 series base stations excluding the BTS3902E. This feature is only supported on BSC6900. Dependencies on Other Features In the earlier versions than RAN13.0, trunk group configuration cannot support IP PM. License This feature is not under license control. Others This feature requires the support from peer transmission devices, such as switches and base stations. This feature supports IP networking, layer 2 (L2) networking, and layer 3 (L3) networking.

Context
This feature enables multiple FE or GE ports to be bound to form a logical port. This provides high bandwidth for end-to-end transmission, achieves load sharing across these FE or GE ports, and improves the transmission reliability.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure Activate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a device IP address to a board. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRK (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Ethernet link aggregation group. In
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 200

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

49 Configuring Link Aggregation

this step, set the Trunk group work mode to LOAD_SHARING(Load sharing), set the Aggregation Mode to STATIC_LACP when the peer end supports the LACP protocol or set the Aggregation Mode to MANUAL_AGGREGATION when the peer end does not support the LACP protocol, and set the Flow control switch to ON(ON). 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a specified physical port to an Ethernet link aggregation group.
NOTE

If the Ethernet link aggregation group is configured with multiple physical ports, repeat this step until all the required physical ports are configured.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ETHTRKIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Trunk IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an IP address to an Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple virtual local area network (VLAN) gateways are planned, run this command for each IP address you want to add. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to add a device IP address to an Ethernet port. In this step, set Port Type to ETHTRK(Ethernet Trunk). Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Ethernet Trunk; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Ethernet link aggregation group. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ETHTRKLNK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Ethernet Trunk > Ethernet Trunk Member; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a member port to an Ethernet link aggregation group. When multiple member ports need to be added, run this command for each port you want to add.

Activate Link Aggregation on the NodeB. 1.

2.

3.

Verification Procedure Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the BSC6900. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet link aggregation group is available.
NOTE

Expected result: If the value of Status of ETHTRK is UP in the command output, the Ethernet link aggregation group is available.

2.

Set the IP address of the peer NE to be on the same network segment as the IP address for the Ethernet link aggregation group. For example, set the IP address of the peer NE to 16.16.16.2. Run the BSC6900 MML command PING IP to check the IP communication between the local and peer ends.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

49 Configuring Link Aggregation

Expected result: If this command is executed and the command output indicates that no packet loss occurs, the Ethernet link aggregation group has been successfully configured.

Verify the effect of Link Aggregation on the NodeB. 1. 2. l Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRK to query whether an Ethernet link aggregation group is available. Run the NodeB MML commandDSP ETHTRKLNK to query whether a member port of an Ethernet link aggregation group is available.

Deactivation Procedure Deactivate Link Aggregation on the BSC6900. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRKIP (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Trunk IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an IP address from an Ethernet link aggregation group. If the removal fails, perform operations as prompted. Run the BSC6900 MML commandRMV ETHTRK (CME single configuration: Abis Configuration Express > IP Transport > Link Aggregation; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an Ethernet link aggregation group. Run the NodeB MML commandRMV DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a device IP address. Run the NodeB MML commandRMV ETHTRK (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > IP Transport Layer > IPPort > Ethernet Trunk; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove an Ethernet link aggregation group.

2.

Deactivate Link Aggregation on the NodeB. 1.

2.

----End

Example
//Activating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900 ADD DEVIP: SRN=2, SN=26, DEVTYPE=LOGIC_IP, IPADDR="10.171.35.123"; ADD ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, LACPMODE=MANUAL_AGGREGATION, FLOWCTRLSWITCH=ON; ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=26, TRKLNKPN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=101; ADD ETHTRKLNK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, TRKLNKSN=27, TRKLNKPN=2, WORKMODE=ACTIVE_STANDBY, PORTPRI=102; ADD ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0, IPADDR="126.126.126.1", MASK="255.255.255.0"; /Activating Link Aggregation on the NodeB //Adding a device IP address to an Ethernet port ADD DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0, IP="192.168.2.24", MASK="255.255.255.0"; //Adding an Ethernet link aggregation group and adding a member port to an Ethernet link aggregation group ADD ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0; ADD ETHTRKLNK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0, PN=0, PRI=255, FLAG=YES;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

49 Configuring Link Aggregation

//Deactivating Link Aggregation on the BSC6900 //Removing active/standby Ethernet link aggregation groups RMV ETHTRKIP: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2, IPINDEX=0; RMV ETHTRK: SRN=2, SN=26, TRKN=2; //Deactivating Link Aggregation on the NodeB //Removing a device IP address from an Ethernet port RMV DEVIP: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=ETHTRK, PN=0, IP="192.168.2.24"; //Removing an Ethernet link aggregation group RMV ETHTRK: CN=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SBT=ETH_COVERBOARD, TN=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

50 Configuring Flow Control

50
Prerequisites
l l l License

Configuring Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040100 Flow Control.

Dependencies on Hardware NodeB RRC link priority based flow control is depended on WMPT and WBBP boards. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. This feature is not under license control.

Context
Flow control is implemented by regulating the input transmission rate. This mechanism is called feedback flow control mechanism. The flow control measures are as follows: l l l l l l Board flow control Control-plane load sharing User-plane load sharing Flow control based on RRC request queuing Flow control based on MPU load Flow control based on traffic growth

Procedure
l Activation Procedure Activating board flow control 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCSW (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Flow Control Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to switch on the flow control and related flow control items.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 204

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

50 Configuring Flow Control

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCCPUTHD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Flow Control Threshold of CPU Usage; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure the CPU usage threshold for each flow control item according to the network plan.
NOTE

l Flow control is triggered when the CPU usage exceeds the related threshold. l The CPU usage thresholds must meet the following condition: 100 Critical threshold Threshold for a flow control item Restore threshold for a flow control item l The critical threshold is of the highest priority. That is, other thresholds take effect only when the CPU usage is lower than the critical threshold. l The flow control based on the packet usage and that based on the CPU usage are independent. The system limits the flow to the lower one allowed by these two flow control algorithms.

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCMSGQTHD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Flow Control Threshold of Message Queue Usage; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure the packet usage threshold for each flow control item according to the network plan.
NOTE

l Flow control is triggered when the packet usage exceeds the related threshold. l The packet usage thresholds must meet the following condition: 100 Critical threshold Threshold for a flow control item Restore threshold for a flow control item l The critical threshold is of the highest priority. That is, other thresholds take effect only when the packet usage is lower than the critical threshold. l The flow control based on the packet usage and that based on the CPU usage are independent. The system limits the flow to the lower one allowed by these two flow control algorithms.

Activating control-plane load sharing 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Process switch to RNC_SHARE_SWITCH to switch on load sharing. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCTRLPLNSHAREPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Control Plane RRC Sharing Parameter; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Control Plane Sharing Out Threshold to 40 so that the control-plane load sharing function can be triggered easily. The default value of Control Plane Sharing Out Threshold is 50.
NOTE

2.

l If the CPU usage is higher than this threshold and lower than the overload threshold, new calls will be assigned to other SPUs. Overload threshold is set by the MML command SET SHARETHD (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Load Sharing Threshold of SPU Board; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). l Max capability middle load> Max capability normal load> Sharing out capability middle load.

Activating user-plane load sharing


Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 205

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

50 Configuring Flow Control

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UUSERPLNSHAREPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Signaling Configuration > Typical SRB HSUPA Power Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Percentage of User Plane Sharing Out threshold according to the network plan. Inter-subrack user-plane load sharing is triggered when the user plane load on one subrack exceeds this threshold. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select RSVDBIT14 in Reserved parameter 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select RSVDBIT1_BIT19 in Reserved parameter 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Traffic Volume Control Parameter Configuration > Call Shock Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CELL_LEVEL in Call Shock Control Switch to switch on the celllevel flow control based on traffic growth.

Activating flow control based on RRC request queuing 1.

Activating flow control based on MPU load 1.

Activating flow control based on traffic growth 1.

Verification Procedure Verifying board flow control 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCSW to query the state of the flow control switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCCPUTHD to query the CPU usage threshold for flow control. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST FCMSGQTHD to query the packet usage threshold for flow control. On the LMT, choose Monitor > Common Monitoring > CPU/DSP Usage Monitoring to observe the CPU usage of each subsystem. If the CPU usage of each subsystem is almost the same, load sharing takes effect. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCACALGOSWITCH to query the state of the switch for flow control based on RRC request queuing. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST URRCTRLSWITCH to query the state of the switch for flow control based on MPU load.

Verifying control-plane and user-plane load sharing 1.

Verifying flow control based on RRC request queuing 1.

Verifying flow control based on MPU load 1.

Verifying flow control based on traffic growth


Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 206

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

50 Configuring Flow Control

1. l

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCALLSHOCKCTRL to query the state of the switch for flow control based on traffic growth.

Deactivation Procedure Deactivating board flow control 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET FCSW (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Flow Control Management > Flow Control Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to switch off flow control. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deselect RNC_SHARE_SWITCH in Process switch. User-plane load sharing does not need to be deactivated. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect RSVDBIT14 in Reserved parameter 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect RSVDBIT1_BIT19 in Reserved parameter 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Traffic Volume Control Parameter Configuration > Call Shock Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect CELL_LEVEL in Call Shock Control Switch.

Deactivating control-plane load sharing 1.

Deactivating user-plane load sharing 1. 1. Deactivating flow control based on RRC request queuing

Deactivating flow control based on MPU load 1.

Deactivating flow control based on traffic growth 1.

----End

Example
//Activating board flow control //Switching on XPU load control SET FCSW: BRDCLASS=XPU, FCSW=ON, PRINTSW=ON, TRACESW=ON, PMSW=ON, LOGSW=ON; //Setting CPU usage threshold for DPU flow control SET FCCPUTHD:BRDCLASS=DPU, SMWINDOW=6, FDWINDOW=2, CTHD=95, PRINTCTHD=60, PRINTRTHD=50, TRACECTHD=60, TRACERTHD=50, LOGCTHD=60, LOGRTHD=50; //Setting packet usage threshold for DPU flow control SET FCMSGQTHD: BRDCLASS=DPU, SMWINDOW=9, CTHD=95, PRINTCTHD=60, PRINTRTHD=50, TRACECTHD=60, TRACERTHD=50, LOGCTHD=60, LOGRTHD=50;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

50 Configuring Flow Control

//Activating control-plane load sharing SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=RNC_SHARE_SWITCH-1; SET UCTRLPLNSHAREPARA: CtrlPlnSharingOutThd=40; SET SHARETHD: BT=XPU, SMRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, SMRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, CRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, CRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, LRRCCONNCCPUTHD=80, LRRCCONNRCPUTHD=70, SMRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, SMRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70, CRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, CRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70, LRRCCONNCMSGTHD=80, LRRCCONNRMSGTHD=70; //Activating user-plane load sharing SET UUSERPLNSHAREPARA: UserPlnSharingOutThd=90; //Activating RRC Shaping and Queuing SET UCACALGOSWITCH:RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT14-1; //Activating flow control based on MPU load SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT19-1; //Activating flow control based on traffic growth SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL: CallShockCtrlSwitch=CELL_LEVEL-1; //Verifying board flow control LST FCSW: LstFormat=VERTICAL; LST FCCPUTHD: LstFormat=VERTICAL; LST FCMSGQTHD: LstFormat=VERTICAL; //Verifying flow control based on RRC request queuing LST UCACALGOSWITCH: LstFormat=VERTICAL; //Verifying flow control based on MPU load LST URRCTRLSWITCH: LstFormat=VERTICAL; //Verifying flow control based on traffic growth LST UCALLSHOCKCTRL: LSTFORMAT=VERTICAL; //Deactivating board flow control SET FCSW: BRDCLASS=XPU, FCSW=OFF; //Deactivating control-plane load sharing SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=RNC_SHARE_SWITCH-0; //Deactivating flow control based on RRC request queuing SET UCACALGOSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT14-0; //Deactivating flow control based on MPU load SET URRCTRLSWITCH: RsvdPara1=RSVDBIT1_BIT19-0; //Deactivating flow control based on traffic growth SET UCALLSHOCKCTRL: CallShockCtrlSwitch=CELL_LEVEL-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

51 Configuring BOOTP

51
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware l l Dependencies on Other Features

Configuring BOOTP

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031100 BOOTP. In ATM transport mode, the NodeB can automatically set up the OM channel with the BSC6900 by using the BOOTSTRAP Protocol (BOOTP) function.

The transmission equipment is in the connected state. BOOTP applies only to ATM networking scenarios. This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables NodeB to set up the OM channel to the RNC automatically without configuration data. The maintenance staff can download the data and software to the NodeB through the OM channel at the far end. The feature decreases the operation and maintenance costs and enhances the network maintainability and maintenance quality. NodeB will automatically set up the OM channel using the BOOTP protocol. In addition, NodeB monitors the OM channel. When the OM channel is broken, NodeB can rebuild it.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the logical IP address for the interface board of the BSC6900. This IP address serves as the local address of the IPoA at the BSC6900. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPOAPVC (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > ATM Transport > IPoA PVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the IPoA PVC for bearing the OM channel. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > NodeB IP
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 209

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

51 Configuring BOOTP

Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the IP address for the OM channel of the NodeB. l Verification Procedure If the BOOTP configurations at the BSC6900 are completed but no configuration at the NodeB and the NodeB can be maintained on the M2000, it indicates that the NodeB has successfully set up the OM channel by using the BOOTP feature. l Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure ADD DEVIP: SRN=0, SN=14, DEVTYPE=IPOA_CLIENT_IP, IPADDR="131.131.131.132", MASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD IPOAPVC: IPADDR="131.131.131.132", PEERIPADDR="131.131.131.131", CARRYT=IMA, CARRYIMAGRPN=0, CARRYVPI=83, CARRYVCI=80, TXTRFX=100; ADD UNODEBIP: NODEBID=0, NBTRANTP=ATMTRANS_IP, NBATMOAMIP="131.131.131.131", NBATMOAMMASK="255.255.255.0", ATMSRN=0, ATMSN=14;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

52
Prerequisites
l

Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031101 NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode.

Dependencies on Hardware The transmission equipment is in the connected state. DHCP applies only to IP networks. Only 3900 series base stations support DHCP+AACP.

l l l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Others If NodeB self-discovery uses the DHCP+AACP scheme VLANs are used to separate NodeBs to be deployed from other network devices not required. VLAN detection and IP path detection must be disabled on the M2000 to prevent interference during AACP detection. the deployment list of NodeBs to be commissioned must be ready. For details, see the NodeB Commissioning Guide. A bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) session failure results in a NodeB automatic deployment failure. Therefore, the BFD function must be disabled on the gateway side if it is enabled on the NodeB side. The IP path ping function must be disabled on the RNC side during NodeB automatic deployment. Otherwise, when the ping message sent by the RNC reaches the gateway, the gateway sends an ARP request to the NodeB, disturbing the AACP detection process and resulting in a NodeB automatic deployment failure. AACP and DHCP messages can be processed through port 67 or 68. Ports 67 and 68 must be enabled for the firewall in the radio network.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

M2000 should support NodeB Auto Deployment function.

Context
l l If the configuration file is incorrect, DHCP enables NodeBs to establish OM channels for NodeB remote maintenance. The configuration is not required on the NodeB. If the hub NodeB is used, the configuration on the hub NodeB is required. The configuration is required on the DHCP server, for example, BSC6900 and M2000. Following takes BSC6900 for example. Data Preparation PPP/MLPPP networking Parameter Name NodeB ID NodeB DHCP Server IP Address Recommended Parameter Settings It is set to the IP address of the M2000 server by default. If there are several DHCP servers, the IP addresses need to be added manually. It is set to the IP address of the M2000 server. Source Network plan

NodeB AACP Server IP Address

Ethernet networking Parameter Name NodeB ID NodeB DHCP Server IP Address Recommended Parameter Settings It is set to the IP address of the M2000 server by default. If there are several DHCP servers, the IP addresses need to be added manually. It is set to the gateway IP address of the M2000 server by default. If there are several DHCP servers, the IP addresses need to be added manually. It is set to the IP address of the M2000 server. It is set to the gateway IP address of the M2000 server.
212

Source Network plan

NodeB Next Hop IP Address to DHCP Server

NodeB AACP Server IP Address NodeB Next Hop IP Address to AACP Server

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

Parameter Name Interface subnet mask of the NodeB

Recommended Parameter Settings Interface subnet mask of the NodeB

Source

Procedure
l Activation Procedure (NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP) 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBESN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > NodeB Electronic Serial Number; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the NodeB ESN in response to the DHCP request reported by the NodeB. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UNODEBIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > NodeB IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the IP address for the OM channel of the NodeB. When the BSC6900 makes a response to the DHCP request, it sends the IP address to the NodeB. Optional: If the Hub NodeB is used and the DHCP function is used for NodeB selfdiscovery, the following configurations are required. a. Run the NodeB MML command SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Transport Management > DHCP Relay Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable DHCP relaying of the NodeB. Run the NodeB MML command ADD DHCPSVRIP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Transport Management > DHCP Server IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the IP address of the DHCP server so that lower-level NodeBs can automatically obtain the IP address of the DHCP server through DHCP.

2.

3.

b.

Activation Procedure (NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP+AACP) 1. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command SET NODEBRSVP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > NodeB Reserved Para; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, select RSVDBIT29(Reserved Switch 29) under Reserved Parameter 1. On the M2000 client, Choose Configuration > Auto Deployment > NodeB Auto Deployment. Right-click the import the deployment list, and choose Task Setting from the shortcut menu. The Task Settings dialog box is displayed. Select Use AACP during Auto Discovery to use AACP for NodeB automatic deployment, Click OK to start NodeB automatic deployment.

2.

3. l

Verification Procedure Check the status of NodeB automatic deployment in either of the following ways: On the deployment list of the M2000 1. 2. Click Show Executing Information on the Deployment List tab page. View the information displayed in the Description column. If Execution Succeed is displayed, AACP-based NodeB automatic deployment is successful.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 213

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

52 Configuring NodeB Self-Discovery Based on IP Mode

If AACP detection timed out is displayed, AACP-based NodeB automatic deployment fails. On the topology view of the M2000 Choose Topology > Main Topology to view the Main Topology tab page. If is displayed beside a NodeB on the Main Topology tab page, the NodeB failed to be deployed. l Deactivation Procedure 1. If the DHCP+AACP function is used for NodeB self-discovery, Run the NodeB MML command SET NODEBRSVP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > NodeB Reserved Para; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, clear RSVDBIT29(Reserved Switch 29) under Reserved Parameter 1.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure //NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP //Operations on the BSC6900 side ADD UNODEBESN: NODEBID=0, NBLB1="020GKV1082000126", USENBLB2=Disable, NODEBPT=ETH/TRUNK, PTIP="131.131.131.132", PTIPMASK="255.255.255.0"; ADD UNODEBIP: NODEBID=0, NBTRANTP=IPTRANS_IP, NBIPOAMIP="131.131.131.131", NBIPOAMMASK="255.255.255.0", IPSRN=0, IPSN=18, IPLOGPORTFLAG=NO; //(Optional) Operations on the NodeB side //Enabling DHCP relaying of the NodeB SET DHCPRELAYSWITCH: ES=ENABLE; //Adding the IP address of the DHCP server ADD DHCPSVRIP: DHCPSVRIP="13.13.13.13"; //NodeB Self-Discovery Based on DHCP+AACP SET NODEBRSVP: REVDPARA1=RSVDBIT29-1; //Deactivation procedure SET NODEBRSVP: REVDPARA1=RSVDBIT29-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

53 Configuring License Control for Urgency

53

Configuring License Control for Urgency


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-040300 License Control for Urgency. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Prerequisites
l l l Dependencies on Hardware Only BSC6900 supports this feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context

CAUTION
This feature is enabled only in scenarios where the traffic volume increases abruptly, for example, in a disaster. It can be enabled only three times for each R version by BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL and it can be enabled only fifteen times by WRFD-040202 RNC Node Redundancy and it is valid only for seven days each time. After this function is enabled, a network can reach its maximum capacity that is supported by the hardware. This documentation describes the procedure of enabling the feature by BSC6900 MML command .

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. On the BSC6900 side: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to ON(ON). On the NodeB V200R014 side: Run the NodeB MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch State to ON.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 215

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

53 Configuring License Control for Urgency

3. l

On the NodeB V100R014 side: Run the NodeB MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to ON(ON). On the BSC6900 Side a. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP LICUSAGE to view resource items of the license. Expected result: All the resource items reach their maximum values. b. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting of Grace Protection Period Switch State. Expected result: Values of Remaining Grace Protection Times and Remaining Grace Protection Days are displayed and the value of Grace Protection Period Switch State is ON.

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

On the NodeB V200R014 side or NodeB V100R014 side a. Run the NodeB MML command DSP LICENSE to view resource items of the license. Expected result: All the resource items reach their maximum values. b. Run the NodeB MML command LST LICENSECTRL to query the setting of Grace Protection Period Switch State. Expected result: Values of Remaining Grace Protection Times and Remaining Grace Protection Days are displayed and the value of Grace Protection Period Switch State is ON.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2. 3. On the BSC6900 Side: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF). On the NodeB V200R014 Side: Run the NodeB MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch State to OFF. On the NodeB V100R014 Side: Run the NodeB MML command SET LICENSECTRL. In this step, set Grace Protection Period Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service

54

Configuring Intelligently Out of Service


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031000 Intelligently Out of Service.

Prerequisites
l l l Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
Insufficient battery voltage or NodeB reset may lead to service disruption. When the preceding problems occur, this feature enables the NodeB to automatically reduce the pilot transmit power and hand over the UE to other cells, preventing service disruption.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET SMTHPWRSWTCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Basic Information > Smooth Power Change Function Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Smooth Power Change Function Switch to OPEN(Open). Run the NodeB MML command SET SMTHPWRPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Basic Information > Smooth Power Change Function Switch; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Smart default step (0.5dB) and Smart default time ratio(100ms). Run the NodeB MML command LST SMTHPWRSWTCH. In this step, check whether Smooth Power Change Function Switch is set to OPEN.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 217

2.

Verification Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

54 Configuring Intelligently Out of Service

2. l

Run the NodeB MML command LST SMTHPWRPARA. In this step, check whether Smart default step(0.5dB) and Smart default time ratio(100ms) are set correctly.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET SMTHPWRSWTCH: SWITCH=OPEN; SET SMTHPWRPARA: STEP=10, PERIOD=1; //Verification procedure LST SMTHPWRSWTCH:; LST SMTHPWRPARA:;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

55 Configuring OCNS

55
Prerequisites
l l l Dependencies on Hardware Dependencies on Other Features

Configuring OCNS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031200 OCNS (Orthogonal Channel Noise Simulator). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

This feature does not depend on the hardware. This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
With the OCNS feature, multiple downlink analog channels are set up on the Uu interface to simulate the interference of multiple codes. In this way, the simulated downlink load test of a cell can be performed.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command STR DLSIM to start downlink load simulation. In this step, set Local Cell ID and Load Ratio (%).
NOTE

l This command can be successfully executed only when the corresponding logical cell exists. l The downlink network load simulation uses the channelization codes from 112 to 127 whose SF = 128. l If you start the downlink network load simulation, it is advised to reserve the channelization codes in the RNC. l After starting the DL load simulation, new service can not be built in the channel resource occupied by the simulation.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 219

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

55 Configuring OCNS

1.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP DLSIM to query the downlink load simulation result. In this step, specify Local Cell ID. The execution result displayed on the LMT shows the simulated load rate. Run the NodeB MML command STP DLSIM to stop the downlink load simulation. In this step, specify Local Cell ID.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure STR DLSIM: LOCELL=1, LR=80; //Verification procedure DSP DLSIM: LOCELL=1; //Deactivation procedure STP DLSIM: LOCELL=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level

56
Prerequisites

Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031400 Power Off the Equipment Level by Level.

Dependencies on Hardware Cabinets providing AC input power such as APM30, APM100, and APM200. These cabinets can be used for outdoor NodeBs.

l l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
After the mains supply is cut off, the NodeB powers off devices by level when certain DC voltage thresholds are reached. Intelligent shutdown of RF units and NodeBs can prolong the working time of the system by making efficient use of the available storage batteries.

Procedure
l NodeB V200R014 Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > PMU Porperty > Power Monitoring Unit; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Load Shutdown Flag to ENABLE(Enable) and set Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed. Run the NodeB MML command MOD BATTERY (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > Battery Property > Battery; CME batch modification center: not
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 221

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level

supported). In this step, set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to ENABLE and set Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed. Verification Procedure 1. 2. Run the NodeB MML command LST PMU and query the values of Load Shutdown Flag and Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V). Run the NodeB MML command LST BATTERY and query the values of Low Voltage Shutdown Flag and Shutdown Voltage(0.1V).

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD BATTERY (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > Battery Property > Battery; CME batch modification center: not supported) and set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable). Run the NodeB MML command MOD PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > PMU Porperty > Power Monitoring Unit; CME batch modification center: not supported) and set Load Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable).

2.

NodeB V100R014 Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET SDPA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > PMU Board > PMU Property > PMU Shutdown Parameter; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Load Shutdown Flag to ENABLE(Enable), set Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed, set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to ENABLE (Enable), set Shutdown Voltage(0.1V) if needed.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command LST SDPA, query the values of Load Shutdown Flag and Load Shutdown Voltage(0.1V),, query the values of Low Voltage Shutdown Flag and Shutdown Voltage(0.1V),.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET SDPA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > PMU Board > PMU Property > PMU Shutdown Parameter; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Load Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable), and set Low Voltage Shutdown Flag to DISABLE(Disable).

----End

Example
l NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure MOD PMU: CN=1, PTYPE=APM30, LSDF=ENABLE, LSDV=430; MOD BATTERY: CN=1, LVSDF=ENABLE, SDV=360; //Verification procedure LST PMU: CN=1; LST BATTERY: CN=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

56 Configuring Power Off the Equipment Level by Level


//Deactivation procedure MOD BATTERY: CN=1, LVSDF=DISABLE; MOD PMU: CN=1, PTYPE=APM30, LSDF=DISABLE;

NodeB V100R014
//Activation procedure SET SDPA: CN=1, LSDF=ENABLE, LSDV=440, LVSDF=ENABLE, SDV=360, CSLSDF=DISABLE; //Verification procedure LST SDPA: CN=1; //Deactivation procedure SET SDPA: CN=1, LSDF=DISABLE, LVSDF=DISABLE, CSLSDF=DISABLE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management

57
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Solar Power Device Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-031500 Solar Power Device Management.

Dependencies on Hardware Only 3900 series base stations support the feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
As green energy, solar power is being gradually introduced for supplying power for the NodeB. This feature enables the NodeB to communicate with a solar controller through the 485 serial port, therefore managing a solar power device, which makes the NodeB an eco-friendly base station.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command ADD PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Add PMU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a PMU. In this step, set Power System Type to SC48200. Optional: If a diesel generator is required, run the NodeB MML command ADD DIESELGEN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > PMU Property > Diesel Generator; CME batch modification center: not supported). Set Intelligent Control Flag to ENABLE(Enable).

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

57 Configuring Solar Power Device Management

Set Rated Power(0.1kVA) based on the rated power specified on the nameplate of the diesel generator. l Verification Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP PMU to query the configuration information about the PMU. Expected result: The value of Power System Type is SC48200. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command LST DIESELGEN to query the configuration information about the diesel generator. Expected result: The value of Intelligent Control Flag is ENABLE. Run the NodeB MML command RMV DIESELGEN (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > PMU Property > Diesel Generator; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a dieselgen. Run the NodeB MML command RMV PMU (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Device Panel > Right click PMU board > Dlete PMU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove a PMU.

2.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

2.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure ADD PMU: CN=0, PTYPE=SC48200, MPN=0, LSDF=ENABLE; ADD DIESELGEN: CN=0, ICF=ENABLE, POWER=500; //Verification procedure DSP PMU: CN=0; LST DIESELGEN: CN=0; //Deactivation procedure RMV DIESELGEN: CN=0; RMV PMU: CN=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)

58
Prerequisites
l

Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210601 Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Dependencies on Hardware The base station is connected to the Antenna Line Device (ALD) normally. The BTS3902E cannot support this feature.

l l l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control. Others The TMA is loaded with basic software for its normal operation.

Context
The gain range supported by the Smart Tower-Mounted Amplifier (STMA) varies with models and vendors.

Procedure
l NodeB V200R014 Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the NodeB MML command MOD ANTENNAPORT to set ALD Power Switch to ON. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan the Device Name, Vendor Code and Serial No.. Run the NodeB MML command ADD TMA to add a TMA. Optional: If the device supports TMA gain, run the NodeB MML command MOD TMASUBUNIT to set the TMA gain.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 226

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)

It is recommended that you query the gain range supported by the STMA using the NodeB MML command DSP TMADEVICEDATA before adjusting the gain.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD RXBRANCH to modify the RX channel of an RRU.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP TMA to query the dynamic information about a TMA.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. l NodeB V100R014 Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW to set Power Supply Switch to ON(On). Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan Device Name, Vendor Code and Serial No.. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to add a TMA. Optional: If the device supports TMA gain, run the NodeB MML command SET TMAGAIN to set the TMA gain.
NOTE

It is recommended that you query the gain range supported by the STMA using the NodeB MML command DSP TMAFUN before adjusting the gain.

5.

Run the NodeB MML command SET RXATTEN to set the attenuation of the RX channel.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. Run the NodeB MML command LST TMAGAIN to query the TMA gain. Run the NodeB MML command LST RXATTEN to query the RX attenuation value.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Example
l NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure MOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON; SCN ALD: CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0; ADD TMA: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="TMA1", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0, SUBUNITNUM=1; MOD TMASUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, CONNPN=R0A, MODE=NORMAL, GAIN=48; MOD RXBRANCH: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RXNO=0, ATTEN=0; //Verification procedure DSP TMA: DEVICENO=0;

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

NodeB V100R014
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 227

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

58 Configuring Connection with TMA (Tower Mounted Amplifier)


//Activation procedure SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=TMA12DB_ONLY_NON_AISG, PSP=R0A, PWRSW=ON; SCN ALD: CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A; ADD ALD: NAME="test", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=STMA, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, SUBUNIT=1; SET TMAGAIN: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, GAIN=48; SET RXATTEN: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, RXNO=0, ATTEN=0; //Verification procedure LST TMAGAIN: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

59
Prerequisites
l

Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature MRFD-210602 Remote Electrical Tilt. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Dependencies on Hardware The base station is connected to a remote electrical tilt (RET) antenna properly. The remote control unit (RCU) is compatible with the RET antenna. The RCU is loaded with a configuration file designated for the RET antenna. The RCU is loaded with the basic software. This feature is supported by the all types of BTSs except for the BTS3600C and BTS3002E. The BTS3902E cannot support this feature.

l l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
With this feature activated, users can remotely adjust the tilt of an RET antenna to optimize network performance. l l Calibrating the RET antenna may affect its coverage for a short period of time. Calibrating an RET antenna takes up to 4 minutes.

Procedure
l NodeB V200R014 Activation Procedure 1. Optional: If the antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command MOD ANTENNAPORT. In this step, set ALD Power Switch to ON.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 229

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

2. 3. 4.

Optional: If the RET antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command MOD RETPORT. In this step, set ALD Power Switch to ON. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to obtain the ESN of an ALD. Run the NodeB MML command ADD RET to add an RET antenna.
NOTE

For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

5. 6. 7. 8.

Run the NodeB MML command CLB RET to calibrate the RET antenna. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETSUBUNIT to modify parameters concerning an RET antenna subunit. Optional: Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETDEVICEDATA to modify parameters concerning the attributes of an RET device. Run the NodeB MML command MOD RETTILT to modify the tilt of the RET antenna.

Verification Procedure 1. Optional: If the antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTENNAPORT to query the power switch status for the port. Expected result: ALD Actual Power Switch is ON. 2. Optional: If the RET antenna port is used, run the NodeB MML command DSP RETPORT to query the power switch status for the port. Expected result:ALD Actual Power Switch is ON. 3. 4. Run the NodeB MML command DSP RET to query information about the RET antenna. Run the NodeB MML command DSP RETSUBUNIT to query the dynamic information on an RET antenna subunit and an RET antenna's tilt.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. l NodeB V100R014 Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW. In this step, set Power Supply Switch to ON. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to obtain the ESN of an ALD. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to add an antenna device.
NOTE

For vendor information, see the antenna equipment manual or scan the RET antenna.

4. 5.

Run the NodeB MML command CLB ANT to calibrate the antenna device. Run the NodeB MML command SET ANTTILT to set the tilt of antenna device.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTCON to query the power switch status for the antenna port. Expected result: Power Supply Switch Run Status is ON. 2.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the NodeB MML command DSP ANTTILT to query the tilt of the RET antenna.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 230

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

59 Configuring Remote Electrical Tilt

Expected result: Current Tilt (0.1 degree) is set to the specified value. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Example
l NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure MOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON; SCN ALD:; ADD RET: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="RET1", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0, RETTYPE=SINGLE_RET, POLARTYPE=SINGLE, SCENARIO=REGULAR; CLB RET: OPMODE=SUBUNIT, DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1; MOD RETSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1; MOD RETDEVICEDATA: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1; MOD RETTILT: RETCLASS=RET, OPMODE=DEVICENO, DEVICENO=0, TILT=45; //Verification procedure DSP ANTENNAPORT:; DSP RET: DEVICENO=0; DSP RETSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1;

NodeB V100R014
//Activation procedure SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=RET_ONLY_COAXIAL, PSP=R0A, PWRSW=ON; SCN ALD:; ADD ALD: NAME="test", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A; CLB ANT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET; SET ANTTILT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A, DEVTP=SINGLE_RET, TILT=20; //Verification procedure DSP ANTCON:; DSP ANTTILT: OPMODE=CSAT, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

60
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-060003 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Dependencies on Hardware BTS3902E does not support this feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License This feature is not under license control.

Context
l l The introduction of the feature enables UMTS900 and GSM900 to share the same antenna. This feature helps to share an antenna in the same band and decreases the uplink division loss. After SASU900 is applied, there is no uplink division loss, and the gain is expected to be between 0 dB and 12 dB.

Procedure
l NodeB V200R014 Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Run the NodeB MML command MOD ANTENNAPORT to set ALD Power Switch to ON. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan antenna devices and obtain the serial number of the SASU. Run the NodeB MML command ADD SASU to configure the SASU and set the antenna DC power switch state of the SASU. Run the NodeB MML command MOD SASUSUBUNIT to set the SASU working mode and the gain of the SASU.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 232

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)

Verification Procedure 1. 2. l Run the NodeB MML command DSP SASU to query the antenna DC power switch state of the SASU. Run the NodeB MML command DSP SASUSUBUNIT to query the SASU working mode and the gain of the SASU.

NodeB V100R014 Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Run the NodeB MML command SET ALDPWRSW to turn on the power supply switch of the SASU (Same band Antenna Sharing Unit) port. Run the NodeB MML command SCN ALD to scan antenna devices and obtain the serial number of the SASU. Run the NodeB MML command ADD ALD to configure the SASU. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUMODE to set the SASU working mode. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUGAIN to set the gain of the SASU. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUDCSW to set the antenna DC power switch state of the SASU. Run the NodeB MML command SET SASUDCLD to set the DC load of the SASU.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Run the NodeB MML command LST ALD to query the configuration information about the SASU. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUMODE to query the SASU working mode. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUGAIN to query the gain of the SASU. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUDCSW to query the antenna DC power switch state of the SASU. Run the NodeB MML command LST SASUDCLD to query the DC load of the SASU.

Deactivation Procedure This feature need not be deactivated. ----End

Example
l NodeB V200R014
//Activation procedure MOD ANTENNAPORT: CN=0, SRN=60, SN=0, PN=R0A, PWRSWITCH=ON, THRESHOLDTYPE=UER_SELF_DEFINE, UOTHD=1000, UCTHD=1050, OOTHD=1200, OCTHD=1150; SCN ALD: CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0; ADD SASU: DEVICENO=0, DEVICENAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CTRLCN=0, CTRLSRN=60, CTRLSN=0, DCSWITCH=UMTS; MOD SASUSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0, SUBUNITNO=1, MODE=NORMAL, BSGAIN=12, UMTSGAIN=12, DCLOAD=20; //Verification procedure DSP SASU: DEVICENO=0; DSP SASUSUBUNIT: DEVICENO=0;

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

NodeB V100R014
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 233

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

60 Configuring Same Band Antenna Sharing Unit (900 MHz)


//Activation procedure SET ALDPWRSW: CN=0, SRN=60, CASE=REGULAR, AST=CUSTOM, PSP=R0A, PWRSW=ON, UOTHD=1000, UCTHD=1050, OOTHD=1200, OCTHD=1150; SCN ALD: CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A; ADD ALD: NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CASE=REGULAR, DEVTP=SASU, CN=0, SRN=60, ACN=R0A; SET SASUMODE: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", MODE=BYPASS; SET SASUGAIN: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", CHTP=UMTS, GAIN=12; SET SASUDCSW: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", DCSWITCH=UMTS; SET SASUDCLD: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G", DCLOAD=20; //Verification procedure LST ALD:; LST SASUMODE: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G"; LST SASUGAIN: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G"; LST SASUDCSW: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G"; LST SASUDCLD: OPMODE=NAME, NAME="0_0N0A0SASU_3G";

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

61
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010617 VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature depends on the UE capability and the IP multimedia subsystem (IMS). Dependencies on Other Features In the case of VoIP over HSPA, the following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA and WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA. In the case of VoIP over HSPA+, the WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX feature has been configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The UE should support VoIP. CN should support IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).

Context
VoIP services can be carried on the DCH or HSPA. When VoIP services are carried on the DCH, a large quantity of resources are consumed. When VoIP services are carried on the HSPA, the system capacity significantly increases. When the Robust Header Compression (RoHC) technique is used, the data transmission efficiency of VoIP services is greatly improved.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

l Data configurations on the BSC6900 and NodeB are required to activate the VoIP over HSPA/HSPA + feature. l To increase the transmission efficiency of VoIP services, it is recommended that the WRFD-011501 PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) feature be activated. l In the case of HSUPA, it is recommended that the non-scheduling transmission mode be used. In the case of HSDPA, it is recommended that the Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF) algorithm be activated. The purpose is to reduce the delay of VoIP services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set VOIP channel type to HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH) and IMS channel type to HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH). Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable the RoHC algorithm. In this step, select the CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel Configuration Strategy Switch. Optional: If VoIP services need to use the WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI feature, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch. Go to Step 4. Optional: a. If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:b (WBBPb) and Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) boards, it is recommended that 10 ms HSUPA TTI be set for VoIP services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service. If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d (WBBPd) and Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) boards, either 10 ms or 2 ms HSUPA TTI can be set for VoIP services. a. To set 10 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches)
236

2.

3.

4.

b.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

to select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service. b. To set 2 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, do as follows: 1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the EDCH_TTI_2ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select the DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

2)

5.

Optional: To use the WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2ms/10ms TTI HO feature, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. To configure the EPF scheduling strategy, run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Scheduling Method to EPF (Enhanced PF). In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown in Figure 61-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages.

6.

Verification Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

Figure 61-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Analyze the traced messages. If data shown in Figure 61-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in the CELL_DCH state. If data shown in Figure 61-3 is traced on the Uu interface, VoIP services are carried on HSPA/HSPA+. Figure 61-2 UE in CELL_DCH state

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

Figure 61-3 VoIP services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3.

If VoIP services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP or RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, as shown in Figure 61-4. Figure 61-4 Type of TTI carried in the message

Deactivation Procedure
NOTE

The services admitted before deactivation of this feature are not affected. The services admitted after the deactivation will not use this feature.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter VOIP channel type, and select the DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter IMS channel type.

----End

Example
//Activating VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+ //Operations on the BSC6900 side //Configuring VoIP/IMS to be carried on the E-DCH in the uplink and HSDSCH in the downlink SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: VoipChlType=HSPA, ImsChlType=HSPA;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

61 Configuring VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+

//Enabling the RoHC algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-1; //Enabling the HSUPA 2 ms scheduling algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1; //Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 10 ms TTI SET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_10ms; //Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 2 ms TTI SET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_2ms; //Turning off the switch of saving CE resources SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH-1; //Enabling dynamic adjustment of TTI reconfiguration for CS voice services SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-1; //Setting the EPF scheduling strategy on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF; /*Deactivating VoIP over HSPA/HSPA+*/ //Operations on the BSC6900 side SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: VoipChlType=DCH, ImsChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA

62
Prerequisites

Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061703 Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA.

l l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package have been configured before this feature is activated for VoIP over HSPA. WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package and WRFD-010686 CPC- DTX/DRX have been configured before this feature is activated for VoIP over HSPA+. Other Prerequisites The UE should support VoIP. CN should support IP multimedia subsystem (IMS).

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
RAN10.0 supports VoIP over HSPA. To ensure the QoS of VoIP carried over HSPA, the nonscheduling method is used for the HSUPA scheduling, and the delay-sensitive (DS) scheduling algorithm is used for optimized HSDPA scheduling.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 241

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

62 Configuring Optimized Scheduling for VoIP over HSPA

Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Scheduling Method to EPF(Enhanced PF). l Verification Procedure 1. l Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to query the configuration result. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Scheduling Method to MAXCI(Max C/I), RR(Round Robin), or PF(PF).

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=EPF; //Verification procedure LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0; //Deactivation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=PF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA

63
Prerequisites

Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-010618 IMS Signaling over HSPA.

l l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites CN should support the signaling indication at Iu interface.

Context
IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) signaling over HSPA can shorten the setup delay of IMS services like VoIP to save network resources for the operator.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set IMS channel type to HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH). In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 243

Verification Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA

Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown in Figure 63-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages. Figure 63-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Analyze the traced messages. If data shown in Figure 63-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in the CELL_DCH state. If data shown in Figure 63-3 is traced on the Uu interface, VoIP services are carried on HSPA/HSPA+. Figure 63-2 UE in CELL_DCH state

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

63 Configuring IMS Signaling over HSPA

Figure 63-3 VoIP services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3.

If VoIP services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP or RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, as shown in Figure 63-4. Figure 63-4 Type of TTI carried in the message

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set IMS channel type to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH).

----End

Example
//Activating IMS Signaling over HSPA. SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: ImsChlType=HSPA; //Deactivating IMS Signaling over HSPA. SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: ImsChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)

64

Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011501 PDCP Header Compression (RoHC).

Prerequisites
l l l Dependencies on Hardware The UE supports this feature. Dependencies on Other Features WRFD-010619 CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+ License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions. l Other Prerequisites The UE should support the ROHC compression function.

Context
PDCP header compression (RoHC) mainly applies to VoIP services to reduce IP overhead. This feature provides an IP header compression mechanism, which aims to save the bandwidth over the Uu interface, thereby reducing occupancy of radio resources.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel configuration strategy switch. Select the following parameters in the Compatibility Switch list box:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 246

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)

CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH CMP_RAB_7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH l Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Trace > UMTS Service, and double-click Uu Interface Trace to display the Uu Interface Trace window. Set Cell config, Uu Message Type, and Save File, and then click Submit. Enable the UE to establish VoIP services. Check the rb-InformationSetupList message in the traced data: If this message contains the IE headerCompressionInfoList, as shown in Figure 64-1, this feature has been activated. If this message does not contain the IE headerCompressionInfoList, this feature has not been activated. Figure 64-1

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel configuration strategy switch. Disable the following switches in the Compatibility Switch list box: CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH CMP_RAB_7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

64 Configuring PDCP Header Compression (RoHC)

CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH ----End

Example
//Activating PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-1, CmpSwitch=CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB _7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-1&CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITC H-1; //Deactivating PDCP Header Compression (RoHC) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CfgSwitch=CFG_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH-0, CmpSwitch=CMP_RAB_5_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB_6_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB _7_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB_8_CFG_ROHC_SWITCH-0&CMP_RAB_9_CFG_ROHC_SWITC H-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

65

Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA +


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010619 CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+.

Prerequisites
l l Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010652 SRB over HSDPA, and WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA, in the case of CS voice over HSPA. WRFD-010686 CPC-DTX/DRX, in the case of CS voice over HSPA+. l License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions. l Other Prerequisites The UE is of 3GPP Release 8 or higher and CS voice services are capable of being carried on HSPA/HSPA+.

Context
The implementation of CS voice services over HSPA is introduced in 3GPP Release 8. In the case of CS voice services over HSPA, uplink CS voice packets are carried on the E-DCH and downlink CS voice packets are carried on the HS-DSCH. CS Voice over HSPA is intended for CS conversational AMR and AMR WB. CS streaming services are still carried on the DCH. The IMS for VoIP services is not required because the CS voice services over HSPA are carried on the CS domain of the CN.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

l Data configurations on the BSC6900 and NodeB are required to activate the CS Voice over HSPA/ HSPA+. l In the case of HSUPA, it is recommended that the non-scheduling transmission mode be used, which does not need to be configured. In the case of HSDPA, it is recommended that the Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF) algorithm be activated. The purpose is to reduce the delay of CS voice services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to configure the uplink EDCH and downlink HSDSCH as the channels carrying HSPA CS services. In this step, select the HSPA(UL EDCH,DL HSDSCH) check box under the parameter CS voice channel type. Optional: If CS voice services need to be carried on the 2 ms Transmission Time Interval (TTI), run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch. Go to Step 3. Optional: Configure the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service. a. If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:b (WBBPb) and Enhanced Base Band Card (EBBC) boards, it is recommended that 10 ms HSUPA TTI be set for VoIP services. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service. If the NodeB is configured with the WCDMA Baseband Process Unit REV:d (WBBPd) and Enhanced Base Band Card REV:d (EBBCd) boards, either 10 ms or 2 ms HSUPA TTI can be set for VoIP services. a. To set 10 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select the EDCH_TTI_10ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service. To set 2 ms HSUPA TTI for HSUPA services, do as follows: 1) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15
250

2.

3.

b.

b.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the EDCH_TTI_2ms check box under the parameter HSUPA TTI type of VOIP service. 2) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select the DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

4.

Optional: If the dynamic adjustment of CS voice services over HSUPA from 2 ms TTI to 10 ms TTI is required, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. To configure the EPF scheduling strategy, run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Scheduling Method to EPF (Enhanced PF). In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG as shown in Figure 65-1 to trace Uu interface signaling messages.

5.

Verification Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

Figure 65-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Analyze the traced messages. If data shown in Figure 65-2 is traced on the Uu interface, the UE is in CELL_DCH state. If the data traced on the Uu interface is displayed, as shown in Figure 65-3, CS voice services are carried on HSPA/HSPA+. Figure 65-2 UE in CELL_DCH state

Figure 65-3 CS voice services carried on HSPA/HSPA+

3.

If CS voice services are carried on HSPA or HSPA+, trace the RRC_RB_SETUP or RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface to check the type of carried TTI, as shown in Figure 65-4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

65 Configuring CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+

Figure 65-4 Type of TTI carried in the message

Deactivation Procedure
NOTE

The services admitted before deactivation of this feature are not affected. The services admitted after the deactivation will not use this feature.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) check box under the parameter CS voice channel type.

----End

Example
/*Activation procedure*/ //Operations on the BSC6900 side //Configuring CS voice services to be carried on the EDCH in the uplink and HS-DSCH in the downlink SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType =HSPA; //Enabling the HSUPA 2 ms scheduling algorithm SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1; //Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 10 ms TTI SET UFRC: VoipHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_10ms; //Setting the HSUPA TTI type of the VoIP service to 2 ms TTI SET UFRC: CSVoiceHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_2ms; //Turning off the switch of saving CE resources SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_SAVE_CE_SWITCH-1; //Enabling dynamic adjustment of TTI reconfiguration for CS voice services SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_VOICE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-1; //Setting the EPF scheduling strategy on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF; /*Deactivating CS Voice over HSPA/HSPA+*/ //Operations on the BSC6900 side SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: CSVoiceChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band)

66
Prerequisites

Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010613 AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band). (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

l l l

Dependencies on Hardware The CN supports associated specifications. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The UE supports associated specifications. The AMR-WB function is enabled on the MSC and UMG. The UE must have the corresponding support capability. The CN must have the corresponding support capability.

Context
This feature provides AMR-WB services, which help improve the QoS of voice services when resources are sufficient.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band)

CAUTION
l If the license of the AMR-WB service is not activated on a RNC, ensure that AMR-WB is not enabled for this RNC on the CS core network side. Otherwise, both the AMR-NB services and emergency calls cannot be set up for the UE supporting AMR-WB. l If the license of the AMR-WB service is enabled on a RNC, ensure that AMR-WB is enabled for this RNC on the CS core network side. Otherwise, the AMR-WB service cannot be set up. l This feature is an integrated solution. To enable this feature, specific parameters must be configured based on the actual network conditions. Contact Huawei for technical support. l Do not configure relevant parameters without the assistance of Huawei technical personnel; otherwise, the network capacity and KPI values may be affected.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. l Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UAMRCWB to set the RNClevel speech rates for the gold, silver, and bronze users. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLAMRCWB to set celllevel speech rates for the gold, silver, and bronze users. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UAMRCWB to query the AMRWB speech rates of the gold, silver, and bronze users. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLAMRCWB to query the AMR-WB speech rates for the gold, silver, and bronze users. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page, choose Monitor > Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring, and create a task of AMR Mode. Enable the AMR-WB function on UE1 and UE2, and enable the UEs to camp on the cell CELL_A11. Use UE1 to initiate a voice call to UE2. The call is successfully established and the voice is clear. Check the AMR mode on the LMT and verify that the downlink rate of UE1 reaches the specified value.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6. l

Deactivation Procedure Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to deactivate the license controlling this feature.
NOTE

After deactivating the license controlling this feature, a WB-AMR cannot establish WB and NB services. If the WB rate for the RNC is disabled, a WB-AMR UE still can establish NB services.

----End

Example
//Activating AMR-WB //Setting RNC-level parameters for the WB-AMR speech rate control (WBAMRC) algorithm

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

66 Configuring AMR-WB (Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band)

SET UAMRCWB: GoldMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, SilverMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, CopperMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K; //Setting cell-level parameters for the WB-AMRC algorithm ADD UCELLAMRCWB: CellId=111, GoldMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, SilverMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, CopperMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K; //Deactivating AMR-WB SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, FUNCTIONSWITCH2=WBAMR-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control

67
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the basic feature WRFD-020701 AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features If this feature is to be applied to Adaptive Multi Rate Wide Band (AMR WB), this feature depends on WRFD-010613 AMR-WB.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The UE supports TFC control processing.

Context
This feature enables the adjustment of AMR/AMR-WB speech rates triggered by multiple factors. This ensures uninterrupted services, expands the service coverage area, and reduces the cell load.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CS Algorithm Switch to CS_AMRC_SWITCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQOSACT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration >
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 257

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control

RNC-Oriented QoS Enhancement Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the QoS switches for AMR services. 3. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUALITYMEAS (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > QOS Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented QoS quality measurement parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) or MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > QoS link Stability Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameters for RNC-level AMR and AMR-WB speech rate control based on link stability. Optional: Set the parameters for AMR and AMR-WB speech rate control. Set the AMR speech rate control parameters. a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > the connectionoriented algorithm parameters of an RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT4 check box under parameter CORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0 to enable NB-AMRC.
NOTE

4.

Select the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT4 check box to disable NB-AMRC when there are some NB-AMRC compatibility problems.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UAMRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > AMRC Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented AMRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the RNC-level AMR speech rate control parameters.

Set the AMR-WB speech rate control parameters. a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > the connectionoriented algorithm parameters of an RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT3 check box under parameter CORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0 to enable WB-AMRC.
NOTE

Select the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT3 check box to disable WB-AMRC when there are some WB-AMRC compatibility problems.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UAMRCWB (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > AMRC Parameter Configuration > RNC-Oriented Wideband AMRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the RNC-level AMR-WB speech rate control parameters.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 258

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control

1.

On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor tab page. In the Monitor tab page, doubleclick UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. In the displayed dialog box, set Monitor Item to AMR Mode and specify IMSI. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Trace tab page. In the Trace tab page, double-click UMTS Services > Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed dialog box, specify the RNC ID and the Cell ID, as shown in Figure 67-1.

2.

Figure 67-1 Uu interface tracing

3. 4.

Two test UEs supporting AMR WB are available and camp on the cell named CELL_A11. Use UE A to call UE B. The call is established. Check whether the following information elements (IEs) are contained in the traced RRC_MEAS_CTR message, as shown in Figure 67-2. event6a event6b

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control

Figure 67-2 IEs contained in RRC_MEAS_CTRL

5.

Place UE B in the center of the cell, and move UE A towards or away from UE B. Check whether the AMR mode changes during performance monitoring, as shown in Figure 67-3. Figure 67-3 AMR mode

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

67 Configuring AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control

Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CS Algorithm Switch to CS_AMRC_SWITCH. ----End

Example
//Activating AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_AMRC_SWITCH-1; SET UQOSACT: AMRQosPerform=YES, UlQosAmrAdjSwitch=YES, UlQosWAmrAdjSwitch=YES, DlQosAmrAdjSwitch=YES, DlQosWAmrAdjSwitch=YES; MOD UTYPRABQUALITYMEAS: RabIndex=1, UlThd6a1=1, UlThd6a2=5, UlThd6b1=1, UlThd6b2=5, StaBlkNum5A=500, Thd5a=280, HangBlockNum5a=512, ThdEa=2, ThdEb=2; //Setting the AMR speech rate control parameters SET UCORRMPARA: ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT4-0; SET UAMRC: GoldMaxMode=NBAMR_BITRATE_6.70K, SilverMaxMode=NBAMR_BITRATE_6.70K, CopperMaxMode=NBAMR_BITRATE_6.70K; //Setting the AMR-WB speech rate control parameters SET UCORRMPARA: ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT3-0; SET UAMRCWB: GoldMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, SilverMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K, CopperMaxMode=WBAMR_BITRATE_12.65K; //Deactivating AMR/WB-AMR Speech Rates Control SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_AMRC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

68 Configuring TFO/TrFO

68
Prerequisites
l l l Dependencies on Hardware Dependencies on Other Features License

Configuring TFO/TrFO

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011600 TFO/TrFO.

This feature does not depend on the hardware. This feature does not depend on other features. The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions. l Other Prerequisites The CN node supports this feature. The UE supports this feature.

Context
This feature helps implement the functions of TFO/TrFO by identifying the Iu user plane (IuUP) V2 core network (CN) and processing related services. This feature can prevent speech quality deterioration caused by the interpretation between different coder and decoders (CODECs). The TrFO can also save the transmission resources. If the TFO function is enabled on the GSM side, the AMRC rate adjustment function must enabled together with this feature on the UMTS side to enable communications between GSM and UMTS users to support the TFO function. To fully utilize this function, it is good practice to enable the AMRC rate adjustment function on both UMTS users in a conversation.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 262

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

68 Configuring TFO/TrFO

Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the IuUP V2 switch to support TFO/TrFO. Select CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH from the CS Algorithm Switch drop-down list. l Verification Procedure 1. 2. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. Enable UE1 to call UE2. UE2 answers and starts a conversation with UE1. When UE1 moves to the cell edge, you can view the RRC TFC CTRL message indicating rate reduction sent from RNC to UE1 over the Uu interface. This indicates that this feature is activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the IuUP switch. Deselect CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH from the CS Algorithm Switch drop-down list.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH-1; //Deactivation procedure SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: CsSwitch=CS_IUUP_V2_SUPPORT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA

69
Prerequisites
l

Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140201 AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature has the following impact on the NodeB hardware: The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board. The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board. The 3900 series base station must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board. Currently, for baseband boards, only the EULPd, EBBCd, WBBPd and WBBPf boards support the PLVA feature. When the EULPd, EBBCd, WBBPd or WBBPf board is inserted together with the other types of baseband boards, AMR services cannot obtain the PLVA gain if the AMR services are set up on the other types of baseband boards.

l l

Dependencies on Other Features None License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Procedure
l l Activation Procedure After the license is activated, this feature has been activated. Verification Procedure The VS.PLVA.User counter informs operators of the number of UEs using this feature. Verify that the value of the counter VS.PLVA.User is not 0. A non-zero value indicates that this feature takes effect.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 264

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

69 Configuring AMR Voice Quality Improvement Based on PLVA

Deactivation Procedure None

----End

Example
None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

70
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Service.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Others The UE is capable of receiving cell broadcast messages.

Context
This feature supports the standard cell broadcast procedure specified in the related protocol and therefore helps the cell broadcast center (CBC) implement cell broadcast services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure External CBCs are deployed in an ATM or IP network. The ATM network is used as an example in this document. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV URNCCBCPUID (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > RNC Broadcast Message Main CPUID; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable the configuration of the built-in CBC. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Iu-BC Interface Configuration > RNC Cell Broadcast Message Para; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off CB Switch.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 266

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD DEVIP (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > Device IP Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the device IP address of the interface board. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPOAPVC (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > IPoA PVC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an Internet Protocol over ATM (IPoA) permanent virtual circuit (PVC).
NOTE

4.

The IP address is the device IP address (DEVIP) of the interface board. The peer IP address is the IP address for interconnection between serving GPRS support node (SGSN) and RNC. The VPI and VCI must be the same as those configured on the SGSN. To query the specific settings, run the LST IPOA command on the SGSN maintenance terminal.

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPRT (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > IP Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a route from the interface board to the CBC. The route passes the IP address of the SGSN. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCBSADDR (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > CBS Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the CBS socket IP address. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCTCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > CTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the common traffic channel (CTCH) to a cell.
NOTE

6.

7.

To set up a CTCH on FACH5, run the following commands:


DEA ADD ADD ACT USCCPCH: CellId=0, PhyChId=8; UFACHLOCH: CellId=0, TrChId=5; USCCPCHTFC: CellId=0, PhyChId=8, CTFC=7; USCCPCH: CellId=0, PhyChId=8;

8.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSDRX (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS DRX Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add the CBS discontinuous reception (DRX) scheduling parameter. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSSAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS SAC; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a CBS area.

9.

10. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLCBS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS. Set Cell CBS state to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the CBS function of the cell. l Verification Procedure 1. Check whether the CBS function works properly. a. b. Ping the CBS IP address of the RNC on the CBC. If the ping operation is successful, it indicates that the data transmission from CBC to RNC is normal. Ping the CBC IP address on the RNC. The source IP address is the device IP address, that is, the IP address of the CBS. PING IP: SRN=0, SN=16,
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 267

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

SIPADDR="12.12.12.12", DESTIP="11.11.11.11"; If the ping operation is successful, it indicates that the data transmission from RNC to CBC is normal. If the ping operation fails, check the configuration. c. Check whether the CBS socket is connected properly. To do this, trace messages over the Iu interface and view whether the SABP_LOAD_QUERY is sent to the RNC, as shown in Figure 70-1.

Figure 70-1 Viewing the SABP_LOAD_QUERY message

d.

As shown in Figure 70-2, the 0SABP_LOAD_QUERY_CMP message returned from the RNC contains the information element (IE) availablebandwidth.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

Figure 70-2 Viewing the SABP_LOAD_QUERY_CMP message

e.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether the CBS function works, as shown in Figure 70-3. Figure 70-3 Viewing the CBS function

2.

Check the broadcast messages sent. a. Use the MTC tool to send messages on the CBC. It is recommended that the time interval for sending messages be within 10s and the number of messages sent be more than two (0 indicates infinity). Trace messages on the Iu interface to check whether the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE message is sent to the RNC, as shown in Figure 70-4.

b.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

269

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

Figure 70-4 Viewing the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE message

c.

As shown in Figure 70-5, the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE_CMP message returned from the RNC contains a broadcast message with the IE number-ofbroadcasts-completed.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

270

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

Figure 70-5 Viewing the SABP_WRITE_REPLACE_CMP message

d.

Trace messages on the Uu interface to check whether the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message beginning with 01 is sent from the RNC, as shown in Figure 70-6.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

271

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

Figure 70-6 Viewing the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message

3.

Stop the RNC from sending broadcast messages. a. b. On the CBC, select the message being sent and click delete. Trace messages on the Iu interface to check whether the SABP_KILL message is sent to the RNC, as shown in Figure 70-7.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

272

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

Figure 70-7 Viewing the SAB_KILL message

c.

Trace messages on the Iu interface, as shown in Figure 70-8. The SABP_KILL_CMP message returned from the RNC contains the IE numberof-broadcast-completed.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

273

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

Figure 70-8 Viewing the SABP_KILL_CMP message

d. l

It can be viewed from the Uu interface trace data that the RNC stops sending the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message beginning with 01.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCBSADDR (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > ATM Transport > CBS Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable Cell Broadcast Service.

----End

Example
//Activating Cell Broadcast Service //Configuring the license controlling Cell Broadcast Service SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, CNOPERATORINDEX=1, FUNCTIONSWITCH1=CBS-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

274

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

70 Configuring Cell Broadcast Service

//Removing the configuration of the built-in CBC RMV URNCCBCPUID: CnOpIndex=1; //Disabling the inner CBS function for the RNC SET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=OFF; //Configuring the device IP address of the interface board ADD DEVIP: SRN=5, SN=18, DEVTYPE=IPOA_CLIENT_IP, IPADDR="12.12.12.12", MASK="255.255.255.0"; //Configuring the IPoA PVC ADD IPOAPVC: IPADDR="12.12.12.12", PEERIPADDR="12.12.12.120", CARRYT=NCOPT, CARRYNCOPTN=0, CARRYVPI=255, CARRYVCI=32, TXTRFX=103, RXTRFX=103, PEERT=OTHER; //Configuring a route from the interface board to CBC ADD IPRT: SRN=5, SN=18, DSTIP="11.11.11.12", DSTMASK="255.255.255.255", NEXTHOP="12.12.12.120", PRIORITY=HIGH, REMARK="SGSN_CBS"; //Configuring the CBS socket IP address ADD UCBSADDR: SRN=5, SN=2, CnOpIndex=1, RNCIPADDR="12.12.12.12", CBCIPADDR="11.11.11.11", CBCMASK="255.255.255.0"; //Configuring the CTCH for a cell ADD UCTCH: CellId=0, FachId=4; //Configuring the CBS DRX scheduling parameter ADD UCELLCBSDRX: CellId=0; //Configuring a CBS area ADD UCELLCBSSAC: CellId=0, CnOpIndex=1, CBSSAC=0, MsgInd=OFF; //Enabling the cell-level CBS ACT UCELLCBS: CellId=0;

//Deactivating Cell Broadcast Service //Removing the CBS socket IP address RMV UCBSADDR: CnOpIndex=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

275

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast

71
Prerequisites

Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast.

l l

Dependencies on Hardware OnlyBSC6900 supports this feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature and the feature WRFD-011000 Cell Broadcast Service cannot be used together.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Others The UE is capable of receiving cell broadcast messages.

Context
This feature is used to send simple cell broadcast messages by running a BSC6900 MML command on the M2000 or BSC6900 LMT when the cell broadcast center (CBC) is not configured.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCBSADDR (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > IP Transport > CBS Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the IP address of the external CBC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCCBCPUID (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > IP Transport > RNC Broadcast Message Main CPUID; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the SPU subsystem of the built-in CBC. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Iu-BC Interface
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 276

2.

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast

Configuration > RNC Cell Broadcast Message Para; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CB Switch to ON(ON) to enable the built-in CBC for the RNC. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCTCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > CTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the common traffic channel (CTCH) to a cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSDRX (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS DRX Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add the CBS discontinuous reception (DRX) scheduling parameter. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLCBSSAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS SAC; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add a CBS area and a broadcast message. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLCBS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS. Set Cell CBS state to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to enable the CBS function for a cell. Check whether the CBS function works properly. After activating the CBS function on the RNC, if the UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message beginning with 01 is traced on the Uu interface, as shown in Figure 71-1, the CBS function works properly. Figure 71-1 UU_BMC_MSG_TYPE message

5.

6.

7.

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLCBS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Broadcast Service > Cell CBS. Set Cell CBS state to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to disable the CBS function for a cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Iu-BC Interface Configuration > RNC Cell Broadcast Message Para; CME batch modification
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 277

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

71 Configuring Simplified Cell Broadcast

center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CB Switch to OFF(OFF) to turn off the CBS switch for the BSC6900. ----End

Example
//Activating Simplified Cell Broadcast //Enabling the license controlling Simplified Cell Broadcast SET LICENSE: SETOBJECT=UMTS, ISPRIMARYPLMN=YES, CNOPERATORINDEX=1, FUNCTIONSWITCH4=SIMPLE_CELL_BORADCAST-1; //Removing the IP address of an external CBS RMV UCBSADDR: CnOpIndex=1; //Configuring the SPU subsystem of the built-in CBC ADD URNCCBCPUID: CnOpIndex=1, SRN=0, SN=2, SSN=1; //Enabling the built-in CBC for the RNC SET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=ON, RepeatPeriod=10, RepeatNum=0; //Configuring the CTCH for a cell ADD UCTCH: CellId=0, FachId=4; //Configuring the CBS DRX scheduling parameter ADD UCELLCBSDRX: CellId=0; //Configuring a CBS area and a broadcast message ADD UCELLCBSSAC: CellId=0, CnOpIndex=1, CBSSAC=0, MsgInd=ON, MsgContent="welcome! it is cell 0"; //Enabling the CBS function for a cell ACT UCELLCBS: CellId=0;

//Verifying Simplified Cell Broadcast //Modifying the CBS configuration for a cell MOD UCELLCBSSAC: CellId=0, CnOpIndex=1, CBSSAC=0, MsgInd=ON, MsgContent="HELLO,SIMPLE CBS"; //Activating the CBS function for a cell ACT UCELLCBS: CellId=0;

//Deactivating Simplified Cell Broadcast //Disabling the CBS function for a cell DEA UCELLCBS: CellId=0; //Disabling the CBS function for the BSC6900 SET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

278

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

72 Configuring Warning of Disaster

72
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring Warning of Disaster

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020127 Warning of Disaster.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-011001 Simplified Cell Broadcast.

License This feature is not under license control.

Context
With this feature, the Cell Broadcast Center (CBC) incorporated into the RNC informs all users in specified cells of the disaster information through message broadcasting in the shortest time, therefore minimizing the impact of the disaster.
NOTE

Activating this feature requires operations on only the RNC.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. For detailed operations for activating license, see Activating the BSC6900 License. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCBSADDR (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > IP Transport > CBS Address; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the CBS configuration, if the operator configured the CBS function using external CBC. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Iu-BC Interface Configuration > RNC Cell Broadcast Message Para; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set CB switch and CTCH
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 279

3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

72 Configuring Warning of Disaster

switch of cell broadcast to ON. By doing this, the system can configure the disaster warning message and send the message to UEs. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URNCCBCPUID (CME single configuration: IUBC Configuration Express > IP Transport > RNC Broadcast Message Main CPUID; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the SPU subsystem for the built-in CBC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCBSAREA (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Simple Cell Broadcast Area; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the broadcast area. The broadcast area can be a LAC, a cell, or all cells under the RNC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCBSMSG (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Simplified CBS Message; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD UCBSMSG (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Simplified CBS Message; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the broadcast message.
NOTE

5.

6.

l When disasters (such as earthquakes, tsunamis, and hurricanes) occur, Set Geography Scope to CellImmediate, and set CBS Message Priority to High so that users can receive the message in time. l It is recommended to set Number of CBS Messages to a value greater than 3 to ensure that all UEs can receive the message.

Verification Procedure 1. Use a test UE to camp on the cell, and then activate the feature. Check whether the test UE can receive the disaster warning message.
NOTE

A UE can receive this message only after it is enabled with the 3G broadcast message receiving function.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCCBPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Iu-BC Interface Configuration > RNC Cell Broadcast Message Para; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set CTCH switch of cell broadcast to OFF.

----End

Example
//Activating warning of disaster (The following procedure uses a cell as an example.) RMV UCBSADDR: CnOpIndex=0; SET URNCCBPARA: CBSwitch=ON, CTCHSwitch =ON; ADD URNCCBCPUID: CnOpIndex=1, SRN=0, SN=2, SSN=1; ADD UCBSAREA: AreaId=1, CnOpIndex=1, AreaType=CELL, CellId=22; ADD UCBSMSG: MsgIndex=0, MsgTypeId=1, GeographicalScope=CellImmediate, Priority=High, RepetPeriod=10, NumOfBrdcstReq=5, CodeType=English, AreaID=1, EmergencyType=Other, CBSMsg="Hurricane"; //Deactivating warning of disaster SET URNCCBPARA: CTCHSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

280

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package

73
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring MBMS Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Others The existing PS domain functional entities (GGSN, SGSN, UTRAN, and UE) support the Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service (MBMS) bearer service. A new functional entity, that is, the broadcast multicast service centre (BM-SC) is added to provide a set of functions for the MBMS services. The UE supports MBMS functions.

Context
The MBMS feature is an important feature specified by 3GPP Release 6. When MBMS is enabled, point-to-multipoint multimedia services can be forwarded from one entity to multiple entities over a common channel. In this way, the resources can be shared.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 281

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package

Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set MBMS Control Switch to ON(ON). 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UMBMSSA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS SA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the MBMS service area according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMBMSSA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > Relation Between Cell and SA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the mapping between the cell and the MBMS service area (SA) according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCCPCHBASIC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > SCCPCH Basic Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the SCCPCH according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > FACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the FACH according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACHDYNTFS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Dynamic TFS of FACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the transport format set (TFS) of an FACH according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > FACH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a logical channel mapped to an FACH according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USCCPCHTFC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > TFC of SCCPCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the Calculated Transport Format Combination (CTFC) of an SCCPCH according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMCCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Configuration of the MCCH And MICH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the MCCH and the MICH for the cell according to the network plan. a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT USCCPCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > SCCPCH Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the configuration information of an SCCPCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLMBMS (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > Cell MBMS Status. Set Cell MBMS state to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the MBMS configuration data for the cell.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10. Configure the cell-level MBMS parameters according to the network plan.

b.

11. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMTCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > SemiIssue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 282

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package

Static Parameter of TF for FACH Carrying MTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the MBMS service type and rate according to the network plan. 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the RNC-level parameters for the MBMS algorithm according to the network plan. l Verification Procedure 1. 2. l Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE to query the MBMS status in the cell. Conduct a test to check whether the MBMS UE can receive the corresponding MBMS data successfully. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set MBMS Control Switch to OFF(OFF).

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation MBMS Introduction Package //Enabling the MBMS control switch SET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON; //Adding the MBMS service area ADD UMBMSSA: CnOpIndex=0, MbmsSaId=1; //Adding the mapping between the cell and the MBMS service area (SA) ADD UCELLMBMSSA: CellId=2, CnOpIndex=0, MbmsSaId=1; //Adding the SCCPCH ADD USCCPCHBASIC: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, ScrambCode=0, SlotFormat=D8, TFCIpresence=NOT_EXISTS, MbmsChInd=MCCH; //Adding the FACH ADD UFACH: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, TrChId=10, RateMatchingAttr=220, ToAWS=20, ToAWE=10, MaxFachPower=-10, MAXCMCHPI=D15, MINCMCHPI=D14, SIGRBIND=TRUE, ChCodingType=CONVOLUTIONAL; //Adding the transport format set (TFS) of an FACH ADD UFACHDYNTFS: CellId=2, TrChId=10, RLCSize=168, TFsNumber=D3, TbNumber1=0, TbNumber2=1, TbNumber3=2; //Adding a logical channel mapped to an FACH ADD UFACHLOCH: CellId=2, TrChId=10; //Adding the Calculated Transport Format Combination (CTFC) of an SCCPCH ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, CTFC=0;ADD USCCPCHTFC: CellId=2, PhyChId=11, CTFC=1; //Adding the MCCH and the MICH for the cell ADD UCELLMCCH: CellId=2, MichId=19, PhyChIdforMcch=11, FachIdforMcch=10; //Activating the configuration information of an SCCPCH ACT USCCPCH: CellId=2, PhyChId=11; //Activating the MBMS configuration data for the cell ACT UCELLMBMS: CellId=100; //Setting the MBMS service type and rate SET UMTCH: ServiceType=STREAMING, ServiceBitRate=D128; //Setting the RNC-level parameters for the MBMS algorithm SET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode=DYNAMIC;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

283

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

73 Configuring MBMS Introduction Package

//Deactivation MBMS Introduction Package SET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

284

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

74 Configuring MBMS Admission Control

74
Prerequisites

Configuring MBMS Admission Control


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061602 MBMS Admission Control.

l l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
The admission criteria of Iub resources and credit resources for the Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service point-to-point/point-to-multipoint resource block (MBMS PtP/PtM RB) requests is the same as that for other services. The cell power resources are preferentially allocated to high-priority MBMS broadcasting services. Only the activation procedure of the resource admission on the Uu interface is provided in this section.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select MBMS_UU_ADCTRL(MBMS UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch dropdown list to enable the MBMS admission control on the Uu interface and select a proper admission algorithm according to the network plan.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 285

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

74 Configuring MBMS Admission Control

1.

Enable the MBMS admission algorithm, and then limit cell resources to ensure that the admission resources are insufficient. In this manner, the admission fails. An example is given as follows: a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URESERVEOVSF to reserve the downlink Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) for the cell so that only 64 kbit/s services are supported in the cell. Originate a 256 kbit/s service. Check the messages traced on the Iu interface on the RNC side, which are the MBMS SESSION START message from the core network (CN) to the RNC and the MBMS SESSION START RSPPONSE message from the RNC to the CN. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE. If the parameter Reason of service setup failure is Access Failure, the MBMS admission algorithm takes effect.

b.

c.

2. l 1.

Disable the MBMS admission algorithm, and the services are successfully admitted. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect MBMS_UU_ADCTRL(MBMS UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch dropdown list to disable the MBMS admission algorithm.

Deactivation Procedure

----End

Example
//Activating MBMS Admission Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=MBMS_UU_ADCTRL-1, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST; //Verifying MBMS Admission Control ADD URESERVEOVSF: CellId=1, DLOVSFSF=SF32, DLCODENO=20; DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE: CellId=1; //Deactivating MBMS Admission Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=MBMS_UU_ADCTRL-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

286

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

75 Configuring MBMS Load Control

75
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring MBMS Load Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061603 MBMS Load Control.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
The feature helps to lighten the cell load when the cell enters the congestion state and ensures the system stability. When the cell is in the basic congestion state and downlink congestion is detected, the power consumed by MBMS services is reduced.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU OLC Algorithm) from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list to enable downlink load reshuffling and downlink overload congestion control on the Uu interface. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 287

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

75 Configuring MBMS Load Control

Parameters in Batches) to set the congestion-relief action triggered by Load Reshuffling (LDR). 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLOLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Overload Congestion Control Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the sequence and number of MBMS services to be released for Overload Control (OLC). Originate an MBMS service on the BSC6900, and ensure that service data is sent. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDM. Based on the current load of the cell, set the triggering thresholds for LDR and OLC. Ensure that the corresponding load control actions can be triggered. When the cell load exceeds the LDR threshold, the power of MBMS services is reduced in the cell. Check the maxFACH Power information element in the COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL RECONFIGURATION REQUEST message on the Iub interface. When the cell load exceeds the OLC threshold, MBMS services are released. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect DL_UU_LDR(Downlink UU LDR Algorithm) and DL_UU_OLC(Downlink UU OLC Algorithm) from the Cell LDC algorithm switch drop-down list to disable downlink load reshuffling and downlink overload congestion control on the Uu interface. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLLDR (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell LDR Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to remove the MBMS service power reduction from the LDR-triggered actions.

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

3.

4. l 1.

Deactivation Procedure

2.

----End

Example
//Activating MBMS Load Control //Enabling downlink load reshuffling and downlink overload congestion control on the Uu interface MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= DL_UU_LDR-1&DL_UU_OLC-1; //Setting the first LDR-triggered action to power reduction of MBMS services MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=1, DlLdrFirstAction=MBMSDECPOWER; //Enabling the triggered OLC to release MBMS services on a one-by-one basis ADD UCELLOLC: CellId=1, SeqOfUserRel=MBMS_REL, MbmsOlcRelNum=1; //Verifying MBMS Load Control MOD UCELLLDM: CellId=1, DlLdrTrigThd=2, DlLdrRelThd=1, DlOlcTrigThd=2, DlOlcRelThd=1; //Deactivating MBMS Load Control MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=1, NBMLdcAlgoSwitch= DL_UU_LDR-0&DL_UU_OLC-0; MOD UCELLLDR: CellId=1, DlLdrFirstAction=NoAct;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

288

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

76 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management

76

Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061605 MBMS Transport Resource Management.

Prerequisites
l l Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The features WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated. l License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
For the same MBMS session in the same Node B, a separate Iub transport bearer is established for each cell. An example is shown in the following figure assuming 3 cells in one Node B. Three copies of exact same MBMS session data are sent through the Iub from the CRNC to the Node B.

For details, see the Optional Feature Description of Huawei UMTS.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

289

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

76 Configuring MBMS Transport Resource Management

Procedure
l l Activation Procedure The feature does not need to be activated. Verification Procedure 1. 2. Use UEs to require an MBMS service in the two cells under the same NodeB. Check the signaling traced on the Iub interface. You may find two pairs of COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST/COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE messages. The BROADCAST REFERENCE IEs in the two COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST messages are different. This indicates that the messages are from different Iub interfaces. Both the COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE messages contain the TLA and Binding ID. l Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

290

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

77 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS

77
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061606 Streaming Service on MBMS.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables the MBMS service to be carried on the PS streaming class, therefore ensuring QoS.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure This feature depends on MBMS basic functions. This feature can be activated only after MBMS basic functions are enabled. For details, see the section "Configuring MBMS Introduction Package". The parameters of streaming services have been configured by the RNC by default. This feature is used as long as the CN sends MBMS services in the form of PS streaming. No activation operation is needed. l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 291

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

77 Configuring Streaming Service on MBMS

1. 2. l

Use an MBMS-supportive UE to request an MBMS mobile television service and receive the corresponding data. The UE receives the data of the MBMS mobile television service successfully.

Deactivation Procedure This feature is used as long as MBMS is configured. There is no need to deactivate this feature.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

292

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

78 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS

78
Prerequisites

Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061608 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS.

l l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The features WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature is related to four MBMS channel rates: 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, and 128 kbit/ s.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure The feature does not need to be activated. l Verification Procedure 1. 2. l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE to query the MBMS status in the cell and the bandwidth of the MBMS service. Use an MBMS-supportive UE to request an MBMS service, the UE can receive the corresponding data successfully.

Deactivation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 293

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

78 Configuring 16/32/64/128Kbps Channel Rate on MBMS

This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

294

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

79 Configuring MBMS Phase 2

79
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring MBMS Phase 2

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The features WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

l l

License This feature is not under license control. Other Prerequisites UE should support the corresponding enhanced MBMS functions.

Context
This feature supports the enhanced MBMS (PTP/PTM) to save cell resources. The MBMS phase 2 includes following features: l l l l WRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode WRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA WRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancement WRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users

Procedure
l Activation Procedure For details about activation procedures, see the following sections: 80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode 81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA 82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 295

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

79 Configuring MBMS Phase 2

83 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users ----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

296

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode

80

Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066001 MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode.

Prerequisites
l l Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The features WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated. l License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
Compared with broadcast mode, it is a more efficient way to deploy the point-to-multipoint services, such as mobile TV. This feature can be activated only after MBMS basic functions are enabled. For details, see the section "Configuring MBMS Introduction Package". The CN specifies whether broadcast mode or enhanced broadcast mode is used for MBMS services. If the CN specifies the enhanced broadcast mode and the license for this mode is activated, then, enhanced broadcast mode is used. The MBMS transmission mode should be configured on the RNC. The MBMS transmission mode can be configured at the SA level, RNC level, or cell level. The cell level has the highest priority, while the RNC level has the lowest priority. That is, if the MBMS transmission mode is configured at both the RNC level and the cell level, the cell level configuration takes effect in the corresponding cell. The detailed process is as follows:

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

297

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

80 Configuring MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the transmission mode at the RNC level through the Mbms Transfer Mode parameter. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USAMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in SA Level; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the transmission mode at the SA level through the Mbms Transfer Mode parameter. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in Cell Level; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the transmission mode at the cell level through the Mbms Transfer Mode parameter. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the transfer threshold between PtP and PtM mode through the Counting Threshold and the Ptp To Ptm Offset parameters. Use an MBMS-supportive UE to request an MBMS service and receive the corresponding data. Check MBMS SESSION START message traced on the Iu interface at the RNC. If the value of the MBMS Bearer Service Type IE is broadcast and the value of MBMS Counting Information IE is counting, the enhanced broadcast mode is configured. Use one or two MBMS-supportive UEs to receive the MBMS service, you can find that the DCH or HS-DSCH is used. Use three MBMS-supportive UEs to receive the MBMS service, you can find that the FACH is used.

2.

3.

4.

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

3.

Deactivation Procedure To deactivate this feature, switch off the license item of the feature.

----End

Example
//Activating MBMS Enhanced Broadcast Mode SET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC; ADD USAMBMSPARA: CnOpIndex=0, MbmsSaId=0, MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC; ADD UCELLMBMSPARA: CellId=100, MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC; SET URNCMBMSPARA: NCountingThd=2, NPtpToPtmOffset=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

298

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA

81
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066002 MBMS P2P over HSDPA.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The features WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package and WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service point-to-point (MBMS P2P) services to be carried on the HS-DSCH, saving cell resources.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Mbms Transfer Mode to DYNAMIC. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Service Mapping Strategy Switch to MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH.

2.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 299

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

81 Configuring MBMS P2P over HSDPA

1. 2. l

Set up a 256 kbit/s MBMS streaming service. Use an MBMS-capable UE to request the MBMS service and receive the corresponding data.

Deactivation Procedure To deactivate this feature, switch off the license item of the feature.

----End

Example
//Activating MBMS P2P over HSDPA SET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode= DYNAMIC; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

300

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement

82
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066003 MBMS Admission Enhancement.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature provides different admission policies for Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service point-to-multipoint (MBMS PTM) services and MBMS point-to-point (MBMS PTP) services. MBMS PTP services use the same admission, preemption, and congestion criteria with normal services except MBMS HSDPA services. MBMS PTM services should be treated differently so that they do not occupy excessive resources to block non-MBMS connection admission. In addition, some resources should be reserved for MBMS PTM services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUEUEPREEMPT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Queue Preempt Parameters Configuration > RNC Oriented Queue Preempt Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Mbms PreemptAlgoSwitch and Preempt algorithm switch to ON.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 301

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

82 Configuring MBMS Admission Enhancement

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the preemption parameters for PTM services. The actual preemption capabilities are determined by both the settings of these parameters and the parameter settings sent by the CN. The parameter settings of PTP services are sent by the CN and do not need to be set manually. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST URNCMBMSPARA to check the configuration. Enable a low-priority user to access the cell. Enable the admission algorithm, and then limit cell resources so that the admission resources in the cell are insufficient. In this case, the MBMS services successfully preempt common services. An example is given as follows: a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD URESERVEOVSF to reserve the downlink OVSF for the cell so that only 64 kbit/s services are supported in the cell. Originate a 256 kbit/s service. Check the messages traced on the Iu interface on the RNC side, which are the MBMS SESSION START message from the CN to the RNC and the MBMS SESSION START RSPPONSE message from the RNC to the CN.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

b.

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE. If the parameter Current State of Service Session is Setuping, the user connection is released due to preemption. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UQUEUEPREEMPT (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Queue Preempt Parameters Configuration > RNC Oriented Queue Preempt Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Mbms PreemptAlgoSwitch to OFF.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating MBMS Admission Enhancement SET UQUEUEPREEMPT: PreemptAlgoSwitch=ON, MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch=ON; SET URNCMBMSPARA: MbmsTransMode=PTM, PtmPreemptSwitch=ON, PtmStrmPasiSwitch=ON, PtmNullStrmPasiSwitch=ON; //Verifying MBMS Admission Enhancement ADD URESERVEOVSF: CellId=1, DLOVSFSF=SF32, DLCODENO=20; DSP UCELLMBMSSERVICE: CellId=1; //Deactivating MBMS Admission Enhancement SET UQUEUEPREEMPT: MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

302

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

83 Configuring Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users

Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01066004 Inter-Frequency Neighboring Cell Selection for MBMS PTP Users.

83

Configuring Inter-Frequency

Prerequisites
l l Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package, WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2. l License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables the filtering and handover of a target cell based on the MBMS channel resources in the inter-frequency neighboring cells, therefore ensuring the continuity of the MBMS service.

Procedure
l l l Activation Procedure The feature does not need to be activated. Verification Procedure This feature does not need to be verified. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 303

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

84 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS

84
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010627 FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

License This feature is not under license control.

Context
This feature enables the FACHs that carry MBMS services to share transport resources over the Iub interface, thereby saving the Iub bandwidth.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MBMS Iub Sharing Switch to ON (ON). Before turning on the transmission sharing switch, activate the MBMS services in two cells served by the same NodeB. View the tracing messages over the Iub interface. You may find two pairs of COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST/COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE messages, where the BROADCAST REFERENCE IEs in the two COMMON TRANSPORT
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 304

Verification Procedure 1.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

84 Configuring FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS

CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST messages are different. This indicates that the messages are transmitted over different Iub interfaces. 2. Turn on the transmission sharing switch, activate the MBMS services in two cells served by the same NodeB, and view the tracing messages over the Iub interface. You may find two pairs of COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST/COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP RESPONSE messages, where the BROADCAST REFERENCE IEs in the two COMMON TRANSPORT CHANNEL SETUP REQUEST messages are the same. This indicates that the messages are transmitted over the same Iub interface. This feature has been activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set MBMS Iub Sharing Switch to OFF (OFF).

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS SET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON, MbmsIubSharingSwitch=ON; //Deactivating FACH Transmission Sharing for MBMS SET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON, MbmsIubSharingSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

305

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

85 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)

85
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency

Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010626 MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion).

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Others Prerequisites UEs support this feature.

Context
Frequency Layer Convergence (FLC) denotes the process where the UTRAN requests UEs to preferentially reselect to the frequency layer on which the MBMS service is intended to be transmitted. Frequency Layer Dispersion (FLD) denotes the process where the UTRAN redistributes UEs across frequencies. FLC helps users obtain the information about an MBMS service in real time. FLD reduces cell load after the MBMS service is finished. FLD is activated automatically after FLC takes effect, and is deactivated automatically after FLC is disabled.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 306

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

85 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
NOTE

Two overlapping cells covered by multiple carriers must be enabled with MBMS. The cell using frequency F1 is in the SA of MBMS, and other cells using other frequencies are not in the SA of MBMS.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLMCCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Configuration of the MCCH And MICH; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flc Algo Switch to ON(ON). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH check box under the parameter HandOver Switch. Configure an MCCH in an R99 cell and set an MBMS cell to the neighboring cell of the R99 cell. Make UEs camp on the R99 cell, activate the MBMS service, and accept the MBMS service. If UEs are reselected to the MBMS cell successfully and transmit and receive data normally, FLC is activated.

2.

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

3. l

Move UEs to the MBMS cell edge and terminate the MBMS service. If some UEs are reselected to the R99 cell, FLD is activated.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLMCCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Channel Configuration > Configuration of the MCCH And MICH; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Flc Algo Switch to OFF(OFF). Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH check box under the parameter HandOver Switch.

2.

----End

Example
//Activating MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion) MOD UCELLMCCH: CellId=1, FlcAlgoSwitch=ON; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

307

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

85 Configuring MBMS FLC(Frequency Layer Convergence)/FLD(Frequency Layer Dispersion)

MOD UCELLMCCH: CellId=1, FlcAlgoSwitch=OFF; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: HoSwitch=HO_ALGO_MBMS_FLC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

308

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

86 Configuring MBMS over Iur

86
Prerequisites
l l l License

Configuring MBMS over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010661 MBMS over Iur.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2 has been configured before this feature is activated. The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The neighboring RNC supports the MBMS feature. The Point to Point (PTP) services are supported.

Context
This feature extends the application scope of the MBMS service.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure This feature does not need to be activated. It takes effect after the feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package is activated. l Verification Procedure Initiate a softt handover by moving a UE that is in CELL_DCH state and receiving the MBMS data in PTP mode from the Serving RNC (SRNC) to the Drift RNC (DRNC). In this way, a Radio Link (RL) is established on the Iur interface. The cell to which the RL belongs performs the MBMS service in Point to Multipoint (PTM) mode. If at the time being the UE under the DRNC is receiving only MBMS data in PTM mode, this feature has been activated.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 309

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

86 Configuring MBMS over Iur

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

310

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

87 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH

87

Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010662 Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH.

Prerequisites
l l Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010660 MBMS Phase 2 has been configured before this feature is activated. l License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables dynamic adjustment of the transmit power of the MTCH based on the number of neighboring cells that are in PTM mode. It does not conflict with the maximum power and minimum power defined in the MBMS service. In addition, this feature depends on the MBMS service, because it introduces only power deviation.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure This feature does not need to be activated. Telecom operators only need to set the power adjustment threshold to an appropriate value. 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URNCMBMSPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Parameter in RNC Level; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Combine Neighbour Cell Percent to an appropriate value based on the network plan. When the rate of
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 311

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

87 Configuring Dynamic Power Estimation for MTCH

PTM applications in a cell in PTM mode reach the value of this parameter, this feature brings a combining gain. If Combine Neighbour Cell Percent is set to a small value, the transmit power of the MBMS SCCPCH in the cell decreases. l Verification Procedure 1. Select two MBMS cells (cell A and cell B) that work in the same frequency. In cell A, configure only cell B as its intra-frequency neighboring cell. Apply the PTM mode in cell A and PTP mode in cell B. Use an MBMS-capable UE to initiate an MBMS service in cell A. View the NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_CH_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iub interface to check the power of the FACH that carries the service. Set cell B to send MBMS data in the same channel in PTM mode. In this manner, the rate of the intra-frequency neighboring cells that apply the PTM mode exceeds the value of the preset Combine Neighbour Cell Percent. View the NBAP_COMM_TRANSP_CH_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iub interface to check the power of the FACH that carries the service. Expected result: The power of the FACH that carries data of the MBMS channel decreases by 5 dB.

2.

3.

4.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Setting the Power Adjusting Threshold SET URNCMBMSPARA: CombNCellPercent=50;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

312

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

88 Configuring MSCH Scheduling

88
Prerequisites
l l l License

Configuring MSCH Scheduling

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010663 MSCH Scheduling.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated. The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables a UE to receive packets on the MTCH in Discontinuous Reception (DRX) mode, thereby reducing UE power consumption.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set both Msch Switch For NonMtchMulti Sccpch and Msch Switch For MtchMulti Sccpch to ON(ON). Use an MBMS-capable UE to initiate an MBMS service and ensure that the UE can receive the MBMS data. Check messages traced on the Uu interface. If MSCH configuration information is found in the MBMS CURRENT CELL P-T-M RB INFORMATION, MBMS GENERAL INFORMATION, and MBMS NEIGHBOURING CELL P-T-M RB INFORMATION messages, this feature has been activated.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 313

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

88 Configuring MSCH Scheduling

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UMBMSSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > MBMS Configuration > MBMS Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set both Msch Switch For NonMtchMulti Sccpch and Msch Switch For MtchMulti Sccpch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example
//Activating MSCH scheduling SET UMBMSSWITCH: MbmsSwitch=ON, MschSwitchForNonMtchMulti=ON, MschSwitchForMtchMulti=ON; //Deactivating MSCH scheduling SET UMBMSSWITCH: MschSwitchForNonMtchMulti=OFF, MschSwitchForMtchMulti=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

314

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

89 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics

89
Prerequisites

Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010665 MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics.

l l

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010616 MBMS Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The BMSC on the CN side identifies the channel with a fixed Temporary Mobile Group Identity (TMGI) when delivering a program source.

Context
This feature enables statistics on MBMS channels to help the operator obtain the audience rating of the MBMS channels.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure This feature does not need to be activated. l Verification Procedure Set the MBMS channels (a maximum of five MBMS channels can be set) on which statistics is to be performed. Then, send the TMGIs of these channels from the M2000 to the RNC. The RNC then measures the following channel-related counters:
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 315

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

89 Configuring MBMS Channel Audience Rating Statistics

Average number of users in PTP mode Average number of users in PTM mode Time for channels remaining in PTM mode TTime for channels remaining in PTP mode Based on the preceding counters, the average duration for which each UE is connected to a channel can be calculated. l Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

316

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

90
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS.

Dependencies on Hardware If SAS-CENTRIC locating is required, SAS equipment has been configured. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Others Prerequisites UE is needed to report the relevant measurement results. CN is needed to trigger the location request. The UE supports at least one of the following locating methods: UE-assisted CELLID+RTT locating or UE-based CELLID+RTT locating in RNCCENTRIC mode UE-assisted CELLID+RTT locating in the SAS-CENTRIC mode

Context
The simplest CELLID + Round Trip Time (RTT) locating method is to directly use the geographical center of the coverage area of the reference cell as the locating result. To achieve high locating accuracy, the BSC6900 demands RTT measurement in all cells in the active set and requests the UE to perform locating measurement on the corresponding cells. By means of the two types of measurement, the BSC6900 calculates the time of arrival (TOA) of signal from the cell antenna to the UE. By multiplying the TOA by the velocity of light, the BSC6900 obtains the distance between a certain cell and the UE. If three TOA circles intersect, the BSC6900 can obtain the accurate location of the UE.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 317

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Optional: If inter-RNC locating is required, the Iur interface needs to be configured. For details, see 94 Configuring LCS over Iur. Optional: If SAS-CENTRIC mode needs to be supported, the Iupc interface is required. For details, see 95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the parameters of the SMLC algorithm. In this step, set UE Positioning Method, CELLID+RTT Method Type, and Location Working Mode to appropriate values. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > SMLC and IPDL > Cell SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the following location information parameters of the cell: Cell location configuration type Geographical location information about the antenna: Cell Antenna Latitude Cell Antenna Altitude Cell Antenna Longitude Cell coverage information: Cell Antenna Max Coverage Cell Antenna Orientation Cell Antenna Opening l Verification Procedure 1. Initiate Iu, Iub, and Uu interface message tracing, as shown in Figure 90-1, Figure 90-2, and Figure 90-3 respectively.

4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

318

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

Figure 90-1 Iu Interface Trace dialog box

Figure 90-2 Iub Interface Trace dialog box

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

319

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

Figure 90-3 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2. 3.

Use a UE to access the cell and enable the CN to send a locating request message. The message LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL and LOCATION REPORT are traced on the Iu interface, as shown in Figure 90-4 and Figure 90-5. Figure 90-4 LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

320

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

Figure 90-5 LOCATION REPORT

4.

The messages traced on the Iub interface show that the procedure Dedicated Measurement Initiation is performed on all links in the active set and that the value of Dedicated Measurement Type is Round Trip Time, as shown in Figure 90-6 and Figure 90-7.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

321

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

Figure 90-6 Dedicated Measurement Type

Figure 90-7 Round Trip Time

5.

From the traced Uu interface messages, you can see the information about the UE RxTx time difference measurement, which is a type of internal measurement (if the UE supports UE Rx-Tx time difference type 2 measurement, the locating method for RxTx time difference type 2 measurement is adopted), as shown in Figure 90-8 and Figure 90-9.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

322

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

Figure 90-8 UE Rx-Tx time difference

Figure 90-9 UE Rx-Tx time difference type 1

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the CELLID+RTT locating method. In this step, deselect the CELLID_RTT check box under parameter UE Positioning Method.

----End

Example
//Activating Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS //Setting the parameters of the SMLC algorithm SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-1&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0, CELLIDRTTMethodType=UE_ASSISTED, ForcedSHOSwitch=OFF, IntraRelThdFor1A=2, IntraRelThdFor1B=2, TrigTime1A=D10, TrigTime1B=D10, SHOQualmin=-20, LcsWorkMode=RNC_CENTRIC; //Setting the location information parameters of the cell

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

323

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS

ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=2121, CellId=80, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=78900, AntennaLongitudeDegree=6789, AntennaAltitudeMeter=4567, MaxAntennaRange=5678, AntennaOrientation=567, AntennaOpening=456, CellAverageHeight=6789; //Deactivating Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-0&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

324

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS

91
Prerequisites
l l l License

Configuring OTDOA Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020802 OTDOA Based LCS.

Dependencies on Hardware The corresponding NodeBs should be equipped USCU card with GPS function. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Others Prerequisites UE is needed to report the relevant measurement results. CN is needed to trigger the location request. The UE supports at least one of the following positioning methods: UE-based OTDOA positioning method UE-assisted OTDOA positioning method

Context
Huawei UTRAN supports IPDL-OTDOA location services. In this feature, the NodeB is configured with a GPS card and supports cell frame timing measurement. In addition, BSC6900 initiates and traces the SFN-SFN observed time difference measurement. BSC6900 calculates the relative time difference (RTD) of the cell related to positioning based on the latest measurement reports (MRs). After BSC6900 receives a LOCATON REPORT CONTROL message, it requests the UE to perform SFN-SFN observed time difference measurement if the IPDL-OTDOA positioning method is used. After receiving the corresponding MRs, BSC6900 calculates the location of the UE. For accurate location calculation, BSC6900 may request the NodeB to perform RTT measurement and request the UE to perform Rx-Tx time difference measurement.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 325

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. Optional: Configure the Iur interface if inter-RNC locating is required. For details, see 94 Configuring LCS over Iur. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the SMLC algorithm parameters. In this step, set UE Positioning Method and Location Working Mode to appropriate values.
NOTE

Location Working Mode must be set to RNC_CENTRIC(RNC CENTRIC Mode).

3.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > SMLC and IPDL > Cell SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the location information about a cell. In this step, set the following parameters to appropriate values: Cell Location Setting Type Parameters associated with the geographical location information about the antenna system Cell Antenna Longitude Cell Antenna Latitude Cell Antenna Altitude Parameters associated with the cell coverage information Cell Antenna Max Coverage Cell Antenna Opening Cell Antenna Orientation

4.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > SMLC and IPDL > Cell GPS Frame Timing; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the parameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement. In this step, set Cell ID and GPS Frame Timing Active Flag to appropriate values. Check whether the parameters required for positioning are correctly set. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST USMLC to query SMLC algorithm parameter settings. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST USMLCCELL to query the settings of the location parameters of a cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLGPSFRMTIMING to query the parameter settings related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement.

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 326

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

91 Configuring OTDOA Based LCS

3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the OTDOA-based location service. ----End

Example
//Activating OTDOA Based LCS //Setting the parameters for the SMLC algorithm SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=OTDOA-1, OTDOAMethodType=UE_BASED, LcsWorkMode=RNC_CENTRIC; //Setting the location information parameters of the cell ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=2121, CellId=80, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=78900, AntennaLongitudeDegree=6789, AntennaAltitudeMeter=4567, MaxAntennaRange=5678, AntennaOrientation=567, AntennaOpening=456, CellAverageHeight=6789; //Setting parameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING: CellId=80, StartFlag=ACTIVE; //Deactivating OTDOA Based LCS SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=OTDOA-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

327

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

92
Prerequisites
l

Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Dependencies on Hardware If GPS receiver is located at RNC,BSC6900 needs clock board such as GCGa to support this feature. If GPS receiver is located at NodeB, NodeB should be equipped with USCU card with GPS function. When the RNC-CENTRIC locating service is required: If a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver is configured on the BSC6900 side, the BSC6900 must be configured with the General Clock Unit with GPS REV:a (GCGa) board. If a GPS receiver is configured on the NodeB side, the NodeB must be configured with the Universal Satellite card and Clock Unit (USCU) and WCDMA GPS Receiving Unit (WGRU), and all the equipment (including the GPS antenna system) must be properly installed and connected. When the SAS-CENTRIC locating service is required, the BSC6900 must be configured with a Stand-Alone SMLC (SAS) device. SMLC refers to Serving Mobile Location Center.
NOTE

If A-GPS positioning is required, the GPS receiver does not need to be installed in BSC6900 side or NodeB side.

l l

Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites NodeB V200R014 supports this feature while NodeB V100R014 does not support this feature.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

328

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

The UE supports UE-based A-GPS positioning or UE-assisted A-GPS positioning or both. The CN can send positioning requests. UE is needed to report the relevant measurement results. CN is needed to trigger the location request.

Context
A-GPS positioning is an application of GPS positioning in the WCDMA network. In open areas, A-GPS positioning can provide high positioning sensitivity, shorten positioning time, and save power. The location information about the GPS receiver can be automatically searched by the GPS receiver itself or be configured by a user. l If the accurate location information (to be provided by the surveying and mapping authorities) about the antenna of the GPS receiver can be obtained, it is recommended that the information be specified when the GPS receiver is being configured. In this way, the GPS receiver can quickly search for the satellite group in the area where it is located, and accurately calculate the differential GPS information. If the accurate location information about the antenna of the GPS receiver cannot be obtained, the auto search mode can be selected.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
NOTE

The BSC6900 and NodeB must be configured with the related data to activate this feature.

Activation Procedure on the BSC6900 Side 1. 2. Optional: If inter-RNC locating is required, configure the Iur interface by referring to 94 Configuring LCS over Iur. Optional: If the GPS positioning method in SAS-CENTRIC mode is required, configure the Iu-PC interface by referring to 95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service. In RNC-CENTRIC mode, if a GPS receiver is configured on the BSC6900 side, run the BSC6900 MML command SET CLKTYPE to set the type of clock board to GCGa. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to set the SMLC algorithm parameters. In this step, set UE Positioning Method and Location Working Mode to appropriate values. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL to set the parameters related to cell location information to appropriate values. Cell Location Setting Type Parameters associated with the geographical location information about the antenna system Cell Antenna Longitude Cell Antenna Latitude
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 329

3.

4.

5.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

Cell Antenna Altitude Parameters associated with the cell coverage information Cell Antenna Max Coverage Cell Antenna Opening Cell Antenna Orientation 6. In RNC-CENTRIC mode, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GPS to set the parameters related to the GPS receiver. In this step, set GPS ID, GPS type, GPS antenna latitude, GPS antenna longitude, and GPS antenna altitude to appropriate values. In RNC-CENTRIC mode, run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GPS to activate the specified GPS receiver. In this step, set AGPS ID and Type to appropriate values. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command STR POSAVE with Maximum time for posave set to 12. Then, check the single point positioning results of the GPS receiver in the \bam\common\fam\smlc directory.

7. 8.

Activation Procedure for NodeB V200R014


NOTE

In RNC-CENTRIC mode, a GPS receiver can be configured on the NodeB side as required. If a GPS receiver is configured on the NodeB side, the NodeB must be configured with the USCU and WGRU, and all the equipment (including the GPS antenna system) must be properly installed and connected.

1.

Run the NodeB MML command ADD BRD to add a USCU board. Set Cabinet No., Subrack No., and Slot No. to appropriate values based on the actual location of the USCU board. Set Board Type to USCU.

2. 3. 4.

Run the NodeB MML command SET CLKMODE to set the working mode of the reference clock source. Run the NodeB MML command ADD GPS to add a GPS clock link. Run the NodeB MML command MOD GPSPOS to add a GPS receiver. If Way to Get Position is set to USER_CONFIG(User Config), set Antenna Longitude, Antenna Latitude, and Antenna Altitude to appropriate values. If Way to Get Position is set to SEARCH_WITH_DURATION(Search with duration), set Duration to an appropriate value. If Way to Get Position is set to SEARCH_WITH_PRECISION(Search with precision), set Precision to an appropriate value.

Verification Procedure Verification Procedure on the BSC6900 Side 1. Initiate Iu and Uu interface tracing, as shown in Figure 92-1 and Figure 92-2 respectively.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

330

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

Figure 92-1 Iub interface tracing

Figure 92-2 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2. 3.

Make a UE access the network and enable the CN to send a positioning request. Over the Iu interface, you can view the Location Reporting Control and Location Report messages, as shown in Figure 92-3 and Figure 92-4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

331

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

Figure 92-3 LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

332

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

Figure 92-4 LOCATION REPORT

4.

The Uu interface tracing messages contain the information about A-GPS positioning measurement, as shown in Figure 92-5 and Figure 92-6. Figure 92-5 ue-positioning-GPS-AssistanceData

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

333

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

Figure 92-6 GPS-MeasurementParam

Verification Procedure for NodeB V200R014 1. Run the NodeB MML command DSP BRD to query the status of the USCU board and status of the GPS receiver. In the command output displayed on the LMT, check whether the USCU board and the GPS receiver are normal. Run the NodeB MML command DSP GPS to display the information of a GPS receiver, including receiver position, receiver version, receiver status, and receiver hardware information. In the command output displayed on the LMT, check whether the location of the GPS receiver is locked up and whether the operating state of the GPS receiver is normal. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC to deactivate the A-GPS location service. In this step, deselect the AGPS check box under parameter UE Positioning Method.

2.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
/*Activating A-GPS Based LCS*/ /*Operations on the BSC6900 side* //Setting the type of clock board to GCGa SET CLKTYPE:CLKTYPE=GCGa; //Setting the parameters for the SMLC algorithm SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-0&OTDOA-0&AGPS-1, AGPSMethodType=UE_ASSISTED, UeAssAgpsAssDataSwitch=REFERENCE_TIME_FOR_GPS-1&REFERENCE_LOCATION_FOR_GP S-1&DGPS_CORRECT-0&GPS_NAVGMODEL-1&GPS_IONOSPHERIC_MODEL-1&GPS_UTC_MODEL1&GPS_ALMANAC-1&GPS_ACQ_ASSIST-1&GPS_REALTIME_INTEGRITY-1,LcsWorkMode=RNC _CENTRIC; //Setting the location information parameters of the cell ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=2121, CellId=80, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=78900, AntennaLongitudeDegree=6789, AntennaAltitudeMeter=4567, MaxAntennaRange=5678, AntennaOrientation=567, AntennaOpening=456, CellAverageHeight=6789; //Setting the parameters of the GPS receiver ADD GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, AGPSRECEIVERTYPE=RNC, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

334

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS

LATITUDE=31243596, LONGITUDE=121590603, ALTITUDE=20; ADD GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=1, AGPSRECEIVERTYPE=NODEB, CellId=82, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, LATITUDE=31243596, LONGITUDE=121590603, ALTITUDE=20; //Activating the specified GPS receiver ACT GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, ACTTYPE=BOTH; /*Operations on the NodeB V200R014 side* SET CLKMODE: MODE=MANUAL, CLKSRC=GPS, SRCNO=0; ADD GPS: SN=0; MOD GPSPOS: WPOS=USER_CONFIG, LONG=160000000, LAT=80000000, ALT=900; //Deactivating A-GPS Based LCS SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_CENTER-0&CELLID_RTT-0&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

335

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones

93
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring LCS Classified Zones

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020804 LCS Classified Zones.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The core network (CN) supports this feature.

Context
This feature defines a classified zone. Once the UE enters or exits the zone, the RNC automatically reports the service area identity (SAI) of the UE.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCZ (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Area Information Configuration > Classified Zone Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a classified zone.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

336

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones

l In this step, you need to set the parameters Cn Operator Index, Location Area Code, Service Area Code, and Classified Zone ID. More than one classified zone can be set for each operator. l Before running the ADD UCZ (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Area Information Configuration > Classified Zone Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) command, ensure that Location Area Code and Service Area Code are configured at the local RNC. Otherwise, the classified zone cannot be configured.

Verification Procedure 1. Initiate Iub interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 93-1. Figure 93-1 Iub Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Enable the UE to establish a service of any type. Move the UE from cell A (whose LAC and SAC are 9513 and 272 respectively) to cell B (whose LAC and SAC are 9514 and 273 respectively), to add cell B to the active set. If a LOCATION REPORT message is displayed, this feature has been activated. If the value of the information element (IE) "Cause" in the LOCATION REPORT message is "User Restriction Start Indication", the UE enters the classified zone. The SAI of the UE is also contained in the message, as shown in Figure 93-2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

337

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

93 Configuring LCS Classified Zones

Figure 93-2 LOCATION REPORT message

3.

Remove cell B from the active set by performing a handover or Serving Radio Network Subsystem (SRNS) relocation. If a LOCATION REPORT message is displayed, this feature has been activated. If the cause value of the LOCATION REPORT message is displayed as "User Restriction End Indication", the UE exits the classified zone. The SAI of the UE is also contained in the LOCATION REPORT message.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCZ (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Area Information Configuration > Classified Zone Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the classified zone from all operators at the RNC.

----End

Example
//Activating LCS Classified Zone ADD UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, LAC=9513, SAC=272, CZ=0; ADD UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, LAC=9514, SAC=273, CZ=1; //Deactivating LCS Classified Zone RMV UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, CZ=0; RMV UCZ: CnOpIndex=0, CZ=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

338

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

94 Configuring LCS over Iur

94
Prerequisites
l l Dependencies on Hardware

Configuring LCS over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020805 LCS over Iur.

This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The following feature has been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS or WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS. l License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions. l Others Prerequisites The UE and the neighboring RNC (NRNC) support this feature. This feature is used only in RNC-CENTRIC mode.

Context
This feature enables Huawei RAN to provide location services (LCS) over the Iur interface, extending the LCS area. It enables exchange of cell information and GPS assistance information over the Iur interface.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
NOTE

In this procedure, you need to set the positioning method and add the geographical information about the cell at the RNC. For cell information exchange over the Iur interface, geographical information about a neighboring cell must be configured at the NRNC.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 339

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

94 Configuring LCS over Iur

3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set the SMLC algorithm parameters, In this step, set UE Positioning Method and Location Working Mode. 2. Configure cell information exchange over the Iur interface. a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIURCOMMSCCP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > RNC Basic Configuration > Information of IUR Common SCCP Connection; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the subrack number and slot number of the SPU subsystem that processes information exchange on the BSC6900. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USMLCCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > SMLC and IPDL > Cell SMLC Information; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameters related to cell location information. The parameters include: Cell location configuration type Geographical location information about the antenna: Cell Antenna Latitude Cell Antenna Altitude Cell Antenna Longitude Cell coverage information: Cell Antenna Max Coverage Cell Antenna Orientation Cell Antenna Opening and so on 3. Configure GPS assistance information exchange. a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UIURCOMMSCCP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > RNC Basic Configuration > Information of IUR Common SCCP Connection; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the subrack number and slot number of the SPU subsystem that processes information exchange on the BSC6900. For GPS information exchange over the Iur interface, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GPS (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Device Configuration > GPS Reference Receiver; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add a GPS receiver to the NRNC. In this step, set GPS type to NRNC_RNC(Nearby RNC), indicating that the GPS receiver is installed at the NRNC.
NOTE

b.

b.

l If a GPS receiver on the NRNC side is installed on the NodeB, set GPS type to NRNC_NODEB(NodeB in RNC). l Before adding a GPS receiver to the NRNC, ensure that the GPS receiver is installed at the NRNC. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD GPS (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Device Configuration > GPS Reference Receiver; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the GPS receiver. In this step, set GPS type to RNC(Local RNC) (when the GPS receiver is installed at the RNC) or to NODEB(Local NodeB) (when the GPS receiver is installed at the NodeB).

c.

If a GPS receiver needs to be configured on the BSC6900 side, run the BSC6900 MML command SET CLKTYPE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 340

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

94 Configuring LCS over Iur

Configuration Express > Device Configuration > Clock Board Type; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) with the type of clock board in the BSC6900 set to GCGa. d. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT GPS (CME single configuration: UMTS GLOBAL Configuration Express > Device Configuration > GPS Reference Receiver. Set GPS Active Flag to Activated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate the GPS reference receiver. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > SMLC and IPDL > Cell GPS Frame Timing; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set parameters related to UTRAN GPS cell frame timing measurement to appropriate values. In this step, set Cell ID and GPS Frame Timing Active Flag.

e.

Verification Procedure 1. Start Iur interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 94-1. Figure 94-1 Iur Interface Trace dialog box

2.

Check the information traced over the Iur interface. You can find an information exchange initiation procedure. In this procedure, the local RNC sends the NRNC an INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST message, in which the value of Information Type is GPS Information or DGPS. The NRNC sends the local RNC INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE and INFORMATION REPORT messages, which contain GPS assistance data, as shown in Figure 94-2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

341

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

94 Configuring LCS over Iur

Figure 94-2 GPS assistance data carried in the INFORMATION REPORT message

NOTE

You can see INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST and INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE messages only after the BSC6900 MML command ACT GPS is executed.

3. 4. 5.

Establish a service, and then perform a soft handover over the Iur interface. Enable the CN to send a LOCATION REPORTING CONTROL message with the cause "DIRECT". Check messages traced over the Iur interface. You can find an Information Exchange Initiation procedure. In this procedure, the local RNC sends the NRNC an INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST message, in which the value of Information Type is UTRAN Access Point Position with Altitude, as shown in Figure 94-3. The NRNC sends the local RNC an INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE message, which contains geographical information about the neighboring cell over the Iur interface, as shown in Figure 94-4.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

342

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

94 Configuring LCS over Iur

Figure 94-3 INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION REQUEST

Figure 94-4 INFORMATION EXCHANGE INITIATION RESPONSE

6.

Check messages traced over the Iur interface. You can find DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST and DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE messages, as shown in Figure 94-5 and Figure 94-6 respectively. In the former message, the value of Dedicated Measurement Type is Round Trip Time.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

343

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

94 Configuring LCS over Iur

Figure 94-5 DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION REQUEST

Figure 94-6 DEDICATED MEASUREMENT INITIATION RESPONSE

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA GPS (CME single configuration: UMTS GLOBAL Configuration Express > Device Configuration > GPS Reference Receiver. Set GPS Active Flag to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate the GPS receiver. Alternatively, run the BSC6900 MML command RMV GPS (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Device Configuration > GPS Reference Receiver; CME batch
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 344

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

94 Configuring LCS over Iur

modification center: not supported) to remove the GPS receiver from the NRNC. GPS information exchange over the Iur interface is thereby disabled. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UIURCOMMSCCP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > RNC Basic Configuration > Information of IUR Common SCCP Connection; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate LCS over Iur.

----End

Example
/*Activating LCS over Iur*/ //Setting the positioning method SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_RTT-1&OTDOA-0&AGPS-0; /*Configuring cell information exchange over the Iur interface*/ ADD UIURCOMMSCCP: SRN=0, SN=1; ADD USMLCCELL: RNCId=29, CellId=1, CellLocCfgType=CELL_ANTENNA, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, AntennaLatitudeDegree=31245560, AntennaLongitudeDegree=121588234, AntennaAltitudeMeter=20, MaxAntennaRange=2000, AntennaOrientation=0, AntennaOpening=1200; CellAverageHeight=25; /*Configuring GPS assistance information exchange.*/ ADD UIURCOMMSCCP: SRN=0, SN=1; ADD GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, AGPSRECEIVERTYPE=NRNC_RNC, RNCID=1, GCDF=DEG, MTRLGY=MET, LATITUDE=31245560, LONGITUDE=121588230, ALTITUDE=21; SET CLKTYPE: CLKTYPE=GCGa; ACT GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0, ACTTYPE=BOTH; ADD UCELLGPSFRMTIMING: CellId=1, StartFlag=ACTIVE; //Deactivating LCS over Iur RMV GPS: AGPSRECEIVERID=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

345

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service

95
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020807 Iupc Interface for LCS service.

Dependencies on Hardware IP interface boards of the BSC6900 support this feature. A Stand-Alone SMLC (SAS) is configured. Dependencies on Other Features The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-020801 Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS has been configured if the operator employs the Cell ID+RTT algorithm. WRFD-020803 A-GPS Based LCS has been configured if the operator employs the A-GPS algorithm.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The UE supports at least one of the following positioning methods: UE-assisted CELLID+RTT UE-based A-GPS UE-assisted A-GPS The global data is configured by performing the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4. Configuring the Basic Data Configuring the OSP and DSP Configuring the Area Information Configuring the M3UA Local and Destination Entities

Physical layer data and data link layer data are configured by performing the following procedure:
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 346

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service

1. 2. 3. 4.

Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the FG2a/FG2c/GOUa/ GOUc Board Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the PEUa Board Configuring the Physical Layer and Data Link Layer for the POUa/POUc Board Configuring the User Plane of the Iub Interface (over ATM)

Context
Only IP transmission can be applied between the BSC6900 and the SAS. The transport network layer data on the Iupc interface needs to be configured at the BSC6900. When the BSC6900 is connected to multiple SASs through IP transmission, you need to configure this feature on each Iupc interface. One BSC6900 can be connected to a maximum of four SASs simultaneously.
NOTE

Before configuring the Iupc interface data, familiarize yourself with Protocol Structure and Links on the Iupc Interface.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD N7DPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Signaling Configuration > DSP Of DPU; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the destination signaling point (DSP) data that corresponds to the SAS. Run the BSC6900 MML commands ADD M3LE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Signaling Configuration > M3UA Local Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) and ADD M3DE (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Signaling Configuration > M3UA Destination Entity; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the M3UA local entity (M3LE) and the M3UA destination entity (M3DE) that correspond to the SAS respectively. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD SCTPLNK (CME single configuration: IUPC Configuration Express > IP Transport > SCTP Link; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an SCTP link. To add multiple SCTP links, run this command for each SCTP link to be added. If Signalling link mode is set to Server at the SAS, set Signalling link mode to CLIENT at the BSC6900. If Signalling link mode is set to CLIENT at the SAS, set Signalling link mode to Server at the BSC6900. Set Application type to M3UA. 4. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LKS (CME single configuration: IUPC Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link set. If Local entity type is set to M3UA_IPSP, set Work mode of the M3UA link set to M3UA_IPSP. If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP and Destination entity type is set to M3UA_SP, set Work mode to M3UA_IPSP. If Local entity type is set to M3UA_ASP and Destination entity type is not set to M3UA_SP, set Work mode to M3UA_ASP.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 347

2.

3.

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

95 Configuring Iupc Interface for LCS Service

5.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3RT (CME single configuration: IUPS Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Route; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA route. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD M3LNK (CME single configuration: IUPC Configuration Express > IP Transport > M3UA Link Set; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add an M3UA link. To add more M3UA links, run this command repeatedly. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD USAS (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Radio Basic Data Configuration > Stand-alone SMLC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to add the SAS. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET USMLC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Location Service Parameter Configuration > SMLC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable SAS-CENTRIC positioning based on CELLID + RTT or AGPS. For details, see 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS or 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS. Perform the verification procedures by referring to 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS or 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS. Perform the deactivation procedures by referring to 90 Configuring Cell ID + RTT Function Based LCS or 92 Configuring A-GPS Based LCS.

6.

7.

8.

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating Iupc Interface for LCS Service //Adding the DSP data that corresponds to the SAS ADD N7DPC:DPX=4, SPDF=WNF, DPC=8345, STP=OFF, SLSMASK=B0000, NEIGHBOR=YES, NAME="SAS", DPCT=IUPC, PROT=ITUT, BEARTYPE=M3UA, SPX=4; //Adding the M3LE that corresponds to the SAS ADD M3LE:LENO=0, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=4294967295, NAME="IUPC", SPX=4; //Adding the M3DE that correspond to the SAS ADD M3DE:DENO=0, LENO=0, DPX=4, ENTITYT=M3UA_IPSP, RTCONTEXT=4294967295, NAME="IUPC"; //Adding an SCTP link ADD SCTPLNK: SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, MODE=SERVER, APP=M3UA, LOCIP1="10.10.10.10", PEERIP1="10.10.11.11", PEERPN=3000, LOGPORTFLAG=NO, VLANFLAG1=DISABLE, VLANFlAG2=DISABLE, SWITCHBACKFLAG=YES; //Adding an M3UA link set ADD M3LKS: SIGLKSX=0, DENO=0, NAME="IUPC"; //Adding an M3UA route ADD M3RT: DENO=0, SIGLKSX=0, NAME="IUPC"; //Adding an M3UA link ADD M3LNK: SIGLKSX=0, SIGLNKID=0, SRN=0, SN=0, SCTPLNKN=0, NAME="IUPC"; //Adding the SAS ADD USAS: CnOpIndex=0, SasId=0, Dpx=4; //Setting SMLC-related parameters SET USMLC: SmlcMethod=CELLID_RTT-1, AGPSMethodType=UE_ASSISTED, LcsWorkMode=SAS_CENTRIC;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

348

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

96 Configuring Push to Talk

96
Prerequisites
l l Dependencies on Hardware

Configuring Push to Talk

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020134 Push to Talk. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package, WRFD-010688 Enhanced CELL_FACH, and WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA. l License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.
NOTE

The license must be activated by performing the following operation first: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET LICENSE to set Push To Talk (per PTT Active User) to an appropriate value.

Other Prerequisites This feature requires support from the UE and CN.

Context
This feature is a part of the end-to-end push to talk (PTT) solution. Implementation of the PTT solution requires support from the UE, RAN, CN, and PTT server. Huawei RAN can identify PTT services and implement techniques to reduce the delay in setting up calls of PTT services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

349

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

96 Configuring Push to Talk

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, select the CFG_PTT_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel Configuration Strategy Switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC. In this step, set PTT ARP Priority, PTT ARP Preemption Capability, PTT ARP Preemption Vulnerability, and PTT ARP Queuing Allowed to the same values as those of ARP (allocation/retention priority) properties Priority Level, Preemption Capability, Preemption Vulnerability, and Queuing Allowed. The ARP properties are carried in the RNCAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message sent by the CN for PTT services during the second RAB assignment procedure. In addition, set PTT HSUPA TTI type to EDCH_TTI_10ms. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH to turn on the switches PTT_EARLY_TRANS_SWITCH and PTT_SPEC_LI_SWITCH. In this step, clear the PTT_EARLY_TRANS_SWITCH_OFF and PTT_SPEC_LI_SWITCH_OFF check boxes under the parameter Process switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH to enable PTT UEs to switch to the DCH for access reattempts when HSPA resources are insufficient. In this step, select the RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT19 check box under the parameter CORRM Algorithm Reserved Switch 0. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, select HSUPA(UL_EDCH,DL_DCH) from the Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB drop-down list. Initiate Iu-interface message tracing on the BSC6900 LMT and check whether the CN has sent an RNCAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message.
NOTE

2.

3.

4.

5.

Verification Procedure 1.

The RNC identifies PTT services based on six information elements (IEs) in the RNCAP_RAB_ASSIGNMENT_REQ message. The six IEs are Traffic Class, Signaling Indication, Priority Level, Preemption Capability, Preemption Vulnerability, and Queuing Allowed. Services identified as PTT services are allocated a rate of 8 kbit/s.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH. In this step, clear the CFG_PTT_SWITCH check box under the parameter Channel Configuration Strategy Switch.

----End

Example
//Activating Push to Talk SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:CfgSwitch=CFG_PTT_SWITCH-1; SET UFRC:PTTArpPriorityLevel=1, PTTArpPreEmptCap=TRIGGER, PTTArpPreEmptVuln=NOT_PRE_EMPTABLE, PTTArpQueuingAllowed=ALLOWED, PTTHsupaTti=EDCH_TTI_10ms; SET URRCTRLSWITCH:PROCESSSWITCH=PTT_EARLY_TRANS_SWITCH_OFF-0&PTT_SPEC_LI_SWIT CH_OFF-0; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:ReservedSwitch0=RESERVED_SWITCH_0_BIT19-1; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA:SrbChlType=HSUPA; //Deactivating Push to Talk SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH:CfgSwitch=CFG_PTT_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

350

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package

97
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

Dependencies on Hardware The NBBI and the NULP do not support this feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The UE should have HSUPA capability.

Context
This feature enables the system to process HSUPA services, therefore increasing the uplink rate and system throughput. It provides basic functions of HSUPA.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to add HSUPA functions of a cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell. Set Cell HSUPA state to Activated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to activate the HSUPA function of the cell.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 351

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package

3.

Configure Iub transport for HSUPA. In an ATM network: a. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure new records of ATM traffic based on network planning requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping) to query the transmission resource mapping. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set associated parameters according to the network plan. TX traffic record index and RX traffic record index of the AAL2 path to be added must be the same as those set in the ADD ATMTRF (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > ATM Traffic Record; CME batch modification center: not supported) command. In addition, AAL2 Path Type should be set according to the mapping between service types and AAL paths. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > AAL2Path > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure an AAL2 path for HSDPA based on network planning requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ADJMAP (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > Adjacent Node Mapping) to query whether resource management mapping is configured for the adjacent node. If configured, check the TRMMAP index of the adjacent node. If not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping) to query the default TRMMAP ID used by the adjacent node based on the settings of Interface Type and Transport Type. For example, if Interface Type is set to Iub Interface, then TRMMAP ID is 1. b. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping) to check whether the IP path mapping to the HSDPA service is configured according to the TRMMAP ID used by the adjacent node. If configured, no further action is required. If not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the IP path mapping to the HSUPA service.

b.

c.

d.

In an IP network: a.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

352

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

97 Configuring HSUPA Introduction Package

To ensure that HSUPA services can be set up successfully, HSUPA services must be mapped to the corresponding AAL2 paths or IP paths. To avoid the affect on ongoing services, you can add new AAL2 paths or IP paths.

Verification Procedure 1. Ensure that the HSUPA function of the cell is activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to verify that the HSUPA function of the cell is activated. Establish a PS service. The IE E-DCH FDD information in the RL SETUP message on the Iub interface and the IE rb-mappinginfo in the RRC_RB_SETUP message on the Uu interface should indicate that the service has been set up and carried on the E-DCH.

2.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell. Set Cell HSUPA state to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to deactivate the HSUPA function of the cell. Run the BSC6900 MML command RMV UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: not supported) to remove the HSUPA functions of a cell.

2.

----End

Example
//Activating HSUPA Introduction Package ADD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111; ACT UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111; //Verifying HSUPA Introduction Package DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=111; //Deactivating HSUPA Introduction Package DEA UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111; RMV UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

353

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control

98

Configuring HSUPA Admission Control


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061202 HSUPA Admission Control.

Prerequisites
l l Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated. l License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables HSUPA and R99 services to simultaneously access the network by using the remaining uplink cell load and other resources, improving the utilization of system resources and ensuring QoS of admitted users.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Activating Power Resource Admission a. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select an uplink Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm through the parameter Uplink CAC algorithm switch and a downlink CAC algorithm through the parameter Downlink CAC algorithm switch. For HSUPA services, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 354

b.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control

batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the corresponding admission algorithm switches from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list, such as HSUPA_PBR_MEAS(HSUPA PBR Meas Algorithm), HSUPA_EDCH_RSEPS_MEAS(HSUPA EDCH RSEPS Meas Algorithm), and HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSUPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm). c. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set power resource admission parameters.

2.

Activating NodeB Credit Resource Admission a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set CAC algorithm switch to NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH(NodeB Credit CAC Switch). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell CAC algorithm switch to CRD_ADCTRL(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) to turn on the cell-oriented credit resource admission switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set the NodeB credit resource admission parameters Ul handover credit reserved SF and Dl handover credit and code reserved SF to appropriate values.

b.

c.

3.

Activating Iub Resource Admission Iub resource admission is unconditionally performed and does not need to be activated.
NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify the Iub bandwidth.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. UE1 and UE2 are in idle state and camp on CELL_A11. CELL_A11 supports HSUPA. On the HLR, set the PS service type to background or interactive. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the maximum number of HSUPA users supported by CELL_A11 to 1. Establish an HSUPA PS service on UE1, and then check the rb-mappinginfo information element in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface. The value of ul-TrCH-Type is e-dch.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 355

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control

5.

Establish an HSUPA PS service on UE2, and then check the rb-mappinginfo information element in the RRC_RB_SETUP message traced over the Uu interface. The value of rrc-Stateinditator is CELL_DCH. Release all PS services. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set Maximum HSUPA user number of CELL_A11 to 20. Establish an HSUPA PS service on UE1 and UE2 respectively. Expected result: An HSUPA PS service is successfully established on UE1 and UE2 respectively.

6. 7. 8.

9.

Run the following command to check whether Iub resource admission is activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP IPPATH or DSP AAL2PATH to check whether any bandwidth is occupied.

Deactivation Procedure 1. To disable Power Resource Admission, do as follows: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the cell-oriented power resource admission switches (Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch) to ALGORITHM_OFF. 2. To disable NodeB Credit Resource Admission, do as follows: a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the NodeB credit resource admission switch NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH(NodeB Credit CAC Switch) from the CAC algorithm switch drop-down list. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the cell-oriented credit resource admission switch CRD_ADCTRL(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) from the Cell CAC algorithm switch drop-down list.

b.

3.

Deactivating Iub Resource Admission Iub resource admission is unconditionally performed and does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-1&HSUPA_PBR_MEAS-1&HSUPA_EDCH_RSEPS_MEAS -1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, MaxUlTxPowerforConv=24, MaxUlTxPowerforInt=24, MaxHsupaUserNum=20;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

356

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

98 Configuring HSUPA Admission Control

//Activating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlHoCeResvSf=SF16, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SF32; //Deactivating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF; //Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-0; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

357

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control

99
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSUPA Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061203 HSUPA Power Control.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature increases the system power efficiency, reduces the uplink and downlink interference, and improves the system capacity by controlling the power on HSUPA physical channels.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set E-AGCH HPC Parameters, E-RGCH HPC Parameters for Service Radio Links Set, and E-HICH HPC Parameters for Service Radio Links Set to YES. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set E-AGCH
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 358

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control

HPC Mode, E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links Set, and E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links Set to FOLLOW_TPC. 3. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set E-AGCH Power Offset(0.25dB), E-RGCH Power Offset for Service Radio Links Set (0.25dB), E-HICH Power Offset for Service Radio Links Set(0.25dB), and EHICH Power Offset for Single Radio Link(0.25dB) to appropriate values according to the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB HSUPA Power Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to modify power control parameters related to HSUPA services. In this step, set E-RGCH 2-Index-Step Threshold to 9 and ERGCH 3-Index-Step Threshold to 12. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UTYPRABOLPC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Typical Service Configuration > Typical RAB OLPC Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, change the number of target retransmissions for large and small retransmissions related to HSUPA services according to the network plan. On the BSC6900 LMT, open the Monitor page. Then, double-click Connection Performance Monitoring under UMTS Monitoring. In the displayed dialog box, select OLPC and specify the IMSI. Use an HSUPA-capable UE to set up a PS service over the enhanced DCH (E-DCH). Move the UE between the cell center and the cell edge. View the monitor items related to the number of E-DCH retransmissions in the OLPC area. The values of the monitor items change with UE movement. View the power change on each HSUPA channel. If static power control is used, the channel power remains unchanged. If dynamic power control is used: When the UE is moving away from the antenna, the transmit power of the EAGCH increases. When the UE is moving towards the antenna, the transmit power of the EAGCH decreases. l Deactivation Procedure 1. ----End This feature does not need to be deactivated.

4.

5.

Verification Procedure 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

Example
//Activating HSUPA Power Control //Setting the power control mode SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=111, EAGCHPCPARA=YES, SERGCHPCPARA=YES, SEHICHPCPARA=YES; SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=111, EAGCHPCMOD=FOLLOW_TPC, SERGCHPCMOD=FOLLOW_TPC, SEHICHPCMOD=FOLLOW_TPC; SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=111, EAGCHPWROFFSET=142, SERGCHPWROFFSET=100,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

359

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


SEHICHPWROFFSET=96, SRLEHICHPWROFFSET=88;

99 Configuring HSUPA Power Control

//Modifying power control parameters related to HSUPA services MOD UTYPRABHSUPAPC: RabIndex=48, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_2MS, Ul16QamInd=FALSE, UlL2EnhanceInd=FALSE, EdPwrInterpolationInd=FALSE, ERgch2IndStpThs=9, ERgch3IndStpThs=12, UlEcBoostingInd=FALSE; //Changing the number of target retransmissions for large and small retransmissions related to HSUPA services MOD UTYPRABOLPC: RabIndex=48, SubflowIndex=0, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_2MS, DelayClass=1, EdchTargetLittleRetransNum=12, EdchTargetLargeRetransNum=20;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

360

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

100 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management

100
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061204 HSUPA Mobility Management.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables an HSUPA-capable UE to be handed over to an R99 cell or another HSUPA cell. This feature also enables an HSUPA-capable UE to change cells with a small probability of service interruption.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. The methods of activating intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT handovers are the same for HSUPA users and R99 users. For the activation procedures for configuring HSUPA Mobility Management, see the following sections: 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover 236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage 237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 361

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

100 Configuring HSUPA Mobility Management

269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage 270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS 275 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service 276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load 2. 3. ----End Verification Procedure None. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

362

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC

101
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSUPA DCCC

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061208 HSUPA DCCC.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
HSUPA DCCC can dynamically adjust the minimum spreading factor (SF) code of HSUPA based on the user throughput and flexibly switch the UE state based on the user traffic, which improves the Channel Element (CE) resource utilization and system efficiency.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch drop-down list. Optional: If the NodeB does not enable dynamic CE, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNODEBALGOPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > NodeB Basic Information > NodeB Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.16 Modifying Logical
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 363

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC

3.

NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HSUPA Credit Consume Type to MBR. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDCCC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Dynamic Channel Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented DCCC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH from the HSUPA DCCC Strategy drop-down list so that the data rate of HSUPA services on the EDCH can increase or decrease.
NOTE

After the preceding optional step is performed, the data rate of HSUPA services on the EDCH can increase or decrease as required. If the data rate of HSUPA services on the EDCH is expected to increase only, select RATE_UP_ONLY_ON_EDCH from the HSUPA DCCC Strategy dropdown list.

4.

Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Dynamic Channel Control Parameter Configuration > HSUPA Rate Adjust Set; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HSUPA Uplink Rate Adjust Set to a data rate set for rate adjustment by the HSUPA DCCC algorithm.
NOTE

The preceding optional step sets the available data rate set of the HSUPA DCCC algorithm. After the step is performed, HSUPA services can be of any data rate in the data rate set by using the HSUPA DCCC algorithm.

Verification Procedure 1. On the BSC6900 LMT, display the Monitor page. In the Monitor Navigation Tree, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring. Select UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth respectively from the Monitor Item drop-down list to create two monitoring tasks. 2. Make the UE establish an HSUPA Best Effort (BE) service. After the service is established, layer 3 of the RNC sends an uplink throughput measurement control message to layer 2. 3. Upload a large file for a period of time. Then, view the RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface and check that the data rate increases. In UL Throughput Bandwidth of Connection Performance Monitoring, the bandwidth increases. 4. Stop the data upload and wait for a period of time. Then, view the RRC_RB_RECFG message on the Uu interface and check that the data rate decreases. In UL Throughput Bandwidth of Connection Performance Monitoring, the bandwidth decreases. Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH from the Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch drop-down list.

----End

Example
//Activating HSUPA DCCC SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

364

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

101 Configuring HSUPA DCCC

MOD UNODEBALGOPARA: NodeBName="NodeB1", HsupaCeConsumeSelection=MBR; SET UDCCC: HsupaDcccStg=RATE_UP_AND_DOWN_ON_EDCH; SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET: EdchRateAdjustSet=RATE_8KBPS-0&RATE_16KBPS-0&RATE_32KBPS-0&RATE_64KBPS-0& RATE_128KBPS-1&RATE_144KBPS-0&RATE_256KBPS-1&RATE_384KBPS-0&RATE_608KBPS1&RATE_1280KBPS-0&RATE_2048KBPS-0&RATE_2720KBPS-0&RATE_5440KBPS-0&RATE_11 480KBPS-0; //Deactivating HSUPA DCCC SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch= DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

365

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

102 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell

102
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061211 20 HSUPA Users per Cell.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables a single HSUPA cell to serve a maximum of 20 HSUPA users simultaneously. After the maximum is reached, the cell attempts to establish services on DCHs to accommodate additional users.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSDPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) and HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSUPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) from the drop-down list of Cell CAC algorithm switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 366

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

102 Configuring 20 HSUPA Users per Cell

Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Maximum HSUPA user number to 20. l Verification Procedure 1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Monitor. Then, double-click Cell Performance Monitoring in the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. In the displayed Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to Cell User Number. Use UEs to access the cell one by one. Then, make UEs establish PS services, for example, upload files through FTP. Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully. If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 20, uplink services are carried on HSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels. If the number of UEs is greater than 20, HSPA services of the excessive UEs are carried on R99 channels. 3. View the maximum number of users indicated by the counter VS.HSUPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000.
NOTE

2.

The 20 HSUPA users referred to in this feature are of the SRB Over HSPA type.

Deactivation Procedure 1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
/*Activation procedure*/ //Disabling the admission control function in an HSPA cell on the Uu interface MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=111, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-0&HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL-0; //Setting the maximum number of HSUPA users supported by the cell to 20 MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsupaUserNum=20;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

367

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion

103
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow

Control in Case of Iub Congestion

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061212 HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

License This feature is not under license control.

Context
By monitoring Iub transmission resources, this feature dynamically adjusts the uplink Uu throughput and thereby greatly improves resource utilization.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH check box under the parameter PROCESSSWITCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > DPU Data Configuration > DPU Configuration Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HsupaTnlSwitch to ON(ON).

2.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 368

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

103 Configuring HSUPA Iub Flow Control in Case of Iub Congestion

l UE is in idle mode and supports the HSUPA and HSDPA functions. l The bandwidth between the BSC6900 and the NodeB is 1 MHz.

1.

UE is of HSUPA category 5 and is correctly registered at the HLR. That is, traffic class is set to background, the maximum bit rates are set to UL 2048 kbit/s and DL 7200 kbit/s. On the BSC6900 LMT, start Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth. The uplink throughput of UE is stable and is about 1M. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UDPUCFGDATA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > DPU Data Configuration > DPU Configuration Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HsupaTnlSwitch to OFF(OFF).

2. 3. l 1.

Deactivation Procedure

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1; SET UDPUCFGDATA: HsupaTnlSwitch=ON; //Deactivation procedure SET UDPUCFGDATA: HsupaTnlSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

369

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

104 Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)

104
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061401 HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH).

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables the RAN to use the channel quality indicator (CQI) and HS-SCCH information reported by UEs as a reference, therefore effectively reducing the power consumption of the E-AGCH.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Mac-e parameters with the following parameter settings: E-AGCH HPC Parameters is set to YES(YES). E-AGCH HPC Mode is set to CQI_BASED(Tx Pwr Ctr based on CQI) or HSSCCH_BASED(Tx Pwr Ctr based on HS-SCCH).
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 370

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

104 Configuring HSUPA E-AGCH Power Control (Based on CQI or HS-SCCH)

E-AGCH Power Offset(0.25dB), E-AGCH Max Power(0.1dB), and E-AGCH Min Power(0.1dB) are set to values that comply with the data plan. l Verification Procedure 1. 2. Use an HSUPA-capable UE to perform PS services over the E-DCH. Move the UE and observe power changes on each channel carrying HSUPA services. Expected result: When the UE moves away from the antenna, the transmit power of the E-AGCH increases. When the UE moves towards the antenna, the transmit power of the E-AGCH decreases. l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set E-AGCH HPC Parameters to NO(NO).

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET MACEPARA: SCHEDULEPARA=NO, EAGCHPCPARA=YES, EAGCHPCMOD=CQI_BASED, EAGCHPWROFFSET=100, MAXAGCHPOWER=100, MINAGCHPOWER=-200, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; //Deactivation procedure SET MACEPARA: SCHEDULEPARA=NO, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

371

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI

105
Prerequisites
l

Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061403 HSUPA 2ms TTI.

Dependencies on Hardware Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware This feature does not depend on the BSC6900 hardware. Dependencies on NodeB Hardware The BTS3812E, BTS3812A and BTS3812AE need to configure EBBI board, EBOI board, EDLP or EDLPd board. The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

Dependencies on Other Features The following features have been configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The UE should have the capability of HSUPA Category 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9.

Context
This feature enables a single user to obtain a higher uplink throughput and a shorter delay.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 372

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI

Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Rate Threshold of Streaming Services on 2ms TTI of HSUPA and Ratethreshold of BE on 2ms TTI of HSUPA to appropriate values based on the network plan. Configure SRB over HSPA by referring to 119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA. Optional: If the single-user peak-rate improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI is to be enabled, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > the connection-oriented algorithm parameters of an RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the PERFENH_HSUPA_TTI2_ENHANCE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Performance Enhancement Switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to verify that the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box is selected. Use an HSPA-capable UE to establish an HSUPA service. If the RRC_RB_SETUP message shown in Figure 105-1 is traced on the Uu interface, an HSUPA service with 2 ms TTI has been set up on the E-DCH. Figure 105-1 HSUPA service with 2 ms TTI carried on the E-DCH

3. 4.

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch. Optional: If the single-user peak-rate improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI is to be deactivated, Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > the connection-oriented algorithm parameters of an RNC; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 373

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

105 Configuring HSUPA 2ms TTI

PERFENH_HSUPA_TTI2_ENHANCE_SWITCH check box under the parameter Performance Enhancement Switch. ----End

Example
//Activating HSUPA 2ms TTI SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1; SET UFRC: StreamHsupa2msTtiRateThs=D64, BeHsupa2msTtiRateThs=D64; //Configuring SRB over HSPA SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSPA; //Configuring single-user peak-rate improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI SET UCORRMPARA: PerfEnhanceSwitch=PERFENH_HSUPA_TTI2_ENHANCE_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating HSUPA 2ms TTISET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-0; //Deactivating single-user peak-rate improvement algorithm of HSUPA 2 ms TTI SET UCORRMPARA: PerfEnhanceSwitch=PERFENH_HSUPA_TTI2_ENHANCE_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

374

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover

106
Prerequisites
l

Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061404 HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover.

Dependencies on Hardware Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware This feature does not depend on the BSC6900 hardware. Dependencies on NodeB Hardware The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, or BTS3812AE is configured with the EBBI, EBOI, EULP, or EULPd board. The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb ,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 has been configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables smooth handovers for HSUPA users between 2 ms TTI capable cells and 10 ms TTI capable cells, aiming to maximize HSUPA resource utilization. When this feature is used, the factors such as the radio environment, CE resource usage, and user throughput rate are considered. This feature contains three functions: Dynamic TTI Adjustment for a Single Voice Service over HSUPA, Differentiation-based Dynamic TTI Adjustment for a Single BE Service over HSUPA, and Admission-CE-based Dynamic TTI Adjustment for a Single BE Service over HSUPA.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 375

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

106 Configuring HSUPA 2 ms/10 ms TTI Handover

Procedure
l l l Activation Procedure This feature is license controlled. It takes effect after its license is activated. Verification Procedure This feature does not need to be verified. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

376

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User

107
Prerequisites
l

Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061405 HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User.

Dependencies on Hardware Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on NodeB Hardware The BTS3812E , BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EBBI, EBOI, EULP or EULPd board, the downlink services can only be set up on EBBI, EBOI, EDLP. For BBU3806, the downlink services can only be set up on EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3900 should be configured with the WBBPb ,WBBPd or WBBPf board.

Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA has been configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites CN support the uplink speed of 5.74 Mbit/s (or more) . The UE is of HSUPA category 6, 7, 8, or 9.

Context
This feature enables the HSUPA rate at the MAC layer to reach a maximum of 5.74 Mbit/s.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

377

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD TRMMAP (CME single configuration: UMTS Global Configuration Express > Transmission Resources Configuration > Transport Resource Mapping; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure the TRM mapping table based on the network plan. The TRM mapping table contains the mapping relationship between the transmission mode and the service type.
NOTE

The BSC6900 provides a default TRM mapping table. Use an appropriate mapping policy when configuring the TRM mapping table. For example, if Transport Type is set to ATM, all HSUPA services, including signaling services, must be carried by AAL2PATH that supports HSUPA services.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable HSUPA services to use the 2 ms TTI. In this step, set Service Mapping Strategy Switch to MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable SRBs to be carried on HSUPA channels. In this step, set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to HSUPA(UL_EDCH,DL_DCH). Use an HSPA-capable UE to establish a PS service on the E-DCH and HS-DSCH. Start Uu interface tracing on the BSC6900 LMT. The RRC_RB_SETUP message shows that the 2 ms TTI is used in the uplink and the maximum channelization code IE is 2SF2+2SF4. The real-time monitoring result of UL Throughput & Bandwidth on the BSC6900 side shows that the bandwidth is 5440 kbit/s and that upload through FTP is normal. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to prohibit the 2 ms TTI from being used on HSUPA channels. In this step, deselect the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the Service Mapping Strategy Switch parameter. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to prohibit SRBs from being carried on HSPA channels. In this step, set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH).

3.

Verification Procedure 1. 2.

3. l

Deactivation Procedure 1.

2.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

378

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

107 Configuring HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User

Example
//Activating HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-1; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSUPA; //Deactivating HSUPA 5.74Mbps per User SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH-0; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=DCH;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

379

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

108 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA

108
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010632 Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature allows PS streaming services to be carried on E-DCHs, thereby increasing the utilization of cell resources.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 380

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

108 Configuring Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA

UL streaming traffic threshold on HSUPA to an appropriate value. The default value is 256 kbit/s. l Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH. Ensure that the MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch is selected. Use the UE to establish a PS service. Expected result: The traffic type in the RAB assignment message is streaming, and the RB setup message traced on the Uu interface indicates that the PS service is established on an E-DCH. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch.

2. 3.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH-1; SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: UlStrThsOnHsupa=D256; //Deactivating Streaming Traffic Class on HSUPA SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: MapSwitch=MAP_PS_STREAM_ON_HSUPA_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

381

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

109 Configuring HSUPA over Iur

109
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSUPA over Iur

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010635 HSUPA over Iur.

Dependencies on Hardware The neighboring RNC supports this feature. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The neighboring RNC must support HSUPA over Iur too.

Context
This feature enables HSUPA services to be carried on the Iur interface so that continuous HSUPA services can be provided for UEs moving between BSC6900s.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UEXT3GCELL (CME single configuration: Object Group > UMTS Service Configuration and Maintenance Management > External Cell Configuration > RNC 3G External Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.19 Modifying RNC External Cell Parameters in Batches) to configure a neighboring RNC's cell with the E-DCH function. In this step, set Cell Capability Container to an appropriate value. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported) to configure data about the neighboring RNC. In
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 382

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

109 Configuring HSUPA over Iur

this step, set Hsupa cap ind over IUR for NRNC to ON to enable HSUPA services to be carried on the Iur interface. l Verification Procedure 1. Verify that the feature HSUPA over Iur has been activated by performing the following operations: Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UNRNC to query the configuration of the neighboring RNC. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UEXT3GCELL to query the configuration of the neighboring RNC's cell. 2. Verify that an HSUPA service has been established on the Iur interface by performing the following operations: Configure the neighboring RNC and its cell with the HSUPA function. Establish an HSUPA service under the serving RNC. Add a cross-Iur soft handover link. If the RNSAP_RL_SETUP_REQ message traced on the Iur interface contains HSUPA-related information elements, an HSUPA service has been set up successfully. l Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UNRNC (CME single configuration: IUR Configuration Express > Neighbouring RNC > Neighboring RNC; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Hsupa cap ind over IUR for NRNC to OFF.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure MOD UEXT3GCELL: NRncId=2, CellId=2, CellCapContainerFdd=EDCH_SUPPORT-1&EDCH_2SF4_SUPPORT-1&EDCH_HARQ_IR_COMBI N_SUPPORT-1; MOD UNRNC: NRncId=2, SHOTRIG=CS_SHO_SWITCH-1&HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1&NON_HSPA_SHO_SWITCH-1, ServiceInd=SUPPORT_CS_AND_PS, IurExistInd=TRUE, TnlBearerType=IP_TRANS, Dpx=2, IurHsupaSuppInd=ON; //Deactivation procedure MOD UNRNC: NRncId=1, IurHsupaSuppInd=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

383

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

110
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010690 TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010614 HSUPA Phase 2 has been configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature dynamically adjusts transmission time intervals (TTIs) based on UE transmit power and uplink service throughput. The TTI of UEs in the cell center is switched to 2 ms to increase the service rate, whereas the TTI of UEs at the cell edge is switched to 10 ms to expand the coverage.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn on the switch for this feature. In this step, select the DRA_DCCC_SWITCH and the DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 384

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

2.

Optional: If the Uplink Enhanced L2 feature is used, run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.
NOTE

DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH can be selected only when DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH has been selected.

Verification Procedure 1. In the Navigation Tree pane on the BSC6900 LMT, click the Trace tab. In the displayed Trace Navigation Tree pane, double-click UMTS Services. On the unfolded list, double-click Uu Interface Trace. In the displayed Uu Interface Trace dialog box, select RRC_RB_SETUP and RRC_RB_RECFG to trace Uu interface signaling messages, as shown in Figure 110-1. Figure 110-1 Uu Interface Trace dialog box

2. 3.

Adjust the distance between the UE and the NodeB to trigger a switching of the TTI from 2 ms to 10 ms. Analyze the traced messages shown in Figure 110-2 and Figure 110-3. The TTI has switched from 2 ms to 10 ms.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

385

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

Figure 110-2 2 ms TTI

Figure 110-3 10 ms TTI

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the switch for this feature. In this step, deselect the DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH check box under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

----End
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 386

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

110 Configuring TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage

Example
//Activating TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage //Turning on the switch for the feature TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_INIT_SEL_SWITCH-1 ; //Turning on the switch for TTI L2+ for BE services based on coverage SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_L2_OPT_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage //Turning off the switch for the feature TTI Switch for BE Services Based on Coverage SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_BASE_COVER_BE_TTI_RECFG_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

387

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission

111
Prerequisites
l

Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission.

Dependencies on Hardware Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on NodeB Hardware The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EBBI, EBOI, EULP or EULPd board. The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
Considering cell uplink power load, CE resources, and limited uplink coverage, this feature enables the BTS to adjust the target number of uplink retransmissions to increase the throughput per user and cell uplink capacity.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. To enable the message containing NodeB private interface data to be transmitted to the NodeB over the Iub interface, run the BSC6900 MML command SET
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 388

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission

URRCTRLSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Process Switch Configuration > Process Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Process switch to NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH from the Power Control Switch drop-down list to activate HSUPA Adaptive Transmission. Run the NodeB MML command SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > ADPRETRANSSWTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to activate HSUPA Adaptive Transmission on the NodeB side. Enable the UE to establish an HSUPA BE service. Then, check whether the NBAP_RL_RECFG_PREP message over the Iub interface carries the target number of HSUPA adaptive retransmissions, as shown in Figure 111-1. Figure 111-1 IE information

3.

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH from the Power Control Switch drop-down list to deactivate HSUPA Adaptive Transmission. Run the NodeB MML command SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > ADPRETRANSSWTCH; CME batch modification center: not supported) to deactivate HSUPA Adaptive Transmission on the NodeB side.

2.

----End

Example
//Activating HSUPA Adaptive Transmission (BSC6900 MML command) SET URRCTRLSWITCH: PROCESSSWITCH=NODEB_PRIVATE_INTERFACE_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

389

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

111 Configuring HSUPA Adaptive Transmission

SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH-1; //Activating HSUPA Adaptive Retransmission (NodeB MML command) SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH: SWITCH =OPEN; //Deactivating HSUPA Adaptive Transmission (BSC6900 MML command) SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_HARQNUM_AUTO_ADJUST_SWITCH-0; //Deactivating HSUPA Adaptive Retransmission (NodeB MML command) SET ADPRETRANSSWTCH: SWITCH=CLOSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

390

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management

112
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010638 Dynamic CE Resource Management.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
To improve utilization efficiency of channel element (CE) resources, Huawei RAN introduces the Dynamic CE Resource Management feature. This feature helps to quickly adjust CE allocation by considering the Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) and the actual rate of a UE. During preemption of CE resources, this feature is used to allocate CE resources in a reasonable way, therefore ensuring preemption fairness.

Procedure
l l Activation Procedure 1. 1. The feature does not need to be activated. Start Tracing Messages on the Iub Interface on BSC6900 LMT and check whether the value of dynamic-CE-Switch-Private in NBAP_AUDIT_RSP is 1. If the value is 1, it indicates the feature is activated. Else, it indicates the feature is not activated. When the value of dynamic-CE-Switch-Private is 1, see Figure 112-1.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 391

Verification Procedure

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

112 Configuring Dynamic CE Resource Management

Figure 112-1 dynamic-CE-Switch-Private

Deactivation Procedure 1. Set NodeB license control item the number of NodeBs with dynamic CE function enabled to 0 on M2000 client . Details see Allocating a License to NodeBs.

----End

Example
None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

392

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

113 Configuring HSUPA FDE

113
Prerequisites
l Dependencies on Hardware

Configuring HSUPA FDE

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010692 HSUPA FDE.

Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on NodeB Hardware The BTS3812E/BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board. The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board. The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board. l l Dependencies on Other Features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
HSUPA FDE equalizes the spectrum in the frequency domain on the HSUPA E-DPDCH through the UL receiver of the NodeB, therefore suppressing the inter-path interference on the EDPDCH. In this manner, the SNR on the EDPDCH is increased and the UL system capacity of the HSUPA network is expanded. The rate of HSUPA services is also increased in multipath environment.
NOTE

For UEs of category 6 and category 7 at a transmission rate higher than 2 Mbit/s, the feature brings notable gains if multipath channels are used in the uplink.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 393

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

113 Configuring HSUPA FDE

1.

Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the local cell. In this step, set FDE to TRUE. Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the configuration information about the local cell. Expected result: The value of FDE MODE is ENABLED. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the local cell. In this step, set FDE to FALSE.

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, FDE_MODE=TRUE; //Verification procedure DSP LOCELL: LOCELL=1; //Deactivation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, FDE_MODE=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

394

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

114
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring Adaptive Configuration

of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010712 Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
As the HSPA/HSPA+ becomes an increasingly popular mainstream technology, uplink system performance needs to be enhanced to adapt to the ever-refreshed HSUPA peak rate. Based on the changes in subscriber behaviors and network status, this feature adaptively configures the parameters related to power control on the optimum uplink data channel, increasing the HSUPA system capacity.
NOTE

l This feature applies only to HSUPA Best Effort (BE) services whose Transmission Timing Interval (TTI) is 10 ms. l This feature is applicable to the scenarios where dynamic channel configuration control (DCCC) takes effect and the scenarios where dynamic channel element (CE) takes effect (DCCC does not take effect). l This feature is highly dependent on parameter settings. The relevant parameters must retain the default values. This feature may fail to take effect if these parameter settings are changed.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 395

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

CAUTION
Before activating this feature, check the settings of the following two parameters: if Reference E-TFCI Index1 is set to 4 and Reference E-TFCI Power Offset1 is set to 12, you are advised to set Reference E-TFCI Power Offset1 to 8. 1. Activation Procedure in the Scenario Where DCCC Takes Effect a. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH check box under the parameter Power Control Switch, and clear the MAP_HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH check box under the parameter Service Mapping Strategy Switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to enable HSUPA DCCC. In this step, select the DRA_DCCC_SWITCH and DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch. (Optional) Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Dynamic Channel Control Parameter Configuration > HSUPA Rate Adjust Set; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to select adjustable rates for EDCH. In this step, select RATE_128KBPS, RATE_256KBPS, RATE_608KBPS, and RATE_2048KBPS check boxes under the parameter HSUPA UpLink Rate Adjust Set. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRC (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > RNC Oriented FRC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Initial rate of HSUPA BE traffic to D256. Disable dynamic CE on the NodeB side. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH check box under the parameter Power Control Switch.

b.

c.

d.

e. 2. a.

Activation Procedure in the Scenario Where Dynamic CE Takes Effect

Verification Procedure

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

396

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

l In dynamic CE scenarios, the service rate assigned by the core network (CN) is 2048 kbit/s, and the BSC6900 configures the Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ) power offset (PO) based on the realtime service rate. In the scenarios where DCCC takes effect, the actual service rate is variable, and the BSC6900 configures the HARQ PO based on the realtime service rate. l The HARQ PO is one of the variable that determines the power offset on the E-DPDCH compared with the DPCCH.

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UTYPRABHSUPAPC to check the parameters related to power offset for typical services. Figure 114-1 shows an interactive BE service with the CN-assigned rate of 2048 kbit/s, whose Service parameter index is set to 55, Traffic Subflow Index to 0, Transport channel type to TRCH_EDCH_10MS, and the Ul 16QAM Used Indication, Ul enhanced L2 Used Indication, EdPower Interpolation Priority Used Indication, and UL EDPCCH Boosting Indication parameters all set to FALSE. As shown in Figure 114-1, HARQ PO for Large Retransmission is set to 0, HARQ PO for small Retrans at Low Speed is set to 4, and HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed is set to 0. Figure 114-1 PO parameters of typical services

2.

Establish a PS interactive BE service over HSUPA, for example, upload files to the FTP server.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 397

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

l In multi-user scenarios where the target load is limited and the realtime service rate of a single user is lower than a low-rate threshold (such as 150 kbit/s), the user is in the small retransmission state at a low speed. The HARQ PO is the value of HARQ PO for small Retrans at Low Speed. l If the realtime service rate of a single user is higher than a high-rate threshold (such as 300 kbit/ s), the user is in the small retransmission state at a high speed. The HARQ PO is the value of HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed.

3.

Check the realtime rate of the new BE service and the CN-assigned rate by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth, as shown in Figure 114-2.

Figure 114-2 Rate of the new BE service

4.

Verification Procedure in the Scenario Where DCCC Takes Effect a. Check the uplink throughput and bandwidth by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth. The data rate of the HSUPA service when accessing the network is 256 kbit/s. Trace messages over the Uu interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The value of the HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_SETUP message shows that the user is in the small retransmission state at a high speed. The HARQ PO is equal to the value of HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed, as shown in Figure 114-3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

398

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

Figure 114-3 HARQ PO (4) of a UE for small retransmission at a low speed (256 kbit/s)

b.

After the file upload on the FTP is complete, check the uplink data rate of the UE by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth. When the data rate is 608 kbit/s, check the value of HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_RECFG message by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The HARQ PO changes from HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed for 256 kbit/s to that for 608 kbit/s, as shown in Figure 114-4. Figure 114-4 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for small retransmission at a high speed

5.

Verification Procedure in the Scenario Where Dynamic CE Takes Effect a. Trace messages over the Uu interface by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The value of the HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_SETUP message
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 399

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

shows that the user is in the small retransmission state at a high speed when accessing the network. The HARQ PO is equal to the value of HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed, as shown in Figure 114-5. Figure 114-5 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for small retransmission at a high speed

b.

Simulate a situation that the uplink load is limited by changing the target uplink load to 10%. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSUPA. In this step, set Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor to 10. After the uplink load is limited, check the uplink throughput and bandwidth by referring to Monitoring UL Throughput and Bandwidth. HARQ PO reconfiguration is triggered when the uplink throughput of the UE is lower than the low-rate threshold. Check the value of HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_RECFG message by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The HARQ PO changes from HARQ PO for small Retrans at High Speed to HARQ PO for small Retrans at Low Speed, as shown in Figure 114-6. Figure 114-6 HARQ PO (4) of a UE for small retransmission at a low speed

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

400

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

c.

If the feature WRFD-010641 HSUPA Adaptive Transmission takes effect, use another UE to perform a PS interactive service with an uplink rate of 2048 kbit/ s and downlink rate of 7200 kbit/s in the cell. There is a possibility that the UE switches from small retransmission state to large retransmission state if the cell load increases to a certain value. Check the HARQ PO in the RRC_RB_RECFG message by referring to Tracing Messages on the Uu Interface. The HARQ PO changes from HARQ PO for Small Retrans at Low Speed to HARQ PO for Large Retransmission, as shown in Figure 114-7. Figure 114-7 HARQ PO (0) of a UE for large retransmission at a low speed

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to turn off the switch for this feature. In this step, clear the PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH check box under the parameter Power Control Switch.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure in the scenario where DCCC takes effect SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_DCCC_SWITCH-1&DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH-1; SET UEDCHRATEADJUSTSET: EdchRateAdjustSet=RATE_128KBPS-1&RATE_256KBPS-1&RATE_608KBPS-1&RATE_2048K BPS-1; SET UFRC: HsupaInitialRate=D256; //Activation procedure in the scenario where dynamic CE takes effect SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH-1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

401

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

114 Configuring Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA

//Verification procedure LST UTYPRABHSUPAPC: QueryType=QUERY_BY_PROPERTY, CNDomainId=PS_DOMAIN, TrafficClass=INTERACTIVE, MaxBitRate=256000, TrchType=TRCH_EDCH_10MS, Ul16QamInd=FALSE, UlL2EnhanceInd=FALSE, EdPwrInterpolationInd=FALSE, UlEcBoostingInd=FALSE; //Verification procedure in the scenario where dynamic CE takes effect MOD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=x, MaxTargetUlLoadFactor=10 //Deactivation procedure SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: PcSwitch=PC_HSUPA_DATA_CH_PO_ADAPTIVE_ADJ_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

402

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA

115
Prerequisites
l

Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020136 Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA.

Dependencies on Hardware Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on NodeB Hardware The BTS3812E and BTS3812AE should be configured with the HBBI, EBBI, HULP, EBOI, EULP, or EULPd board. The downlink services can only be set up on the EBBI, EBOI, or EDLP board. The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

l l

Dependencies on Other Features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
In commercial networks, the uplink data transmission of HSUPA at some sites is affected randomly by strong external interference. When a site is strongly interfered, the HSUPA throughput of the site is significantly reduced and user experience is affected. This feature can eliminate the strong external interference and maintain high HSUPA throughput, improving user experience.
NOTE

This feature is not proposed for multi-RRU cells.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

403

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Mac-e parameters. a. b. c. Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES(YES). Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to ON(ON). Own Cell UL Load Ratio. In indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 90. In non-indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 60. d. It is recommended that Min UL Cover Load Threshold(dB) be set to 13.
NOTE

If Local Cell ID is not specified, the Mac-e scheduling parameters of all local cells under the NodeB will be set.

CAUTION
If the following conditions are met, step 2 is not required, and the configuration ends. l On the RNC side, UL_UU_OLC(Uplink UU OLC Algorithm) is not selected for Switch for Cell Load Control. l On the RNC side, ALGORITHM_OFF or ALGORITHM_SECOND is selected for Uplink CAC algorithm switch. 2. Optional: Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Cell CAC algorithm switch to RTWP_RESIST_DISTURB(RTWP Resist Disturb Switch). Run the NodeB MML command DSP LICENSE to display license information. Exception result: the value of Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA Function (per Cell) is bigger than 0. 2. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES(YES). Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to OFF(OFF). 3. Make interference. For example: Run the NodeB MML command SET DESENS, set Desensitization Intensity to 6. 4. 5. Use a UE to carry out HSUPA upload task. Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 115-1. The column 1-3 indicates the state of this feature disabled.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 404

Verification Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA

Figure 115-1 Cell RTWP (feature disabled)

6.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. a. b. Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to ON(ON). Own Cell UL Load Ratio In indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 90. In non-indoor coverage scenarios, the recommended value is 60. c. It is recommended that Min UL Cover Load Threshold(dB) be set to 13.
NOTE

If Local Cell ID is not specified, the Mac-e scheduling parameters of all local cells under the NodeB will be set.

7.

Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 115-1. The column 1-3 indicates the state of this feature enabled. If the values of column 1-3 in Figure 115-1 are bigger than the values of 1-3 in Figure 115-2, it indicates the feature has been enabled.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

405

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

115 Configuring Anti-Interference Scheduling for HSUPA

Figure 115-2 Cell RTWP (feature enabled)

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Mac-e parameters. Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES(YES). Set the Anti-Interference Scheduling Switch to OFF(OFF).

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=ON, OWNCELLULLOADRATIO=60, LOADTHRESH4MINULCOV=13, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; (Optional)MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CELLID=0, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=RTWP_RESIST_DISTURB-1; //Verification procedure DSP LICENSE:; SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=OFF, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; SET DESENS: LOCELL=0, DI=6; SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=ON, OWNCELLULLOADRATIO=60, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; //Deactivation procedure SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, OUTERSYSINTERSCHSW=OFF, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

406

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

116
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring Dual-Threshold

Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-020137 Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation.

Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on NodeB Hardware The BTS3812E/AE must be configured with EULPd baord, and all users of the cell should be estabilished in one EULPd board. The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board. The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd board in the UL resource pool which support IC feature, and slot 2 or 3 needs to be configured with at least one WBBPd board. The RRU3801C 20W and the MTFU for the BTS3812E and BTS3812AE do not support this feature.

Dependencies on Other Features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature is applicable in cells enabled with the WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation feature.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 407

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Mac-e parameters. Set the MAC-e Schedule Para to YES. Set the Max Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 2. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches), set UL IC LDC Optimized Switch in the specified cell to ON(ON). Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. Set Max Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 0. Use multi users to carry out upload service. Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 116-1. The column 1-3 indicates the state of this feature disabled, the column 1-4 indicates the state of this feature enabled. If the value of column 1-4 is less than the value of column 1-3, it indicates HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation feature has been enabled. Figure 116-1 Cell RTWP 1

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3.

4. 5.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA to set Mac-e parameters. Set Max Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 2. Check the Cell RTWP window. If the value of column 1-4 is less than the value of column 1-3, and the values of column 1-4 and column 1-3 increase by 10, it indicates dual-threshold scheduling with HSUPA interference cancellation feature has been enabled.
NOTE

The prerequisite of the foregoing result is the cell power limit does not over.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

408

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

Figure 116-2 Cell RTWP 2

6. l

Run the BSC6900 MML commandLST UCELLCAC, check that UL IC LDC Optimized Switch is set to ON(ON). Run the NodeB MML command SET MACEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACEPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set Mac-e parameters. Set Max Target RoT Difference Before and After IC to 0. Reallocate the license of this feature on M2000 LMT, and set Allocated to 0. Run the BSC6900 MML commandMOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches), set UL IC LDC Optimized Switch in the specified cell to OFF(OFF).

Deactivation Procedure 1.

2. 3.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure //Operations at the NodeB SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=2, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; //Operations at the RNC MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=1, UlIcLdcOptSwitch=ON; //Verification procedure //Operations at the NodeB SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=0, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=2, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO; //Operations at the RNC LST UCELLCAC: CellId=1; //Deactivation procedure //Operations at the NodeB SET MACEPARA: LOCELL=0, SCHEDULEPARA=YES, MAXDELTAOFTARGETROT=0, EAGCHPCPARA=NO, SERGCHPCPARA=NO, NSERGCHPCPARA=NO, SEHICHPCPARA=NO, NSEHICHPCPARA=NO;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

409

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

116 Configuring Dual-Threshold Scheduling with HSUPA Interference Cancellation

//Operations at the RNC MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=1, UlIcLdcOptSwitch=OFF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

410

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

117 Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell

117
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010634 60 HSUPA Users per Cell.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables a single HSUPA cell to serve a maximum of 60 HSUPA users simultaneously. After the maximum number of users is reached, the cell attempts to establish services on DCHs to accommodate additional users.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSUPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Configuration of HSUPA in Cell; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Code Number for E-RGCH/E-HICH to appropriate value. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Maximum HSUPA user number to 60.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 411

2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

117 Configuring 60 HSUPA Users per Cell

Verification Procedure 1. On the BSC6900 LMT, click Monitor. Then, double-click UMTS Monitoring > Cell Performance Monitoring in the Monitor Navigation Tree pane. In the displayed Cell Performance Monitoring dialog box, set Monitor Item to Cell User Number. Use UEs to access the cell one by one. Then, make UEs establish PS services, for example, upload files through FTP. Expected result: Each UE establishes PS services successfully. If the number of UEs is less than or equal to 60, uplink services are carried on HSUPA channels and downlink services are carried on HSDPA channels. If the number of UEs is greater than 60, HSPA services of the excessive UEs are carried on R99 channels. 3. View the maximum number of HSUPA users indicated by the counter VS.HSUPA.UE.Max.Cell on the M2000.
NOTE

2.

The 60 HSUPA users referred to in this feature are of the SRB Over HSPA type.

Deactivation Procedure 1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
/*Activation procedure*/ //Allocating code resources to E-RGCHs MOD UCELLHSUPA: CellId=111, ErgchEhichCodeNum=3; //Setting the maximum number of HSUPA users to 60 MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=111, MaxHsupaUserNum=60;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

412

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

118
Prerequisites
l

Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010691 HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation.

Dependencies on Hardware Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on NodeB Hardware The BTS3812E or BTS3812AE must be configured with the EULPd board, the downlink service cannot be estabilished on HBBI/HDLP/NDLP, and the IC effect cannot be shared between BB boards. The DBS3800 must be configured with the EBBCd board and the IC effect can be shared between the BB boards. The 3900 series base stations must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board, and only if slot 2 or 3 is configured with at least one WBBPd or WBBPf board, IC effect can be shared between the WBBPd or WBBPf boards. WBBPd/WBBPf is needed for 3900 series NodeB to support HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation. If the inter-board sharing IC need to be supported, the WBBPd/WBBPf should be configured in the UL resource pool which used for interboard sharing IC, and at least 1 WBBPd/WBBPf should be configured in slot 2 or 3.

l l

Dependencies on Other Features WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

413

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

Context

CAUTION
Activate this feature when the traffic volume in a cell is low. The reason is that the cell must be deactivated before this feature is activated; after the cell is deactivated, the services in this cell are disrupted. Interference Cancellation (IC) is performed to cancel the interference caused by the uplink high rate E-DPDCH data of other users, improving the demodulation signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and increasing the uplink capacity of the UMTS network.
NOTE

l For 3900 series base stations, the WBBPd/WBBPf must be configured on slot 2 or slot 3 on the BBU3900 to support the uplink data IC integrated interference cancellation function. The uplink resource group must contain the WBBPd/WBBPf. Therefore, cell of the group can support the IC feature. For details, see Adding a Baseband Board to a 3900 Series Base Station. l If the DBS3800 is configured with two EBBCd boards, it is recommended that two uplink resource groups be allocated to the two boards separately. In this way, both the boards support HSUPA uplink interference cancellation. For details about how to configure the active and standby BTSs, see Adding an EBBC or EBBCd. l If the BTS3812E or BTS3812AE is configured with two EULPd boards, it is recommended that two uplink resource groups be allocated to the two boards separately. In this way, both the boards support HSUPA uplink interference cancellation. For details about how to configure the active and standby BTSs, see Adding a Baseband Board to the BTS3812E or BTS3812AE.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. If the UMTS cell has been activated, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to deactivate the cell. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the local cell. In this step, set IC to TRUE. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELL (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Basic Information > Cell Basic Information. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to activate the cell. Run the NodeB MML command SET RESALLOCRULE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > RESALLOCRULE; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Auto Rebuild Cell Switch to ON(ON) and set Cs User Number Threshold and Ps User Number Threshold. If the number of CS users or the number of PS CELL_DCH users in the downlink resource group is equal or smaller than the corresponding threshold, the local cells are reestablished automatically.

2.

3.

4.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 414

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

118 Configuring HSUPA UL Interference Cancellation

1.

Run the NodeB MML command DSP LOCELL to query the status of a specified local cell. Expected result: The value of IC MODE is ENABLED. Run the NodeB MML command LST RESALLOCRULE. Expected result: The value of Auto Rebuild Cell Switch is ON. Select Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP from the navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, as shown in Figure 118-1. The column 1-3 indicates the state of this feature disabled, the column 1-4 indicates the state of this feature enabled. If the value of column 1-4 is less than the value of column 1-3, it indicates the feature has been enabled. Figure 118-1 Cell RTWP 1

2. 3.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command MOD LOCELL (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > xx Sector > Locell; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to modify the local cell. In this step, set IC to FALSE.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure DEA UCELL: CellId=1; MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, IC_MODE=TRUE; ACT UCELL: CellId=1; SET RESALLOCRULE: SW=ON, CSUSERNUM=0, PSUSERNUM=0; //Verification procedure DSP LOCELL: LOCELL=1; LST RESALLOCRULE:; //Deactivation procedure MOD LOCELL: LOCELL=1, SECT=LOCAL_SECTOR, IC_MODE=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

415

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA

119
Prerequisites
l BSC6900

Configuring SRB over HSUPA

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010636 SRB over HSUPA.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Requirements for the NodeB The 38XX series NodeB supports this feature, and the EBBI, EBOI, EULP or EULPd, EBBC or EBBCd is required. The 3900 series NodeB supports this feature, and the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf is required.

Dependencies on Other Features The WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package feature must be configured before this feature is configured.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The transmission mapping to support SRB over HSUPA has been configured.

Context
This feature provides high signaling rate and shortens call setup delay. Compared with the function of carrying SRBs on DCHs, this feature saves code resources and reduces cell load.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 416

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

119 Configuring SRB over HSUPA

modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to HSUPA(UL_EDCH,DL_DCH) or HSPA(UL_EDCH,DL_HSDSCH).
NOTE

If the feature is effective in the case of RRC connection establishment, set Effective Flag of Signaling RB Channel Type to TRUE.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UFRCCHLTYPEPARA to query whether the SRBs are carried over HSUPA. Use a UE with the HSPA function to set up an RRC connection on the enhanced DCH (E-DCH). View the RRC_RRC_CONN_SETUP message from the Uu interface trace data. If the EDCH information is contained in the message, this feature is activated.

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Basic Resource Control Parameter Configuration > Channel Type Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches) to set Type of Channel Preferably Carrying Signaling RB to DCH(UL_DCH,DL_DCH) and Effective Flag of Signaling RB Channel Type to FALSE.

----End

Example
//Activating SRB over HSUPA SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=HSUPA, SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag=TRUE; //Verifying SRB over HSUPA LST UFRCCHLTYPEPARA:; //Deactivating SRB over HSUPA SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA: SrbChlType=DCH, SrbChlTypeRrcEffectFlag=FALSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

417

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)

Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-140202 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2). Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation is short for CCPIC.

120
l

Configuring Control Channel

Prerequisites
Dependencies on Hardware The 3900 series base station (except for BTS3902E) must be configured with the WBBPd or WBBPf board. To support inter-board IC, the WBBPd or WBBPf board must be configured for the uplink resource group that supports inter-board IC. In addition, at least one WBBPd or WBBPf board must be configured in slot 2 or 3. It is recommended that the WBBPa or WBBPb board be replaced with a WBBPd or WBBPf board to fully utilize CCPIC (Phase 2). Assume that a WBBPa or WBBPb board and a WBBPd or WBBPf board are inserted into one BBU to form a UL resource group. To share the CCPIC gains of the WBBPd or WBBPf board when NodeB IC Mode is set to FULL_IC(All board can share IC gain), UEs with their data channel carried on the WBBPa or WBBPb board must set up another DPCCH on the WBBPd or WBBPf board for power control. Of the UEs, those with their downlink services carried on an HSDPA channel must set up another HS-DPCCH on the WBBPd or WBBPf board. The extra channels consume extra processing resources, reducing the total number of users supported by the system. l Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010210 Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (CCPIC) has been configured before this feature is activated. l License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions. l Others Prerequisites None

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

418

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)

Context
l Precautions Gains from CCPIC (Phase 2) and Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA may decrease. If CCPIC (Phase 2) is enabled, gains from Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA decrease. If Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA is enabled, gains from CCPIC (Phase 2) decrease. System throughput is always greater when CCPIC (Phase 2) is enabled together with Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA, as compared with when CCPIC (Phase 2) is not enabled together with Adaptive Configuration of Traffic Channel Power offset for HSUPA or none of the features is enabled. Gains from CCPIC (Phase 2) and HSUPA Adaptive Transmission may decrease. If CCPIC (Phase 2) is enabled, gains from HSUPA Adaptive Transmission decrease. If HSUPA Adaptive Transmission is enabled, gains from CCPIC (Phase 2) decrease. System throughput is always greater when CCPIC (Phase 2) is enabled together with HSUPA Adaptive Transmission, as compared with when CCPIC (Phase 2) is not enabled together with HSUPA Adaptive Transmission or none of the features is enabled. The cell throughput decreases for 5 to 10 seconds and all UEs carried on a WBBPa or WBBPb board experience call drops when the following conditions are true: A WBBPd or WBBPf board and the WBBPa or WBBPb board are inserted into one BBU to form a UL resource group. The setting for ICMODE changes when the CCPIC (Phase 2) feature is enabled. l Data Preparation Scenario 1: No WBBPa or WBBPb board is configured for a base station. The configuration is not required. Scenario 2: A WBBPa or WBBPb board is configured for a base station. The WBBPa or WBBPb board cannot benefit from CCPIC (Phase 2) gains by default. Parameter Name Parameter ID Recommended Parameter Settings PART_IC(Old board can not share IC gain) Source

IC_MODE

ICMODE

Network plan

Scenario 2: A WBBPa or WBBPb board is configured for a base station. The WBBPa or WBBPb board cannot benefit from CCPIC (Phase 2) gains. Parameter Name Parameter ID Recommended Parameter Settings FULL_IC(All board can share IC gain) Source

IC_MODE

ICMODE

Network plan

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

419

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)

Procedure
l Activation Procedure After the license is activated, this feature has been activated.
NOTE

Even if all prerequisites are ready, CCPIC (Phase 2) may not be available temporarily to the cell to avoid interruption of ongoing services. To ensure that the cell can be adjusted to support CCPIC (Phase 2), the Auto Rebuild Cell Switch must be set to ON(ON).

1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET RESALLOCRULE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > RESALLOCRULE; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set Auto Rebuild Cell Switch to ON(ON) and set Cs User Number Threshold and Ps User Number Threshold. If the number of CS users or the number of PS CELL_DCH users in the downlink resource group is equal or smaller than the corresponding threshold, the local cells are reestablished automatically. Select operations as configured. Scenario 1: The configuration ends. Scenario 2: Run the NodeB MML command SET ICMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Basic Information > Radio Management > ICMODE; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set NodeB IC Mode to PART_IC(Old board can not share IC gain). Scenario 3: Run the NodeB MML command SET ICMODE (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Basic Information > Radio Management > ICMODE; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set NodeB IC Mode to FULL_IC(All board can share IC gain).

2.

Verification Procedure Check whether the CCPIC (Phase 2) feature has been activated by using the RNC or NodeB LMT. If the base station is configured with the RRU3801C, the following verification mode does not apply.
NOTE

Observe the activation when there are a large number of UEs because CCPIC (Phase 2) gain is obvious only when there are a large number of UEs.

On the RNC LMT: 1. 2. On the RNC LMT, click Monitor, choose Cell Performance Monitoring > RTWP, enter the cell ID, and click Submit. Check whether a valid value is displayed for Cell measured RTWP After First Stage Interference Cancellation. Expected result: A valid value is displayed, indicating that the CCPIC (Phase 2) feature is functioning properly. When there are a large number of UEs, Cell measured RTWP After First Stage Interference Cancellation is smaller than Cell Measured RTWP. The RTWP decrease further indicates that this feature has been activated. Figure 120-1 shows the RTWP monitoring result displayed on the RNC LMT.
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 420

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)

Figure 120-1 Cell-level RTWP monitoring on the RNC LMT

On the NodeB LMT: 1. 2. On the NodeB LMT, click Maintenance, choose Service > Realtime Specific Monitoring > Cell RTWP. Check whether a valid value is displayed for Cell measured RTWP After First Stage interference cancellation. Expected result: A valid value is displayed, indicating that the CCPIC (Phase 2) feature is functioning properly. When there are a large number of UEs, Cell measured RTWP After First Stage interference cancellation is smaller than Cell measured RTWP. The RTWP decrease further indicates that this feature has been activated. Figure 120-2 shows the RTWP monitoring result displayed on the NodeB LMT.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

421

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

120 Configuring Control Channel Parallel Interference Cancellation (Phase 2)

Figure 120-2 Figure 7-3 Cell-level RTWP monitoring on the NodeB LMT

Deactivation Procedure None

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET RESALLOCRULE: SW=ON, CSUSERNUM=0, PSUSERNUM=0; //Scenario 2 SET ICMODE: ICMODE=PART_IC; //Scenario 3 SET ICMODE: ICMODE=FULL_IC;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

422

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package

121
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package. (This feature cannot be configured using the CME. )

Dependencies on Hardware NDLP and NBBI in the NodeB do not support this feature. Dependencies on Other Features This feature does not depend on other features. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The UE is HSDPA-capable.

Context
High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) is one of the important features defined in 3GPP specifications. HSDPA can significantly increase the downlink peak rate per user, shorten the round trip delay, and expand the system capacity. This feature package provides the basic functions of HSDPA to meet the requirements for test or trial operation of HSDPA services.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. 2. 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD UCELLHSDPA to set HSDPA-related parameters based on the network plan. Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSDPA to activate this feature. Configure Iub transport for HSDPA. In an ATM network:
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 423

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package

a. b. c.

Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD ATMTRF to configure new records of ATM traffic based on network planning requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to query the transmission resource mapping. Run the BSC6900 MML command ADD AAL2PATH to set associated parameters according to the network plan. TX traffic record index and RX traffic record index of the AAL2 path to be added must be the same as those set in the ADD ATMTRF command. In addition, AAL2 Path Type should be set according to the mapping between service types and AAL paths. Run the NodeB MML command ADD AAL2PATH to configure an AAL2 path for HSDPA based on network planning requirements. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST ADJMAP to query whether resource management mapping is configured for the adjacent node. If configured, check the TRMMAP index of the adjacent node. If not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to query the default TRMMAP ID used by the adjacent node based on the settings of Interface Type and Transport Type. For example, if Interface Type is set to Iub Interface, then TRMMAP ID is 1.

d.

In an IP network: a.

b.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST TRMMAP to check whether the IP path mapping to the HSDPA service is configured according to the TRMMAP ID used by the adjacent node. If configured, no further action is required. If not configured, run the BSC6900 MML command ADD IPPATH to configure the IP path mapping to the HSDPA service.

NOTE

To ensure that HSDPA services can be set up successfully, HSDPA services must be mapped to the corresponding AAL2 paths or IP paths. To avoid the affect on ongoing services, you can add new AAL2 paths or IP paths.

Verification Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether this feature is activated. If HSDPA Operational State is set to Enabled, this feature has been activated. Run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSDPA to deactivate this feature. Run the BSC6900 MML command DSP UCELL to check whether the HSDPA feature is deactivated. If HSDPA Operational State is set to Disabled, this feature has been deactivated.

Deactivation Procedure 1. 2.

----End

Example
// Setting HSDPA-related parameters ADD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=3000, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, HsPdschMaxCodeNum=4, HsPdschMinCodeNum=1, CodeAdjForHsdpaSwitch=ON; //Activating HSDPA Introduction Package ACT UCELLHSDPA: CellId=3000; //Configuring Iub transport for HSDPA //ATM network

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

424

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

121 Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package

ADD ATMTRF: TRFX=118, ST=RTVBR, UT=KBIT/S, PCR=5150, SCR=5149, REMARK="5Mfor-HSDPA"; ADD AAL2PATH: ANI=10, PATHID=2, CARRYT=IMA, CARRYF=1, CARRYSN=0, CARRYIMAGRPN=1, RSCGRPFLAG=NO, VPI=13, VCI=71, TXTRFX=118, RXTRFX=118, AAL2PATHT=HSPA; //Adding an AAL2 path ADD AAL2PATH: PATHID=2, SN=12, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, VPI=13, VCI=71, ST=RTVBR, PCR=5150, SCR=5149, RCR=5150, NT=LOCAL, PAT=H_NRT; //IP network ADD IPPATH: ANI=0, PATHID=1, ITFT=IUB, TRANST=IP,PATHT=BE, IPADDR="80.1.1.1", PEERIPADDR="10.161.0.1", PEERMASK="255.255.255.0", TXBW=1000, RXBW=1000; //Verifying HSDPA Introduction Package DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=3000, LstFormat=VERTICAL; //Deactivating HSDPA Introduction Package DEA UCELLHSDPA: CellId=3000; DSP UCELL: DSPT=BYCELL, CellId=3000, LstFormat=VERTICAL;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

425

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell

122
Prerequisites
l l l License

Configuring 15 Codes per Cell

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061001 15 Codes per Cell.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package. The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature provides code resources occupied by Huawei HSDPA services. An HS-PDSCH can use up to 15 SF16 codes in a cell.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Code Number for HS-SCCH to 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

426

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell

l The BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) fails to be executed when HSDPA is activated. Therefore, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters. Set ACTSTATUS to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to deactivate HSDPA before configuring this feature and run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters. Set ACTSTATUS to Activated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to reactivate HSDPA after configuring this feature. l The BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) fails to be executed when CELL-FACH enhancement is activated. Therefore, run the BSC6900 MML command DEA UCELLEFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Enhanced FACH parameters. Set Validation indication to Deactivated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to deactivate enhanced CELLFACH before configuring this feature and Run the BSC6900 MML command ACT UCELLEFACH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Enhanced FACH parameters. Set Validation indication to Activated; CME batch modification center: No supported) to reactivate enhanced CELL-FACH after configuring this feature. l By default, the number of HS-SCCH codes for each cell is 4. If the default number is used, the HS-PDSCH can use only 14 SF16 codes. To enable the HS-PDSCH to use all 15 SF16 codes, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set the value of Code Number for HS-SCCH to 1.

2.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set Allocate Code Mode to Manual(Manual) and Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 15. Initialize UMTS monitoring on the BSC6900 LMT, as shown in Figure 122-1. Click Submit. A real-time monitoring window is displayed. Figure 122-1 Cell Performance Monitoring

Verification Procedure 1.

2.

Check whether 15 SF16 codes are occupied by the HS-PDSCH in the Cell Performance Monitoring window. Expected result: The HS-PDSCH occupies 15 SF16 codes.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

427

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

122 Configuring 15 Codes per Cell

Deactivation Procedure 1. This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Verifying 15 Codes per Cell MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1, HsScchCodeNum=1; MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=1, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=15;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

428

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

123 Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex

123
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061018 Time and HS-PDSCH Codes Multiplex.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables the allocation of different codes in the same TTI to different users or the multiplexing of the same code in different TTIs for different users to increase the code resource utilization and system throughput.

Procedure
l l l Activation Procedure This feature does not need to be activated. Verification Procedure This feature does not need to be verified. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated. ----End
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 429

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

124 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)

124
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ &

Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061009 HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF).

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
Huawei provides multiple HSDPA scheduling algorithms such as maximum C/I (MAXCI), round-robin (RR), proportional fair (PF), and Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF).Before the HSDPA feature is enabled, HARQ must be enabled and HSDPA scheduling algorithms must be set.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
NOTE

l HSDPA H-ARQ is activated automatically without any configuration. l This section describes how to set Max C/I, RR, and PF scheduling algorithms. For details on how to set the EPF scheduling algorithm, see the description of the feature WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR.

1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 430

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

124 Configuring HSDPA H-ARQ & Scheduling (MAX C/I, RR, and PF)

3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches) to set the parameter Scheduling Method to MAXCI(Max C/I Algorithm), RR(Round Robin Algorithm) or PF(PF Algorithm). l Verification Procedure 1. l Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to query the settings of the parameter Scheduling Method.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0, SM=MAXCI; //Verification procedure LST MACHSPARA: LOCELL=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

431

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

125 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNCControlled Dynamic Code Allocation

Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation


This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061005 HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation.

125
l l

Configuring HSDPA Static Code

Prerequisites
Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated. l License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature provides two code allocation strategies: HSDPA static code allocation and RNCcontrolled dynamic code allocation. When R99 and HSDPA services co-exist, this feature enables full use of channelization code resources to expand system capacity.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allocate Code Mode to Manual or Automatic.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 432

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

125 Configuring HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNCControlled Dynamic Code Allocation

If Allocate Code Mode is set to Manual, set Code Number for HS-PDSCH to specify the number of HS-PDSCH codes. If Allocate Code Mode is set to Automatic, set Code Max Number for HSPDSCH to specify the maximum number of HS-PDSCH codes and set Code Min Number for HS-PDSCH to specify the minimum number of HS-PDSCH codes. l Verification Procedure 1. 2. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCELLHSDPA to query code allocation mode. On the BSC6900 LMT, click to display Cell Performance Monitoring. Set Monitor Item to Cell Code Tree Monitor and click Submit. The Cell Performance Monitoring tab page is displayed. View the number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH in the cell. If Allocate Code Mode is set to Manual, the monitoring window of cell code tree usage shows that the number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH remains unchanged. If Allocate Code Mode is set to Automatic, the monitoring window of cell code tree usage shows that the number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH varies with service access requests in the cell. For example, the number of codes allocated to the HS-PDSCH increases with the increase of HSDPA access requests and decreases with the decrease of HSDPA access requests.

3.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating HSDPA Static Code Allocation and RNC-Controlled Dynamic Code Allocation MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=11, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5, HsScchCodeNum=4; MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=11, AllocCodeMode=Automatic, HsPdschMaxCodeNum=5, HsPdschMinCodeNum=1;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

433

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control

126
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSDPA Power Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061004 HSDPA Power Control.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is configured.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
After an HSDPA service is introduced, the total downlink transmit power of each cell is classified into common channel power, dedicated physical channel (DPCH) power, and power of HSDPA physical channels (HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH). To achieve high HSDPA performance, power resources except those reserved for common channels are dynamically allocated to DPCHs and HSDPA physical channels. For R99 services, the DPCH power can be adjusted by means of inner-loop and outer-loop power control. HSDPA channel power resources can be dynamically allocated and adjusted among users by using the NodeB scheduling algorithm. HS-PDSCH power is controlled by the transport format and resource combination (TFRC) algorithm and therefore does not require power control. This feature enables operators to configure the appropriate power control mode of the HS-SCCH, increasing the power efficiency and system capacity and improving the user experience.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Activating the adaptive HS-SCCH power control based on the channel quality indicator (CQI)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 434

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control

a.

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allocate Code Mode to Manual, Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 5, and Code Number for HSSCCH to 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HS-SCCH Power Control Method in CELL DCH state to CQI. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell HSDPA Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Allocate Code Mode to Manual, Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 5, and Code Number for HSSCCH to 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set HS-SCCH Power Control Method in CELL DCH state to FIXED.

b.

2.

Activating the fixed HS-SCCH power control a.

b.

Verification Procedure 1. Verifying the adaptive HS-SCCH power control based on the CQI a. b. 2. Use an HSUPA-capable UE to set up a PS service over the HS-SCCH. Move the UE between the cell center and the cell edge to view the power change on HS-SCCHs. Expected result: The HS-SCCH power changes with the CQI. Use an HSUPA-capable UE to set up a PS service over the HS-SCCH. Move the UE between the cell center and the cell edge to view the power change on the HS-SCCH. Expected result: The HS-SCCH power remains unchanged.

Verifying the fixed HS-SCCH power control a. b.

Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating HSUPA Power Control //Setting the adaptive HS-SCCH power control based on the CQI MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=111, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5, HsScchCodeNum=1; SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=111, HSSCCHPWRCMINDCH=CQI, HSSCCHFERTRGTINDCH=10; //Setting the fixed HS-SCCH power control MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=111, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5,

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

435

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

126 Configuring HSDPA Power Control

HsScchCodeNum=1; SET MACHSPARA: LOCELL=111, HSSCCHPWRCMINDCH=FIXED, SCCHPWR=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

436

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control

127
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSDPA Admission Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061003 HSDPA Admission Control.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature implements admission control over HSDPA users in the aspects such as the number of HSDPA users, remaining power resources, Iub interface resources, and service rate thresholds. This feature can ensure the QoS of existing HSDPA users while fully utilizing the resources.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Activate power resource admission. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch according to the network planning. For HSDPA services, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 437

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control

batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select related admission algorithms in the Cell CAC algorithm switch parameter. The available admission algorithms are HSDPA_GBP_MEAS(HSDPA GBP Meas Algorithm), HSDPA_PBR_MEAS (HSDPA PBR Meas Algorithm), and HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSDPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Oriented CAC Algorithm Parameters; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches) to set power resource admission related parameters and the maximum number of HSDPA users.
NOTE

If HSDPA_PBR_MEAS(HSDPA PBR Meas Algorithm) is selected in Cell CAC algorithm switch, set Hsdpa streaming PBR threshold and HSDPA best effort PBR threshold in this step.

2.

Activate NodeB credit resource admission. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH in CAC algorithm switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CRD_ADCTRL(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) in Cell CAC algorithm switch.

3.

Activate Iub interface resource admission. The Iub interface resource admission is mandatory and is activated automatically.
NOTE

Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD IPPATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > IP Transport > IP Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) or MOD AAL2PATH (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_RNC > ATM Transport > AAL2 Path; CME batch modification center: not supported) to change the Iub interface bandwidth.

Verification Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. Enable two UEs UE1 and UE2 in idle mode to camp on the test cell, and the test cell must support HSDPA. On the HLR, set PS service type to background or interactive. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC to set the maximum number of HSDPA users to 1. Use UE1 to initiate an HSDPA PS service. After the service is set up successfully, check the RRC_RB_SETUP message over the Uu interface. You can view that the new-H-RNTI IE is under the rb-mappinginfo IE, and the value of the dlTransportChannel-Type IE is hsdsch. Use UE2 to initiate an HSDPA PS service. The service should fail to set up. Check the RRC_RB_SETUP message over the Uu interface. You can view that the new-HRNTI IE is not under the rb-mappinginfo IE, and the value of the dlTransportChannel-Type IE is dch.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 438

5.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

127 Configuring HSDPA Admission Control

6. 7. 8. l

Release all the PS services. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set Maximum HSDPA user number of the test cell to 64. Use UE1 and UE2 to initiate an HSDPA PS service. Expected result: Services are set up successfully on UE1 and UE2. Deactivate power resource admission. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Uplink CAC algorithm switch and Downlink CAC algorithm switch to ALGORITHM_OFF.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

2.

Deactivate NodeB credit resource admission. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCACALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > CAC Algorithm Switch Configuration > CAC Algorithm Switch; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH in Cell CAC algorithm switch. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Cell Configuration Express > Cell Parameters > Cell Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.18 Modifying UMTS Cell Parameters in Batches). In this step, select CRD_ADCTRL(Credit Admission Control Algorithm) in Cell CAC algorithm switch.

3. ----End

Deactivate Iub interface resource admission. The Iub interface resource admission is mandatory and does not need to be deactivated.

Example
//Activating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_FIRST, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_SECOND; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL-1&HSDPA_GBP_MEAS-1&HSDPA_PBR_MEAS-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, HsdpaStrmPBRThd=70, HsdpaBePBRThd=30, MaxHsdpaUserNum=64, MaxUlTxPowerforConv=24, MaxUlTxPowerforInt=24; //Activating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-1; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-1; MOD UCELLCAC: CellId=11, UlHoCeResvSf=SF16, DlHoCeCodeResvSf=SF32; //Deactivating power resource admission MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF, NBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch=ALGORITHM_OFF; //Deactivating NodeB credit resource admission SET UCACALGOSWITCH: CacSwitch=NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH-0; MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH: CellId=11, NBMCacAlgoSwitch=CRD_ADCTRL-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

439

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

128 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service

128
Prerequisites
l

Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061020 Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service.

Dependencies on Hardware Dependencies on BSC6900 Hardware Only BSC6900 support this feature. Dependencies on NodeB Hardware The BTS3812E, BTS3812A, and BTS3812AE should be configured with the EULP, EBBI, EBOI or EULPd board. The BBU3806 is configured with the EBBC or EBBCd board. The BBU3900 is configured with the WBBPb, WBBPd or WBBPf board.

Dependencies on Other Features WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package WRFD-010612 HSUPA Introduction Package

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
l l The NodeB detects HSPA services with low traffic, such as gaming services and instant messaging services (such as MSN). The NodeB enables low traffic services to obtain more resources based on the scheduling and flow control principles of HSPA, which reduces delay in low traffic services.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 440

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

128 Configuring Improvement of User Experience in Low Traffic Service

1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > UEQOSENHANCEPARA; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the burst packet sizes of the gold, silver, and copper users according to the actual conditions. Run the NodeB MML command LST UEQOSENHANCEPARA to query the burst packet sizes of the gold, silver, and copper users. Run the NodeB MML command SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Basic Information > Radio Management > UEQOSENHANCEPARA; CME batch modification center: not supported). In this step, set the burst packet sizes of the gold, silver, and copper users to 0.
NOTE

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

When the burst packet size of a user is set to 0, it indicates that the NodeB stops identifying the low traffic services of the user.

----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA: ULGOLDUEBPS=10, ULSILVERUEBPS=11, ULCOPPERUEBPS=12, DLGOLDUEBPS=13, DLSILVERUEBPS=14, DLCOPPERUEBPS=15; //Verification procedure LST UEQOSENHANCEPARA:; //Deactivation procedure SET UEQOSENHANCEPARA: ULGOLDUEBPS=0, ULSILVERUEBPS=0, ULCOPPERUEBPS=0, DLGOLDUEBPS=0, DLSILVERUEBPS=0, DLCOPPERUEBPS=0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

441

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control

129
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring HSDPA Flow Control

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061010 HSDPA Flow Control.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated. License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
For each MAC-hs queue, HSDPA Flow Control calculates the pre-allocated Iub bandwidth based on the Uu transmission rate and the amount of data buffered in the NodeB. The Uu transmission rate of the MAC-hs queue is determined by the scheduling algorithm. For each MAC-hs queue, if the Iub transmission rate is higher than the Uu transmission rate, the data packets are buffered. Too much data buffered in the NodeB leads to transmission delay and even packet loss. Therefore, each MAC-hs queue should not have too much data buffered in the NodeB. However, it should retain a certain amount of data to prevent wasting the Uu resources due to not having data to transmit. The procedure for HSDPA Flow Control is briefly described as follows: 1. 2. 3. The NodeB measures the buffered data amount of each MAC-hs queue and the average Uu transmission rate. The NodeB estimates the buffering time based on the measurements. The NodeB adjusts the Iub bandwidth pre-allocated to the MAC-hs queue.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 442

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control

1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > ATM Transport Layer > ATMPort > HSDPA Flow Control > HSDPA Flow Control Parameters; CME batch modification center: not supported) to set the parameter Flow Control Switch to enable the NodeB HSDPA flow control function. The adaptive flow control algorithm is recommended. There are four types of HSDPA flow control algorithm as follows: When Flow Control Switch is set to STATIC_BW_SHAPING, the NodeB does not adjust the available bandwidth for HSDPA users based on delay and packet loss on the Iub interface. Then, subtracting Iub bandwidth used by R99 from Iub bandwidth configured, the NodeB performs Iub shaping and distributes flow to HSDPA users. When Flow Control Switch is set to DYNAMIC_BW_SHAPING, the NodeB adjusts the available bandwidth for HSDPA users based on delay and packet loss on the Iub interface. Then, considering the data rate on the air interface, the NodeB performs Iub shaping and distributes flow to HSDPA users. When Flow Control Switch is set to NO_BW_SHAPING, the NodeB does not adjust the bandwidth based on delay and packet loss on the Iub interface. The NodeB reports the conditions about the air interface to the RNC, and then the RNC allocates the bandwidth. When Flow Control Switch is set to BW_SHAPING_ONOFF_TOGGLE, the flow control policy for the ports of the NodeB is either DYNAMIC_BW_SHAPING or NO_BW_SHAPING in accordance with the congestion detection mechanism of the NodeB. This flow control algorithm is recommended.

Verification Procedure 1. Choose Monitor > UMTS Monitoring > Connection Performance Monitoring on the BSC6900 LMT. Create UL Throughput Bandwidth and DL Throughput Bandwidth tasks. Assume that the current Iub bandwidth is 4 MHz and the bandwidth usage is 80%. Enable an HSDPA-capable UE1 to access the network and originate a PS service. Record the throughput of UE1. Expected result: The throughput of UE1 is 3.2 Mbps. 3. Enable an HSDPA-capable UE2 to access the network (with the same configuration as UE1) and originate a download service. Record the throughput of the two UEs. Expected result: The throughput of UE1 decreases after UE2 accesses the network. When the throughput of the two UEs is stable, the total bandwidth of the two UEs is 4 MHz. If user priority, service type and Security Parameter Index (SPI) of the two UEs are the same, the final ratio of the two UEs' throughput is 1:1.

2.

Deactivation Procedure You can deactivate the current algorithm by selecting one of the other flow control algorithms.

----End
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 443

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

129 Configuring HSDPA Flow Control

Example
//Activating HSDPA Flow Control and setting the flow control mode to adaptive flow control SET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA: SRN=0, SN=6, BEAR=ATM, SBT=BASE_BOARD, PT=IMA, PN=0, SWITCH= BW_SHAPING_ONOFF_TOGGLE, TD=2, DR=1, ITM=TERRESTRIAL;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

444

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

130 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management

130
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061006 HSDPA Mobility Management.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package must be configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables an HSDPA-capable UE to be handed over to an R99 cell or another HSDPA cell. This feature also enables an HSDPA-capable UE to change cells with a small probability of service interruption.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. The methods of activating intra-frequency, inter-frequency, and inter-RAT handovers are the same for HSDPA users and R99 users. For details, see the following sections: 35 Configuring Intra Frequency Hard Handover 236 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on Coverage 237 Configuring Inter Frequency Hard Handover Based on DL QoS 247 Configuring Inter Frequency Load Balance
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 445

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

130 Configuring HSDPA Mobility Management

269 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Coverage 270 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on DL QoS 275 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Service 276 Configuring Inter-RAT Handover Based on Load l l Verification Procedure None Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

446

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

131 Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28

131
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061002 HSDPA UE Category 1 to 28.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature can provide proper HSDPA services for the UEs of category 1 to category 28.

Procedure
l l l Activation Procedure This feature does not need to be activated. Verification Procedure This feature does not need to be verified. Deactivation Procedure This feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

447

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation

132
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010629 DL 16QAM Modulation.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Other Prerequisites The UE should have the capability of HSDPA besides Category 11 and Category 12:category 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28.

Context
Compared with QPSK, 16QAM is a higher-order downlink data modulation scheme. This feature enables the peak rate on the Uu interface to reach 14.4 Mbit/s. l l l l The HS-PDSCH is used to carry the HS-DSCH data. The HS-PDSCH may use QPSK or 16QAM modulation symbols. When the UE is in poor radio environment, the transmission can adopt the low-order QPSK modulation mode and small transport blocks to ensure communication quality. When the UE is in good radio environment, the transmission can adopt the high-order 16QAM modulation mode and large transport blocks to achieve high peak rate. The UE of category 10 can support a maximum of 15 HS-PDSCH codes and 16QAM modulation mode. The supported peak rate on the air interface can reach 14.4 Mbit/s.

Procedure
l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Activation Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 448

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

132 Configuring DL 16QAM Modulation

HSDPA Introduction Package must be activated before activating this feature. For the method of activating HSDPA Introduction Package, see the section "Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package."

1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set 16QAM Switch to OPEN(open).
NOTE

Verification Procedure
l For the 16QAM modulation of the HSDPA UE, the NodeB license control item must be enabled. l As defined in 3GPP 25.306, the UE in category 8 can support both QPSK and 16QAM modulation schemes. Only 16QAM modulation, however, enables the throughput of category 8 UE to reach 5 Mbit/s.
NOTE

Only in case of good environment quality of the channel, the throughput of category 8 UE can reach 5 Mbit/s.

Perform the following steps to check whether the download rate can reach 5 Mbit/s. 1. 2. Use the UE to start a PS interactive service of DL 7200 kbit/s. The PS service is carried on the HS-DSCH. The UE keeps in Cell-DCH state. Start FTP (10 threads) to download given files, which are larger than 1 GB. By monitoring the DL throughput and bandwidth, you find that the PS downloading service is normal and the bit rate is higher than 5 Mbit/s. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set 16QAM Switch to CLOSE(close).

Deactivation Procedure 1.

----End

Example
//Activating procedure SET MACHSPARA: CME16QAMSW=OPEN; //Deactivating procedure SET MACHSPARA: CME16QAMSW=CLOSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

449

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB

133
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010631 Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature implements dynamic code allocation on the NodeB side. The NodeB adjusts the allocation of code resources in each TTI according to available code resources and scheduling algorithms. This feature can further improve the utilization of code resources.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure
NOTE

HSDPA Introduction Package must be activated before activating this feature. For the method of activating HSDPA Introduction Package, see the section "Configuring HSDPA Introduction Package."

1.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic Code Switch to OPEN(open).

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 450

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB

1. 2.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set Dynamic Code Switch to CLOSE(close). Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLHSDPA. set Allocate Code Mode to Manual. set Code Number for HS-PDSCH to 5.

3. 4.

Use a UE that belongs to category 8 or is capable of higher HSDPA performance to download 200 MB files from the FTP server in the serving cell. Select Service > Trace Management > Interface Trace Task > User from the navigation tree in Maintenance tab on NodeB LMT, select (DL)Hsdpa User Enhanced Schedule Data message, as shown in Figure 133-1.

Figure 133-1 User Tracing

5.

To query the ucMaxPdschCodeNum is 5, as shown in Figure 133-2.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

451

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB

Figure 133-2 Message Browser

6. 7.

Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA. In this step, set Dynamic Code Switch to OPEN(open). Trace (DL)Hsdpa User Enhanced Schedule Data message, ucMaxPdschCodeNum is less than the value of 5, it indicates the feature has been enabled. as shown in Figure 133-3.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

452

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

133 Configuring Dynamic Code Allocation Based on NodeB

Figure 133-3 Message Browser

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Dynamic Code Switch to CLOSE(close).

----End

Example
//Activation procedure //Operations on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=OPEN; //Verification procedure //Operations on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=CLOSE; //Operations on the BSC6900 side MOD UCELLHSDPA: CellId=0, AllocCodeMode=Manual, HsPdschCodeNum=5; //Operations on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=OPEN; //Deactivation procedure //Operations on the NodeB side SET MACHSPARA: DYNCODESW=CLOSE;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

453

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package

134
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-010611 HSDPA Enhanced Package.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The configurations of the features on which this feature depends are complete. This feature depends on the feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package.

l l

License This feature is not under license control. Other Prerequisites UE should support the functions connected with HSDPA Enhanced package.

Context
HSDPA enhanced package is introduced on the basis of WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package, and provides enhancement features to meet the QoS and HSDPA network requirements. Related features include: l l l l WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR WRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition WRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD WRFD-01061113 HS-DPCCH Preamble Support

Procedure
l For details about activate, verify, and deactivate procedures, see the following sections: 135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR 136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition 137 Configuring HSDPA DRD
Issue 05 (2012-12-31) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 454

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide


NOTE

134 Configuring HSDPA Enhanced Package

HS-DPCCH Preamble Support does not need to be activated, verified, or deactivated.

----End

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

455

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR

135
Prerequisites
l l l

Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061103 Scheduling based on EPF and GBR.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package License This feature is not under license control.

Context
The operator can set different QoS parameters such as priority, weight, and Guaranteed Bit Rate (GBR) for different users. Based on the QoS parameters, the Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF) algorithm can accurately allocate resources by proportion. This feature allows different users to obtain accurate differentiated experiences.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Scheduling Method to EPF(Enhanced PF). Run the NodeB MML command LST MACHSPARA to check that Scheduling Method is set to EPF. Run the NodeB MML command SET MACHSPARA (CME single configuration: NodeB Configuration Express > IUB_NodeB > Radio Layer > Locell Algorithm
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 456

Verification Procedure 1.

Deactivation Procedure 1.

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

135 Configuring Scheduling based on EPF and GBR

Parameters > MAC Parameters > MACHSPARA; CME batch modification center: 3.17 Modifying Physical NodeB Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Scheduling Method to an option other than EPF(Enhanced PF). ----End

Example
//Activation procedure SET MACHSPARA: SM=EPF; //Verification procedure LST MACHSPARA; //Deactivation procedure SET MACHSPARA: SM=PF;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

457

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition

136
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSDPA State Transition

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061111 HSDPA State Transition.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not have any special requirements for hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The feature WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package has been configured before this feature is activated.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
l l This feature enables the switching between the DCH and HS-DSCH and makes it possible for UEs to enjoy high-speed services. This feature also enables a UE with an ongoing BE service or streaming service to move to the CELL_FACH state to save system resources when the UE does not have data transmission for a long period.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, select the DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH and DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 458

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

136 Configuring HSDPA State Transition

1. 2.

Log in to the BSC6900 LMT and initiate Uu interface message tracing. Set up an HSDPA BE service, and do not perform any data operation for a period of time. Then, search for the RRC_RB_RECFG in the traced Uu interface message. Check the traced data to ensure that the value of the IE rrc-StateIndicator is cell-FACH (1), as shown in Figure 136-1. Figure 136-1 RRC_RB_RECFG message

Deactivation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, deselect the DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH and DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH check boxes under the parameter Dynamic Resource Allocation Switch.

----End

Example
//Activating HSDPA State Transition SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1&DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-1; //Deactivating HSDPA State Transition SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DraSwitch=DRA_HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0&DRA_PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH-0;

Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

459

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

137 Configuring HSDPA DRD

137
Prerequisites
l l

Configuring HSDPA DRD

This section describes how to activate, verify, and deactivate the optional feature WRFD-01061112 HSDPA DRD.

Dependencies on Hardware This feature does not depend on the hardware. Dependencies on Other Features The following features must be configured before this feature is activated: WRFD-010610 HSDPA Introduction Package and WRFD-020400 DRD Introduction Package.

License The license controlling this feature has been activated. For details on how to activate the license, see 4 Activating the UMTS License. For details about license items, see 2 Feature Activation and License Item Descriptions.

Context
This feature enables HSDPA-suitable services to be established on the HS-DSCH cell as much as possible if a UE is HS-DSCH capable, achieving better service performance.

Procedure
l Activation Procedure 1. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH (CME single configuration: UMTS Radio Global Configuration Express > Connection_Oriented RRM Switch Configuration > Connection Oriented Algorithm Switches; CME batch modification center: 3.15 Modifying RNC Parameters in Batches). In this step, set Direct retry switch to DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH or DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH according to the network plan.
NOTE

The DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH and the DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH can be turned on at the same time according to the network plan.

l
Issue 05 (2012-12-31)

Verification Procedure
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 460

RAN14.0 Feature Activation Guide

137 Configuring HSDPA DRD

1.

Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UCORRMALGOSWITCH to check whether DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH or DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH is set to ON. Expected result: The value of DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH or DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH is ON. Run the BSC6900 MML command LST UINTERFREQNCELL to query the interfrequency neighboring cells of cell 1 and whether Blind handover flag is set to TRUE. If Blind handover flag is set to FALSE, run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UINTERFREQNCELL. In this step, set Blind Handover Flag of cell 2 (inter-frequency neighboring cell of cell 1) to TRUE. If Blind handover flag is set to TRUE, go to Step 3. Run the BSC6900 MML command SET UFRCCHLTYPEPARA. In this step, set DL BE traffic threshold on HSDPA to an appropriate value. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLCAC. In this step, set Maximum HSDPA user number of cell 1 to 0. Run the BSC6900 MML command MOD UCELLALGOSWITCH. In this step, set HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL(HSDPA UU Load Admission Control Algorithm) to Cell CAC algorithm switch. Enable the UE in cell 1 to originate a PS FTP download service. The value of Maximum HSDPA user number in cell 1 is 0; therefore, the UE is handed over to cell 2 by using directed retry. The Uu message tracing or the UE CDT tracing shows that the RRC_RB_RECFG/RRC_RB_SETUP message is sent to the UE in cell 1 and the RRC_RB_RECFG_CMP/RRC_RB_SETUP_CMP message is sent to the RNC in cell 2.
NOTE

2.

3. 4. 5.

6.

This feature also supports the following scenario: If a UE in an R99 cell (cell 1) originates HSDPA streaming services or BE services, the UE can camp on an HSDPA cell (cell 2) through directed retry. In this scenario, cell 2 is the inter-frequency neighboring cell for blind handover of cell 1 and admission to cell 2 is allowed.

Deactivation Procedure 1. The feature does not need to be deactivated.

----End

Example
//Activating HSDPA DRD SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch= DR_RAB_SING_DRD_SWITCH-1; SET UCORRMALGOSWITCH: DrSwitch= DR_RAB_COMB_DRD_SWITCH-1; //Verifying HSDPA DRD MOD UINTERFREQNCELL: RNCId=1, Ce